Design Handbook for Schools

SCHOOL DESIGN HANDBOOK EDITION 2006

Produced by

Research, Innovation & Specifications Unit | Research & Procurement Branch| MOE

Copyright of Ministry of Education 2006

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any other information storage and retrieval systems, without prior permission in writing from the copyright holder. Applications for use of the information within should be addressed to Research & Procurement Branch, Infrastructure & Facility Services Group, Ministry of Education.

FOREWORD The Ministry of Education has invested a great deal of resources into

developing its school buildings. Many existing schools have seen their

facilities enlarged, renovated or rebuilt to purposefully fulfil the varying needs and expectations of school educators and students alike.

Today, the design direction for schools is towards innovative, adaptable

and flexible learning environments. Being centres of teaching and learning, it is an inarguable fact that the schools serve as important

models of inspiration for our young. Schools’ physical environments, at the same time, serve as the platforms which facilitate their intellectual and physical growth. Thus, it is of concern that our schools be built to be conducive, efficient and easily maintainable.

The collaborative efforts of educators and designers will continue to be helpful in creating desirable spaces to nurture our young. Improvements

that are responsive to the changing pedagogical styles will continue to be expected of our school buildings. To assist schools and designers in their tasks, Research & Procurement Branch (RPM) conducted a review of the School Design Handbook and put together existing good practices as well as fresh ideas on school design into this new 2006 edition.

As we resume our journey forward in school design and in garnering

even more learning points, it is hoped that the information herein would help facility planners to design learning environments that will be meaningful and enriching to both educators and students.

Acknowledgement Our deepest appreciation to the following for their invaluable input :

Subject Specialists Educational Technology Division, MOE Curriculum Planning & Development Division, MOE Co-Curricular Activities Branch, Education Programmes Division, MOE

Historical Reference Public Works Department

MOE also sincerely thanks all parties who have contributed and assisted in one way or another in the production of this new edition of The School Design Handbook.

USER’S REFERENCE

Entire Page No. Volume No.

Chapter Name Chapter No. Item No.

Sub-Item No.

Content

Key Point

Revision Series No. / Date

Section No. Section Name

REV-02/MAY 05

SCHOOL DESIGN HANDBOOK EDITION 2006

Vol. 1

Produced by

Research, Innovation & Specifications Unit | Research & Procurement Branch| MOE

Copyright of Ministry of Education 2006

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any other information storage and retrieval systems, without prior permission in writing from the copyright holder. Applications for use of the information within should be addressed to Research & Procurement Branch, Infrastructure & Facility Services Group, Ministry of Education.

FOREWORD The Ministry of Education has invested a great deal of resources into

developing its school buildings. Many existing schools have seen their

facilities enlarged, renovated or rebuilt to purposefully fulfil the varying needs and expectations of school educators and students alike.

Today, the design direction for schools is towards innovative, adaptable

and flexible learning environments. Being centres of teaching and learning, it is an inarguable fact that the schools serve as important

models of inspiration for our young. Schools’ physical environments, at the same time, serve as the platforms which facilitate their intellectual and physical growth. Thus, it is of concern that our schools be built to be conducive, efficient and easily maintainable.

The collaborative efforts of educators and designers will continue to be helpful in creating desirable spaces to nurture our young. Improvements

that are responsive to the changing pedagogical styles will continue to be expected of our school buildings. To assist schools and designers in their tasks, Research & Procurement Branch (RPM) conducted a review of the School Design Handbook and put together existing good practices as well as fresh ideas on school design into this new 2006 edition.

As we resume our journey forward in school design and in garnering

even more learning points, it is hoped that the information herein would help facility planners to design learning environments that will be meaningful and enriching to both educators and students.

School Design Handbook

Vol. 1

> GENERAL <

CONTENTS 1

School Design Philosophy

2

FlexSI Framework and Guideline 2.1

Overview

2.2

Design Concepts

2.3

2.4

3

FlexSI Design Provisions

Design Considerations 3.1

Introduction

3.2

Site Planning

3.4

Vision Care

3.3

4

The FlexSI Framework

Safety & Security / Emergency Planning

Appendices 4.1

Possible Classroom Configurations

4.2

Facilities with Adaptable Multiple Usages

4.4

Illustration of FAVE Space

4.6

Recommendations on Facilities and Finishes for

4.3 4.5

4.7 4.8 4.9

External Areas Designed as Learning Spaces

School White Area (SWA)

School White Area

Primary School Facilities Table Secondary School Facilities Table

Space Norms

Master Revision List Index

REV 00 - FEB 06

1 School Design Philosophy

VOL.

1

SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY

1.1-1

THE SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY

1.0

The School Design Philosophy embodies the important principles to be addressed in school design and development. The objective is: • To develop the school into a physical environment that is conducive to learning and play, one that provides

stimuli for the child’s mental and physical growth, and one that serves as the platform for the child to aspire towards his goal.

1.1

The objective can be translated in the form of efficient provisions or in the form of interesting design. In whatever form, the objective should foster in the designer the need to: •

Know the User

•

Examine the Function

•

Encourage Flexibility

•

Ensure Maintainability

•

Respond to the Climate

•

Understand the Site

2.0

The User

2.1

Understanding the profile and needs of the user, with respect to the following, is important in any building design. The user is defined by the following terms: •

Age group – primary, secondary or junior college students

•

Gender – all-girls, all-boys or co-educational

•

History – as a school, whether it has an established past or an identity

•

Specialty – whether the school has niche areas or offers special programmes in art, music, life sciences etc

•

Population – small capacity, big capacity, single or doublesession

•

Disability needs – full handicapped, basic handicapped, visual handicapped etc.

2.2

While the Age Group and Population will affect the scale of the building

components, the other four factors may contribute towards architectural language and building image.

The other factors also help to determine other special

provisions required by the school.

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

1

1.1-2

SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY

3.0

Function

3.1

One aspect of function that school designs ought to achieve is spatial efficiency. Spaces must be planned with clearly assigned functions. The operations within the room and the need for particular operations must be addressed and well-catered for.

3.2

The school ought to also be efficient in its use of resources such as water and energy. Double-volume air conditioning of facilities should be avoided. Corridors and walkways ought to be sufficiently daylit to minimize dependence on artificial lighting. Lux levels provided are to be suitable for rooms of different usages. Excessive water features, like fountains, are discouraged, in view of the need to conserve water and electricity consumption.

3.3

User safety and comfort is another essential component of functional design. User comfort encompasses factors such as general acoustic treatment, vision care and good ventilation, while user safety includes easy supervision, easy movement, good ergonomics and careful detailing.

3.4

Another crucial function of school design is to provide stimulus for the child’s

4.0

Flexibility

4.1

In designing the learning environment, there must be a conscious effort by

creative development and encourage his appreciation of nature and the outdoors.

architects to keep up with the dynamic changes in teaching pedagogy. Flexibility would prepare the school organization to adjust to new conditions and demands.

4.2

It has been widely acknowledged that one important consideration to addressing

4.3

Some ways to achieve flexibility would be to ensure sufficient space and to

such dynamics is through employing flexibility in design.

demarcate appropriate plots for expansion; to cater for multi-purpose and multisize usage of rooms and to encourage sharing of facilities and integrated learning.

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

1

1.1-3

SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY

5.0

Maintainability

5.1

It is necessary to ensure durability and hardiness of areas that are prone to weathering, wear and tear and vandalism. This aspect of maintainability should be

captured in the technical specifications and drawings for all types of works, such as roofing, metal and ironmongery, carpentry or sanitary fittings, among others.

5.2

It is also critical to ensure that the design and assembly of all building and spatial components cater for easy access for maintenance, cleaning, repair and replacement.

This would include discouraging the extensive use of certain

materials, e.g. glass; or discouraging certain building design, e.g. curved roofs, curved structures; and avoiding certain building elements, e.g. roof gutters which can cause ponding and lead to mosquito breeding.

5.3

The cost effectiveness of the design component, as seen from its life period, also needs to be considered.

6.0

The Climate

6.1

It is important for architects designing schools to consider Singapore’s tropical climate, especially since 85% of the schools’ built-up areas are naturally ventilated.

6.2

Some of the ways to address the heat and humidity of the tropical climate include: •

To orientate the front elevation of the buildings in the NorthSouth direction to minimize direct solar light and heat

transmission •

To provide effective roof overhangs to function as sunshading

devices • •

To introduce more balconies, single loaded corridors

To ensure generous fenestration or openings on walls for good cross ventilation

•

Use of glare-proof materials in external areas

•

Use of moisture-resistant materials in areas that are exposed to

the weather

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

1

1.1-4

7.0

SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY

The Site The site bears topographical features (land form and levels) and a physical

boundary (shape, orientation, frontage). The site also has critical relationship with its neighbours (surrounding buildings, traffic conditions and other users). These serve as pointers that can be used to establish the following:

7.1

Zoning within the site •

whether the buildings grouped together have compatible uses

•

where the quieter facilities should be located compared with the surrounding

•

7.2

where the noisier activities should be housed

How the buildings should be laid out in terms of massing and height •

whether the arrangement obstructs the neighbouring building

•

whether it blends in with the general surrounding

•

whether it affects areas reserved for future expansion

7.3

The appropriate location of green spaces and covered spaces

7.4

The orientation of the building blocks in relation to the climate

8.0

Conclusion The encapsulation of all the above as a set of design philosophy serves to guide all parties in the process of planning, detailing, choice of architectural style and image for the school building.

This is to ensure that our schools continue to have

adequate facilities to meet educational needs in the best possible way.

REV-00 / FEB 06

2 FlexSI Framework and Guideline 2.1

Overview 2.2

Design Concepts 2.3

The FlexSI Framework 2.4 FlexSI Design Provisions

VOL.

1

FLEXSI

2.1-1

1.0

Overview of the Flexible School Infrastructure (FLEX SI)

1.1

The FlexSI Concept

OVERVIEW

The Flexible School Infrastructure (FlexSI) was conceptualised to allow our school leaders more autonomy on the design of their schools, and to create flexible learning spaces and facilities that are sufficiently adaptable in order to support new pedagogies that will better engage our students in learning.

1.2

Objective The new framework will allow primary and secondary schools to design their building infrastructure so that it is sufficiently flexible to adapt to varying

classroom capacities, multiple functionalities and cater for future expansions as schools embark on new developments in pedagogy.

1.3

Design Concepts for Functional Flexibility The FlexSI framework proposes for school infrastructure to be designed to achieve the following:

REV-00 / FEB 06

a)

Modular Flexibility for Classroom Sizes / Dimensions

b)

Facilities with Adaptable Multiple Usages

c)

Design of External Areas as Learning Spaces

VOL.

1

FLEXSI

2.0 2.1

DESIGN CONCEPTS

2.2-1

Design Concepts Some schools may decide that they need smaller and/or larger classrooms

so

they

can

employ

different

pedagogical

approaches, or, so that they can engage students in different-

Modular Flexibility for Classroom Sizes

sized group activities. With modular flexibility, schools can

choose to vary the size of a classroom in modules of 45 m2

instead of the standard 90 m2. When the flexibility is not

needed, schools can revert to the classrooms’ standard size and capacity. 2.2

Schools can also opt for differing levels of flexibility in the

classrooms through the choice of the movable walls or partitions: a)

For day-to-day flexibility, a school may decide to design

some of its classrooms to have foldable walls which can

be opened to form a big lecture room to enable larger lecture style teaching for certain subjects/classes; or to

Day to day flexibility using movable partitions

partition a standard classroom into smaller rooms to cater to smaller groups of students with different learning abilities. However, there will be some trade-offs in installing foldable walls for this flexibility (compared

with the traditional brick wall classrooms) in terms of cost, durability and noise insulation. b)

Another possibility is to use mobile partition screens within the classroom space. The screens can be moved around to form enclosures for small group discussions,

or to isolate students who need to take private tests; or for independent learning. c)

For medium term (e.g. year-to-year) flexibility, schools can make use of dry wall partitions (gypsum board) instead of solid walls.

When the need arises, these

partitions can be removed without too much difficulty and

allow

reconfigured.

the

classroom

spaces

be

quickly

See Appendix 1 for examples of some

flexible classroom configurations.

REV-00 / FEB 06

to

Medium term flexibility using dry wall partitions

VOL.

1

FLEXSI

2.3

2.2-2

DESIGN CONCEPTS

Under FlexSI, certain school facilities can be used for multiple

purposes other than its intended function. Some schools currently make use of special teaching areas or rooms which are

relatively less utilized to make them adaptable for alternative or

Facilities with Adaptable Multiple Usages

multiple usages. 2.4

Schools wanting to use a facility for multiple functions can consider the use of flexible mechanisms with features such as folding, sliding, tilting and rotating to enhance the facility’s

Flexible Mechanisms

flexibility in space, lighting, display and storage capabilities. Furniture and equipment that can be stacked, modified or

wheeled can also be incorporated so that the room can be used for multiple functions such as training, projects, quizzes and

competitions. One possibility is to have mobile canteen tables so that they can be folded and wheeled away, making the

canteen space available for group or other activities. See Appendix 2 for examples. 2.5

Detachable “plug and play” components such as internet ready IT equipment supplemented by acoustic paneling can also be

Furniture & Equipment (F&E)

brought in to enhance infrastructural flexibility for adaptable usage.

For instance, the Music Room or AV Room could be

designed so that it could be converted into a recording studio

when the need arises for the school to produce AV recordings. Alternatively, the Music and AV Rooms could be located next to each other with a flexible partition between them, to enable

both the areas to be combined into a larger area for activities such as dance or drama practices. 2.6

The effective mode of learning differs from child to child. Facilities

or spaces can be configured to meet the needs of the relevant modes, whether interactive, experiential, independent or hands-on learning. Spaces outside classrooms can especially be exploited as potential learning spaces. For e.g. outdoor gardens, classroom

corridors and foyers can be designed to integrate teaching and learning functions. Such spaces generate exciting and varied

physical experiences to ignite the students’ learning passions. See Appendix 3 for examples.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Designing External Areas as Learning Spaces

VOL.

1

FLEXSI

2.3-1

The FlexSI FRAMEWORK

3.0

The FlexSI Framework

3.1

The FlexSI framework is represented diagrammatically as follows:Table 1:

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

1

FLEXSI

3.2

The FlexSI FRAMEWORK

2.3-2

The FlexSI framework is translated into the following Design Guideline. The guideline lays down the guiding principles, caps

and funding, roles and responsibilities and stipulates the major infrastructural provisions for schools. 3.3

In deciding on the design for FlexSI, schools should be guided by the following principles: a)

Guiding Principles

Spirit of Learning – the purpose is to promote learning

b) Safety - user safety must not be compromised at all times

c)

Sustainability

-

plan

for

sustainability

and

maintainability of the facilities over the longer term d)

Stewardship - exercise proper stewardship over the management of infrastructure resources to minimize wastages and maximize usage

3.4

Under the guideline, there are overall caps placed on the use of budget, the built-up area (both Nett Floor Area and Gross Floor Area) and the school’s design provisions as follows:

3.5

Schools that are undergoing PRIME can capitalize on the budget for upgrading to re-think their learning needs and build the school that can best support their vision for learning.

3.6

The remaining schools which have already undergone PRIME and/or will not be undergoing PRIME will be able to leverage on

the FlexSI Fund. If an Aided school is selected as a FlexSI Pilot School, it will be provided 95% of the amount.

3.7

Independent Schools currently have full flexibility in deciding on their facilities, and may already be provided with a wide range of facilities including lecture theatres and tutorial rooms. Hence, the

FlexSI framework will only serve as a guide to Independent

Schools, and provide them with more ideas on how they can make their infrastructure more flexible. provided.

REV-00 / FEB 06

No extra funding will be

Caps on FlexSI provisions

Caps on Funding

VOL.

1

FLEXSI

3.8

2.3-3

The FlexSI FRAMEWORK

In terms of areas, caps are placed on the total Nett Floor Area (NFA) per school. In primary and secondary schools, the total NFAs

Caps on Areas

not to be exceeded are 8878 m2 and 11682.5 m2 respectively. 3.9

Within the given NFA, limits are set on grouped areas such as the

School White Area (SWA) and FAVE space. Proposals for SWA shall not exceed 15% of the total NFA while proposals for FAVE space

shall be within 890 m2 for primary school, and 1110 m2 for secondary school (taken from 10% of the standard circulation area).

3.10

IT proposals, e.g. requests for additional IT points and equipment,

are to be catered for outside of the FlexSI design package as these are already made available under the existing IT grant.

3.11

FlexSI proposals that would result in significant recurrent costs are to be carefully considered and schools have to ensure their sustainability within their existing recurrent votes. E.g. the provision of air-conditioning to facilities to make them possible for multiple usages would incur substantial running costs.

3.12

Designs under the FlexSI concept must not be ostentatious and any aesthetic embellishments to the intended proposal must be excluded.

3.13

Containers or any other forms of temporary structures are not allowed to be used in the implementation of FlexSI.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Caps on Other Provisions

VOL.

1

FLEXSI

3.14

The FlexSI FRAMEWORK

2.3-4

The FlexSI guideline seeks to bring the relevant parties into design collaboration at the beginning stages of planning a new school so

Roles

the inputs can be captured and taken into the design process. The school

leaders,

the

design

consultant

and

the

Ministry’s

representative each have a part to play in contributing to the ideation

process.

For

schools,

it

is

important

to

have

representation from the different subject specialisation and user levels.

Inputs from the various stakeholders of the school can

bring added value to the process. 3.9

Schools will be engaged in the relevant thinking processes leading

to the formulation of the Needs Identification with the help of the design consultant. During the engagement sessions, schools

should freely express their needs and visions in terms of the pedagogical approaches, operational needs, educational strategies and

finally,

their

perceived

implications

on

the

physical

infrastructure. The consultant will consolidate these needs,

including considerations like the school’s profile, identity and culture, to arrive at the Schedule of Accommodation and the proposed school design.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Responsibilities

VOL.

1

FLEXSI

4.0

FlexSI DESIGN PROVISIONS

2.4-1

FlexSI Design Provisions The design provisions details the various facilities to be provided under FlexSI and what the school can decide on in the design of their schools. It consists of 4 main groups as listed below: a)

Group 1 - Essential Area

b)

Group 2 - School White Area (SWA)

c)

Group 3 - “FAVE” Space (Flexible, Adaptable and VErsatile)

d)

4.1

Group 4 - Others

The Essential Area lists the basic essential facilities that the school

must have to fulfil its basic instructional capabilities. The facilities are provided to address basic teaching and learning pedagogical

Essential Area (Group 1)

requirements. It places minimum limits on the size and number of units of each facility.

4.2

The Essential Area is grouped into 2 sub categories, namely the Fixed Specifications and the Flexible Specifications: a)

Fixed Specification consists of provisions which are

“non-negotiable” i.e. must be finished according to the minimum

specifications

provided

e.g.

Fixed Specification

the

administrative facilities such as the general office, staff rooms and some rooms for the specialised subjects. b)

Flexible Specification consists of areas which the school has the flexibility in deciding on number, configuration or size.

This allows a school greater

flexibility in mixing and matching the different learning spaces.

Note that the school must still

conform to the minimum number, type, modular size and

interior

provisions

of

the

facility

e.g.

the

classrooms and ancillary areas such as the Hall, Canteen and Library.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Flexible Specification

VOL.

1

FLEXSI

4.3

2.4-2

FlexSI DESIGN PROVISIONS

The School White Area is an existing concept which gives the school autonomy to design or modify certain areas within the

school. The school can choose to convert those areas designated

School White Area (Group 2)

as SWA (about 15% of the total nett floor area) into new facilities to

cater to the school’s special programmes and niche areas. It can change the existing function, area, finishes and internal provision of the facilities to create new facilities.

4.4

Under FlexSI, the SWA concept, funding and approval authority will remain unchanged. Please refer to the tables on School White Area Component in Appendix 5 and Appendix 6 for the details and recommendations on SWA facilities and provisions.

4.5

The “FAVE” concept makes use of “excess” areas that can be aggregated to become useful spaces, and which can remain flexible and available for future expansion needs that the school

FAVE Space (Group 3)

might not yet envisage. FAVE Spaces can be identified from the school’s circulation areas.

4.6

There is no set limit on the type of spaces that can be annexed for

FAVE area usage so long as the space fits the design objective of the selected function. Meanwhile, the space can be used as

informal learning areas cum circulation space. Under this concept, we estimate that up to a maximum of 10% of the total

circulation/service areas may become FAVE space. An illustration of FAVE space is found in Appendix 4.

4.7

The “Others” category provide for mainly external works such as the play courts, field and parade square. These facilities have to

Others (Group 4)

be provided as specified. If modifications to these facilities are

required, schools can submit the proposals to the relevant specialist in MOE for consideration.

4.8

The Facilities Tables for Primary Schools and Secondary Schools

sum up the infrastructural provision to be provided under FlexSI in terms of facility type, number of units, and unit area. These can be found in Appendix 7 and Appendix 8 respectively.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Facilities Tables for Primary and Secondary Schools

3 Design Considerations 3.1

Introduction 3.2

Site Planning 3.3

Safety & Security / Emergency Planning 3.4

Vision Care

VOL.

1

DESIGN

CONSIDERATIONS

3.1-1

INTRODUCTION

1.0

Introduction

1.1

This section serves to highlight the important considerations to be

1.2

followed in school design. They include: •

Site Planning

•

Safety & Security / Emergency Planning

•

Vision Care

During the design process, there would be other considerations which schools could review and which consultants could render their expertise on. These include:

1.3

•

Ergonomic design

•

Maintainability

•

Weather protection

These considerations apply to the design of the physical and spatial layout, roof, facade, building elements, finishes, internal provisions and fitment and furniture.

REV-00 / FEB 06

School Design Criteria

VOL.

1

DESIGN

CONSIDERATIONS

SITE PLANNING

3.2-1

2.0

Introduction

2.1

In every building design, the surrounding environment has significant impact on the quality of school facilities provided. There are

many factors that can favourably or adversely

influence the micro environment of the school. 2.2

Special design features in the building may be able to reduce, if not

eliminate,

the

unfavourable

effects.

Site

suitability

is

therefore an important aspect to be addressed at the onset of school development. 2.3

2.4

In order to achieve quality design, consideration must be given to the planning criteria outlined by the following site factors: ƒ

Site Area

ƒ

Site Configuration and Terrain

ƒ

Site Orientation

ƒ

Setback Requirements

ƒ

Zoning and Facilities Layout

Site factors to be considered

The following describes the afore-mentioned site factors. The elaboration in terms of particular dimensions and technical pointers can be referred to in Vol. 4 - Chapter 1 (Architectural) of the School Design Handbook.

2.5

Site Area At the inception of design, the area of the site has to be carefully examined by the architect in terms of feasibility for

school development. The site area should be fairly level without

Site area to be free

from encumbrances

excessive embankment and be free from drainage, sewerage or road reserve and service lines.

Where site encumbrances are

inevitable but within acceptable limits, a slightly bigger site area should be allowed for.

2.6

Site Configuration Sites of irregular shapes are not ideal for effective utilization of land. They often result in pockets of unusable land.

In land

scarce Singapore, it is necessary to optimise the usage of land as much as possible.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Site to be regular in shape and well optimised

VOL.

1

DESIGN

CONSIDERATIONS

2.7

SITE PLANNING

3.2-2

Site Orientation The

site

configuration

with

respect

to

its

orientation

is

important. A site with good orientation enables the buildings, particularly the classroom block(s), to be located in the correct

orientation, i.e. with the longer facade facing the North-South

Minimise the penetration of sunlight

direction. This is to minimise the penetration of sunlight and thus solar heat into the building. Deviations from the desired orientation should be addressed in the building design.

2.8

Setback & Spacing Requirements When planning the layout of the various blocks of the school, certain minimum setback distances from the site boundary and clearances between blocks have to be observed. This is to

provide the school with buffers against noise and distractions (from adjacent traffic or from neighbouring facilities). As the school building is largely naturally-ventilated, these setbacks help to create good cross ventilation within the site.

2.9

Zoning & Facilities Layout The placement of certain types of facilities in relation to other

types and the proximity between them usually take into account the functions and operational requirements of those facilities.

They affect the spatial flow within the school and influence the conduct of the activities. For e.g. the Canteen placed next to the

Facilities Layout to accommodate smooth operations and mass activity

Parade Square of Field enables the smooth spillover of mass

activity between facilities, minimizing bottle-neck situations and providing a safe and more comfortable accommodation for the students. Schools have areas that need to be secured and accesses to certain facilities need to be restricted. These are largely

dictated by the facilities layout plan within the school. Other considerations on zoning include emergency planning.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Zoning to achieve safety and security

VOL.

1

DESIGN

SAFETY & SECURITY

3.3-1

CONSIDERATIONS

3.0

Safety & Security

3.1

Every school must provide a safe environment for its students, staff and property. Safety or the physical well-

being of staff and students must be prioritized over other issues in the design of the building spaces, elements and

finishes, in fitment and furniture, as well as building services. 3.2

The following highlight the safety pointers for Consultants to

note,

in

terms

of

architectural,

emergency planning provisions in a school. 3.3

engineering

and

The design of spaces within the building must take into account

the

size

of

the

student

population

and

the

possibility of their mass movement. When students move in

Mass Accommodation

masses, wider corridors and even level flooring are to be

provided. Where differing levels occur between spaces on the same floor, ramps are preferred. 3.4

It is important to note the profile of students in terms of

their physical attributes, tendencies and the kinds of activity

Student Profile

they normally engage in so as to provide the appropriate

scale and design for all areas of building including furniture and fitment. 3.5

The implications of wet weather climate on student safety need to be addressed as our school buildings are largely open to the elements and are mostly naturally-ventilated.

3.6

Traffic, both vehicular and pedestrian, must be given due consideration and properly organized to ensure student safety at all times.

3.7

Care and precautionary steps need to be exercised in the installations

of

various

building

components

such

as

ceilings, M & E services, weather protection devices, so that they do not pose as safety hazards to the students and staff. 3.8

As schools house a large quantity of assets, including IT equipment and confidential materials, they need to be wellsecured within the right places and by the appropriate means.

REV 00 / FEB 06

Climatic implications

Pedestrian and vehicular traffic

Installations of building components

Security provisions

VOL.

1

DESIGN

CONSIDERATIONS

3.9

3.3-2

SAFETY & SECURITY

Certain facilities and areas within the school are out of bounds to students and unauthorized staff. Access to these facilities need to be strictly controlled by use of secure

Controlled Accesses

locking mechanisms, key systems or security alarm systems. 3.10

Thermal comfort and Environmental Health are extended areas of safety that affect the well-being of students and staff. Spaces and facilities ought to be designed to ensure good

cross

ventilation

and

acceptable

air

qualities.

Requirements relating to good hygiene need to be given due

Thermal Comfort and

Environmental Health

consideration at food preparation areas, refreshment areas and toilets within the school. 3.11

In time of emergency, the school must be well–prepared to

direct and guide its students and staff to areas of safety or to accommodate them in protected facilities within the school. Holding areas must be identified and equipped with Public Address (PA) Systems.

3.12

The particular specifications and technical details on all the

above requirements can be referred to in Chapters 1 & 2 of Vol.4.

REV 00 / FEB 06

Emergency Planning

VOL.

1

DESIGN

CONSIDERATIONS

VISION CARE

3.4-1

4.0

Vision Care

4.1

Vision care is an important design consideration in the planning of every facility. Schools can take the effort to promote good eye care habits among students while ensuring

the school environment is well-catered for the care of its

Objective of Vision Care in Facility Planning

students’ vision. 4.2

From the technical viewpoint, the desired vision care objective is to provide for a comfortable level of lighting for the various purposes that may be required during teaching and learning.

At the same time, it is to moderate the intensity of direct light coming from light sources and to minimize the glare that may be reflected off the working surfaces. 4.3

Facilities should hence be designed to take into account the

full range of lighting needs of the activities conducted within them. The environmental impact of light on the facility, e.g.

the amount of daylight, the solar orientation and the design of sunshades, as well as the vision care implications on these

activities, must also be evaluated in order to achieve the objectives. 4.4

There are some possible technical pointers that could affect the vision care requirement of school facilities. These include: ƒ

Layout of facility in relation to the solar orientation

ƒ

Number and size of window openings

ƒ

Arrangement of students’ seats and work tables in relation to source of light and teaching surfaces e.g. whiteboard, projection screen

ƒ

Placement

of

whiteboard

/

relation to the source of light

REV-00 / FEB 06

projection

screen

in

ƒ

Students’ viewing angles to the teaching surfaces

ƒ

Type of material for whiteboard surface

ƒ

Size of text used on whiteboard and projection screen

ƒ

Type and number of lightings provided

ƒ

Choice of room colour

Implications on Vision Care

VOL.

1

DESIGN

CONSIDERATIONS

4.5

3.4-2

VISION CARE

The guidelines on how to address vision care in facility design

can be referred to in Vol. 4, Chapters 1 & 2 of the School

Design Handbook. Some of them are highlighted below:

4.6

Non-air-conditioned rooms shall be orientated with their

windows facing the North-South direction. This is to ensure that

the

whiteboard

incoming sunlight.

receives

minimum

glare

from

the

4.7

Sunshades shall be provided along the windows facing the

4.8

The first 2m of the wall perpendicular to the whiteboard shall

Guidelines on Vision Care

North-South Orientation

exterior.

not have windows or openings that would allow light to infiltrate. This is to minimize glare on the whiteboard surface.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Minimize Glare on Whiteboard surface

4 Appendices 4.1

Possible Classroom Configurations 4.2

Facilities with Adaptable Multiple Usages 4.3 External Areas Designed as Learning Spaces 4.4

Illustration of FAVE Space 4.5

School White Area (SWA) 4.6

Recommendations on Facilities and Finishes for School White Area 4.7

Primary School Facilities Table 4.8

Secondary School Facilities Table 4.9

Space Norms

VOL.

1

APPENDICES

4.1-1

CLASSROOM CONFIGURATIONS

APPENDIX 1. EXAMPLES OF POSSIBLE CLASSROOM CONFIGURATIONS 1

Day to Day (Immediate) Flexibility Full height operable partitions can be used to reconfigure a space within a

short time span of perhaps 10 to 15 minutes. Additionally, mobile furniture and equipment (F & E) which can be easily shifted within a facility as well as from room to room can be used. Thus both teachers and students will be able to quickly configure a space to suit their requirements. 2

Medium Term Flexibility Compared to solid walls, dry wall partitions will take a shorter time to remove (about 3 days) when a reconfiguration of space is required.

3

Sample Configuration 1:

Sliding Folding Partition

“Lecture” style teaching can be conducted when partition is opened

Dry wall partition reconfigured into resource areas

3.1

In this illustration, both degrees of flexibility have been incorporated: The sliding folding partition allows 2 classrooms to be combined into 1 large

classroom. The enlarged classroom space can be used for lecture-style teaching on a day-to-day need basis, simply by opening the sliding folding partition in between.

On the other hand, for the purpose of medium term flexibility, for e.g. when

physical niches are needed to accommodate resource corners within the classroom, the drywall partition in between can be easily removed and reconfigured.

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

1

APPENDICES

4

4.1-2

CLASSROOM CONFIGURATIONS

Sample Configuration 2:

“Instructional” style teaching being conducted

Mobile partition acts as visual screen

Small Group discussion

4.1

In this illustration, we can see that the enlarged classroom allows the teacher to explore different pedagogical styles. The teacher in this case, is formally teaching a set of students while at the same time monitoring another set of students seated in small discussion groups.

The partially closed sliding

folding partition and the mobile screen aid to minimize visual distractions for students involved in the small group discussions.

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

1

APPENDICES

4.2-1

FACILITIES WITH MULTIPLE

ADAPTABLE USAGES

APPENDIX 2. EXAMPLES OF FACILITIES WITH MULTIPLE ADAPTABLE USAGES

The photo on the left shows an example of an Indoor Sports Hall with retractable tiered seating neatly flushed against the wall when seating is not required, thus clearing the space

for other activities. However, as shown in the photo on the right, when there is need for seating of an audience, the tiered seating is pulled out. This flexibility allows the Hall to be utilized for multiple functions.

A school can opt to divide Canteen space into several Canteen areas distributed

throughout the school. For example, the school can have a smaller Canteen and another café-style eating area near the library. Alternatively, the school can transform some of its smaller yet open common spaces into the snack bars. These satellite eating spaces provide venues for student interaction and can be used as learning areas outside their

classrooms. When required for other purposes, the chairs and tables can be moved aside.

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

1

APPENDICES

4.3-1

EXTERNAL AREAS AS LEARNING SPACES

APPENDIX 3. EXAMPLES OF EXTERNAL AREAS DESIGNED AS LEARNING SPACES

This is an example of an outdoor amphitheatre. It can be used for performing arts events as well as for informal group briefings.

The above picture shows a corridor outside the Mother Tongue Language

Room which has been modified into a display gallery showcasing the Malay Culture. The corridor can be used for other forms of display and become a highly interactive space for learning.

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

1

APPENDICES

FAVE AREAS

4.4-1

APPENDIX 4. ILLUSTRATION OF “FAVE” (Flexible, Adaptable and VErsatile) SPACE

Before Expansion Corridor

Study Corner

Staircase

“FAVE”

Room Space

Room Space

space

After Expansion Corridor

Staircase

Study Corner

Room Space enlarged

“optimized”

As part of the school design, FAVE space can be carved out of the circulation areas to serve as informal learning spaces. When a room needs to be enlarged for a larger class size, for example, the FAVE space can then be aggregated together with the existing space within the room.

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

1

APPENDICES

SCHOOL WHITE AREA

4.5-1

APPENDIX 5: OVERVIEW 1.1

‘School White Area’ (SWA) is a planning concept that allows schools undergoing development greater flexibility in deciding the facilities requirement for the schools’ special programmes and niche areas.

1.2

The more common SWA facilities requested by schools are for

various functions including Multi-purpose use, Sports, Performing Arts, Archive and Heritage display, Dance and Music. On the other

hand, the commonly replaced “basic” facilities include the CCA

Commonly requested facilities

rooms and the Mother Tongue Language rooms. A complete list is shown in Appendices 6. 1.3

Under the SWA concept, 15% to 20% of the standard school nett floor area can be utilised to change the existing standard facilities, or to

create new ones that are not found within schools’ standard

provision. The funds for these facilities would be arranged by the replacement cost method. 1.4

The school submitting proposals for their change request would have to obtain approval through MOE.

1.5

Finishes and interior provisions for SWA facilities could be proposed

by the school, for the architect’s evaluation and MOE’s approval.

This is to encourage creativity and innovation. Schools can also refer

Approval process

Recommended finishes

to a list of recommended finishing for the different facilities as shown in Appendix 6. 1.6

The overall costs of both ‘basic’ areas and SWA must be within the project budget. If there is cost overrun due to new facilities under the SWA, schools will be asked to fund the extra costs.

1.7

Schools’ proposal for SWA request must be: •

in line with educational needs, whether they pertain to teaching or ancillary facilities that support the schools’ ability-driven programmes and niches.

•

within the total nett floor area (NFA) of standard facilities and project cost

•

within the approved caps on maintenance and running costs for standard facilities

•

put to use for a minimum period proposal time to take effect

REV-00 / FEB 06

of 5 years in order to give the

Planning criteria for SWA

VOL.

1

APPENDICES

1.8

4.5-2

SCHOOL WHITE AREA

The following facilities are not allowed: •

Running tracks and swimming pools - these would require more land area and are costly to build and maintain

•

Covered car-parks

•

Air-conditioning of classrooms

•

Facilities which are ostentatious or opulent in nature

•

Increase in administrative and personnel areas that are in contradiction to Inter-Ministry guidelines

1.9

For the external areas, the current provision of a Field, a Basketball Court and Netball cum Volleyball Court must be retained, as advised by the Educational Programmes Division.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Facilities that are not allowed

VOL.

1

APPENDICES

APPENDIX 6A.

RECOMMENDED

4.6-1

SWA FACILITIES

SCHOOL WHITE AREA FACILITIES IN PRIMARY SCHOOL Basic Facilities Facility

1

Mother Tongue Language

White Area Facilities

Unit

Total Area

Unit

Total Area (m 2 )

(No)

(m 2 )

(No)

0

0

3

135

Room 2

Mathematics Room

0

0

1

90

3

Art & Crafts Room

1

90

1

90

4

Audio Visual Room (A/C)

0

0

2

180

5

Music Room (A/C)

1

90

1

90

6

Science Room

1

90

1

90

7

IT Learning Resource Room

0

0

1

90

8

Meeting Room (A/C)

0

0

1

65

9

Counselling Room

0

0

1

24

10

Furniture Store

0

0

1

65

11

Games Equipment Store

0

0

1

65

12

CCA Room

0

0

3

195

13

Pastoral Care Room

0

0

1

40

14

Health & Fitness Room

0

0

1

65

REV-00 / FEB 06

(A/C)

VOL.

1

APPENDICES

APPENDIX 6B.

4.6-2

RECOMMENDED SWA FACILITIES

SCHOOL WHITE AREA FACILITIES IN SECONDARY SCHOOL Basic Facilities Facility

White Area Facilities

Unit

Total Area (m 2 )

(No)

Unit

Total Area

(No)

(m 2 )

1

Mother Tongue Language

0

0

3

135

2

Humanities Room

0

0

1

90

3

Humanities Workroom

0

0

1

22.5

4

Commerce Room

0

0

1

135

5

Art & Crafts Room

1

135

1

135

6

Project Room

0

0

1

45

7

Casting Room

0

0

1

22.5

8

Audio Visual Room (A/C)

0

0

1

135

9

AV Store

0

0

1

45

10

IT Learning Resource Room

1

90

2

180

11

Needlework Room

0

0

1

115

12

Design Room

0

0

1

200

13

Design Room Store

0

0

1

20

14

Prefects’ Room

0

0

1

25

15

Counselling Room

0

0

1

24

16

Career Guidance Room

0

0

1

40

17

Meeting Room (A/C)

0

0

1

65

18

Furniture Store

0

0

1

72

19

Games Equipment Store

0

0

1

72

20

CCA Room

0

0

4

96

21

Health & Fitness Room

0

0

1

72

22

NCC/NPCC Room

0

0

2

48

23

Rifle Range

0

0

1

208

24

Armoury

0

0

1

20

Room

(A/C)

Total Nett Floor Area

REV-00 / FEB 06

225

2022

VOL.

1

APPENDICES

RECOMMENDED FINISHES FOR SWA FACILITIES

4.6-3 APPENDIX 6C. RECOMMENDED FINISHING FOR SWA FACILITIES

MAGNETIC

PIN-UP

PROJECTION

MASTERKEY

Emulsion paint

Nil

Nil

Nil

Acoustic Panels

Suspended

Yes

Yes

Acoustic Panels

Suspended

Nil

ITEM

FACILITY/ROOM

DESCRIPTION OF USAGE

FLOOR

WALL/ PARTITION

CEILING

1

Art Gallery

To display students' art works and art pieces

Homogenous Ceramic Tiles

Emulsion paint

2

Multi-Purpose Room

For group function, rehearsals, small performances etc.

Homogenous Ceramic Tiles

3

Band Room

For band, Chinese orchestra and dance practices

Timber Strip Flooring

Ceiling

WHITEBOARD

SECURITY

OTHERS

Nil

High

Nil

Yes

Master key

Medium

Nil

Yes

Yes

Master key

High

Nil

BOARD

SCREEN

GROUPINGS

Ceiling 4

Dance Studio

For practical and theory dance lessons

Timber Sport Floor

Full-height mirrored Wall on 3 sides and

Suspended

Yes

Yes

Yes

Master key

Medium

Nil

5

Music Room

For practical and theory music lessons; shared between band

Timber Strip Flooring

Full-height mirrored Wall on 1 side and

Suspended

Yes

Yes

Yes

Master key

Medium

Nil

6

Archives Room

Storage of school's heritage items

Homogeneous Ceramic Tiles

Emulsion paint

Suspended

Nil

Nil

Nil

Masterkey

High

Nil

and choir

acoustic wall panels

acoustic wall panels

Ceiling

Ceiling

Ceiling 7

Heritage Centre

Display of school's heritage items

Homogeneous Ceramic Tiles

Emulsion paint

Suspended

Nil

Nil

Nil

Master key

High

Nil

8

Career Resource

Stores informative charts, reference documents, software and

Cement screed

Emulsion paint

Emulsion paint

Yes

Yes

Yes

Master key

Medium

Nil

9

Creativity Room

Cement screed

Emulsion paint

Suspended

Yes

Yes

Yes

Master key

Medium

Nil

Room

communication tools on career development; for interviews,

Ceiling

consultations on career resource For multi-purpose usage and CCA; enrichment programmes as well as teaching of mother tongue language 10 11

Ceiling

Centre of Learning

Teaching of Chinese language, literature, conducting group

Vinyl

Emulsion paint

Suspended

Yes

Yes

Yes

Master key

High

Nil

Cooperative Learning

For project work & students' extra school hour activities

Homogenous Ceramic Tiles

Emulsion paint

Suspended

Yes

Nil

Yes

Master key

Medium

Nil

(Chinese Studies) Room

activity etc.

Ceiling

Ceiling

12

CCA Room

Used for CCA group activities and meetings

Homogenous Ceramic Tiles

Emulsion paint

Emulsion paint

Yes

Yes

Yes

Master key

Medium

Nil

13

Guzheng Ensemble

For Guzheng music practices

Timber Strip Flooring

Acoustic Panel Wall

Suspended

Yes

Yes

Yes

Master key

High

Nil

14

Health & Fitness

For working out on fitness equipment

Vinyl Sports Flooring

Emulsion paint and mirror for one wall

Suspended

Nil

Nil

Nil

Master key

High

Nil

Robotics Laboratory/

For testing robotics experiments; includes "playfield" in centre

Vinyl

Emulsion Paint

Suspended

Nil

Yes

Nil

Master key

Medium

Nil

Inotech Room

of room that calls for change in standard LAN pt layout

15

Room

Room

16

Youth Hub

For student recreational activities

17

Auditorium

For performances/ seminar/ lectures/ training

17.1

Seating Area

Ceiling

Ceiling

Ceiling Vinyl

Emulsion Paint

Emulsion paint

Nil

Nil

Nil

Master key

Medium

Nil

For conducting school performances, ceremonies

Carpet Tiles

Acoustic timber / fabric panelling

Suspended

Nil

Nil

Nil

Master key

Medium

Fixed Theatre

For lectures / seminars

Acoustic Vinyl

Acoustic timber panelling

Suspended

Nil

Nil

Nil

Master key

Medium

Seats with flip-

For conducting school performances, ceremonies

T&G timber strips/board

Emulsion Paint

Emulsion paint

Nil

Nil

Yes

Nil

Nil

Nil

For lectures / seminars

Acoustic vinyl for lecture-style

Emulsion Paint

Suspended

Nil

Nil

Yes

Nil

Nil

Nil

ceiling

ceiling 17.2

Stage

(inlcuding stage steps)

platform

ceiling

Seats

up writing tops

17.3

Control Room

For housing and operating sound and video equipment

Vinyl

Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint

Nil

Yes

Nil

Master key

High

Nil

17.4

Changing Rooms

For changing in between performances, housing of props etc.

Non-slip homogeneous ceramic

Wall tiles up to 2.2m high only

Suspended

Yes

Yes

Nil

Key Alike

Medium

Nil

tiles 17.5

Toilet

Sanitary uses

17.6

Reception (Lobby) for

auditorium with above 400-seats only

ceiling

Non-slip homogeneous ceramic

Wall tiles up to 2.2m high only

Emulsion paint

Nil

Nil

Nil

Key Alike

Medium

Nil

For performance auditorium, a holding area for guests before

Carpet Tiles

Emulsion Paint

Suspended

Nil

Nil

Nil

Master key

Medium

Nil

programme starts, for reception, refreshments

tiles

ceiling

For lecture theatre, as a receiving /registration area only

Homogenous Ceramic Tiles

Emulsion paint

Emulsion paint

Nil

Yes

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

17.7

Store Room

For storing furniture and props

Cement screed

Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint

Nil

Nil

Nil

Key Alike

Nil

Nil

18

Strong Room

For storing PSLE question papers and confidential documents

Homogenous Ceramic Tiles

Emulsion paint

Emulsion paint

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

High

Smoke Detector

before and after the examinations.

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

1

PRIMARY SCHOOL

APPENDICES

FACILITIES TABLE

4.7-1

APPENDIX 7. ESSENTIAL AREA (GROUP 1) FIXED SPECIFICATION FACILITY TYPE

NO. OF

UNIT AREA

Min.

Min. 45

UNITS

(m2)

REMARKS

FLEXIBLE

SPECIFICATION

GENERAL TEACHING 1

CLASSROOM (1 CLASSROOM TO BE DESIGNATED AS LEARNING SUPPORT COORDINATOR’S

42

To provide for maximum

School to decide on the number

capacity of 1440 students per

of units, size (in modular

When required, built area must

configuration, depending on its

session.

ROOM)

be able to revert to 42 units of

increments of 45 m2) and needs.

90m2. (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL)

3780

SPECIAL TEACHING 1

ART & CRAFTS ROOM

Min.

Min. 90

2

MUSIC ROOM (A/C)

Min.

Min. 90

1

1 3

MUSIC STORE

Min.

Min. 45

4

SCIENCE ROOM

Min.

Min. 90

1

-Nil-

Can explore provisions for multiple usages.

1 5

COMPUTER ROOM (A/C)

Min.

Min. 135

3 (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL)

720

ADMINISTRATIVE/STAFF 1

PRINCIPAL'S OFFICE (A/C)

1

20

2

VICE-PRINCIPAL'S OFFICE (A/C)

1

12 per VP

per VP

Must adhere to existing IM

guidelines on space provisions

ADMINISTRATION MANAGER 3

(A/C)

3

8 per staff

for individual staff.

OPERATION MANAGER (A/C) 4

GENERAL OFFICE (A/C)

1

Min. 54

5

OFFICE STORE

Min. 1

Min. 20

6

PRINTING ROOM (A/C)

Min. 1

Min. 20

7

SICK BAY

Min. 1

Min. 20

8

H.O.Ds’ OFFICE (A/C)

Min. 1

103

-NilTo provide for 10 staff and workstation area of 8 m2 per

HOD. 9

STAFF ROOM (A/C)

Min.

502

To provide for 94 staff and

1 10

STAFF LOUNGE (A/C)

Min.

workstation area of 4 m2 per

staff. Min. 40

1 11

STAFF RESOURCE ROOM (A/C)

Min.

Min. 65

1 (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL)

REV-02 / FEB 06

880

-Nil-

Can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM

guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.

VOL.

1

PRIMARY SCHOOL

APPENDICES

4.7-2

FACILITIES TABLE

ESSENTIAL AREA (GROUP 1) – CON’T FIXED SPECIFICATION FACILITY TYPE

NO. OF

UNIT AREA

UNITS

(m2)

Min.

Min. 368

1

1070

FLEXIBLE

SPECIFICATION

REMARKS

ANCILLARY 1

MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY (A/C)

2

MULTI-PURPOSE HALL

1

-

STAGE AREA

1

Min. 30

-

SEATING AREA

1

Min. 910

To provide Librarian Workroom

Can explore provisions for

Hall’s seating area to provide

If the Stage and Seating areas

capacity for maximum

total less than 1070 m2, the

performance stage has to be

with other facilities e.g. AV Room

is not provided in the Hall, the

stage.

and Instructional Area.

enrolment and staff. A full provided in the school. If this

multiple usages.

excess area can be recombined to include the full performance

Hall area shall accommodate a minimum basic stage. 3

CANTEEN

Min. 1

Min. 700

Total Canteen areas to provide

School can decide on different

enrolment per session over 2

area must not be less than

for maximum student recess periods.

canteen type but total minimum 700m2.

Can explore provisions for multiple usages.

Can be combined with “FAVE” areas. 4

BOOK SHOP

Min.

Min. 12

5

DENTAL CLINIC (A/C)

1

42

6

NON-TEACHING STAFF ROOM

1

10

1

Can explore provisions for multiple usages.

-NilCan explore provisions for multiple usages.

(RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL)

2214

TOTAL ESSENTIAL AREA

7594

REV-02 / FEB 06

VOL.

1

PRIMARY SCHOOL

APPENDICES

FACILITIES TABLE

4.7-3

SCHOOL WHITE AREA (GROUP 2) FLEXIBLE SPECIFICATION FACILITY TYPE

NO. OF

UNIT

TOTAL

UNITS

AREA

AREA

3

45

135

(m2)

REMARKS

(m2)

GENERAL TEACHING 1

MOTHER TONGUE LANGUAGE ROOM

This facility can be converted into other

facilities.

SPECIAL TEACHING 2

MATHEMATICS ROOM

1

90

90

3

ART & CRAFTS ROOM / ART STORE

1

90

90

4

AUDIO VISUAL ROOM (A/C)

2

90

180

5

MUSIC ROOM (A/C)

1

90

90

6

SCIENCE ROOM

1

90

90

7

IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM (A/C)

1

90

90

These facilities can be converted into other

facilities to support the school’s niche areas.

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF AREAS 1

COUNSELLING ROOM

1

24

24

These facilities can be converted into other

2

MEETING ROOM (A/C)

1

65

65

facilities to support the school’s niche areas.

ANCILLARY 1

CCA ROOM

3

65

195

2

PASTORAL CARE ROOM

1

40

40

3

HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM

1

65

65

4

FURNITURE STORE

1

65

65

GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE

1

65

5

TOTAL SCHOOL WHITE AREA

TOTAL NFA * INCLUDING : ESSENTIAL AREA, SCHOOL WHITE AREA * The total NFA of the school must not exceed 8878m2

REV-02 / FEB 06

65 1284

8878m2

These facilities can be converted into other

facilities to support the school’s niche areas.

VOL.

1

PRIMARY SCHOOL

APPENDICES

4.7-4

FACILITIES TABLE

“FAVE” AREA (GROUP 3) FIXED SPECIFICATION

TYPE OF SPACE

Approximately

890m2

FLEXIBLE SPECIFICATION

1

CIRCULATION SPACE

2

SERVICES AREAS

school’s circulation space can be carved

(10%) of the

TOTAL “FAVE” AREA (M2)

890

from.

To cater for future expansion of facilities while currently serving as informal learning spaces.

OTHER AREA (GROUP 4) FIXED SPECIFICATION FACILITY TYPE

NO. OF UNITS

DIMENSIONS (m)

TOTAL AREA (m2)

1

STAFF & VISITORS CAR PARK LOTS

23

4.8 x 2.4

265

2

BUS LOTS

4

13.2 X 3.6

190

3

MOTORCYCLE LOTS

6

2.4 X 1.0

14.4

4

BASKETBALL COURT

1

32.0 X 19.0

608

5

NETBALL-CUM-VOLLEYBALL COURT

1

32.0 X 17.0

544

6

PLAYFIELD

1

80.0 x 40.0

3200

7

PARADE SQUARE

1

40.0 x 30.0

1200

8

OUTDOOR FITNESS AREA

1

30.0 x 4.0

120

REV-02 / FEB 06

REMARKS

In general, these facilities have to be provided as stated. Schools will be required to justify all deviations.

VOL.

1

SECONDARY SCHOOL

APPENDICES

FACILITIES TABLE

4.8-1

APPENDIX 8. ESSENTIAL AREA (GROUP 1) FACILITY TYPE

FIXED SPECIFICATION NO. OF

UNIT

UNITS

AREA (m2)

Min.

Min. 45

REMARKS

FLEXIBLE

SPECIFICATION

GENERAL TEACHING 1

CLASSROOM

34

To provide for maximum

School to decide on the

capacity of 1520 students per

number of units, size (in

When required, built area must

and configuration, depending

session.

be able to revert to 38 units of

modular increments of 45 m2) on its needs.

90m2. (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL)

3420

SPECIAL TEACHING 1

ART & CRAFTS ROOM

Min.

Min. 135

2

ART STORE

Min.

Min. 22.5

1

1 3

MUSIC ROOM (A/C)

Min.

Min. 135

4

MUSIC STORE

Min.

Min. 45

1

1 5

IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM (A/C)

Min.

Min. 90

1 6

COMPUTER ROOM (A/C)

Min.

Min. 135

7

SCIENCE LABORATORY

Min.

Min. 144

4

-Nil-

Can explore provisions for multiple usages.

6 8

LAB PREP ROOM / STORE

Min.

Min. 50

3 9

KITCHEN

Min.

Min. 125

10

KITCHEN PREP ROOM / STORE

Min.

Min. 42

2

1 (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL)

2273.5

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 1

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY STUDIO 1

1

Min. 360

2

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY STUDIO 2

1

Min. 240

3

WOOD MACHINE SHOP

1

Min. 124

4

MAIN STORE

1

Min. 40

5

TOOLS STORE

1

Min. 40

6

D & T STAFF ROOM (A/C)

1

24

7

D & T STUDIO (LS)

1

Min. 300

-NilCan explore provisions for multiple usages. As required for schools

offering lower secondary curriculum only.

(RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL)

REV-02 / FEB 06

828 (excluding D & T Studio (LS))

VOL.

1

SECONDARY SCHOOL APPENDICES

4.8-2

FACILITIES TABLE

ESSENTIAL AREA (GROUP 1) – CON’T FACILITY TYPE

FIXED SPECIFICATION NO. OF UNITS

UNIT

AREA (m2)

FLEXIBLE SPECIFICATION

REMARKS

ADMINISTRATIVE/STAFF 1

PRINCIPAL'S OFFICE (A/C)

1

20

2

VICE-PRINCIPAL'S OFFICE (A/C)

1

12 per VP

per VP ADMINISTRATION MANAGER 3

(A/C)

3

OPERATION MANAGER (A/C) 4

GENERAL OFFICE (A/C)

5

OFFICE STORE

Must adhere to existing IM 8 per staff

1

Min. 54

Min.

Min. 20

guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.

1 6

PRINTING ROOM (A/C)

Min.

Min. 20

7

SICK BAY

Min.

Min. 20

1

Can explore different layouts but -Nil-

8

H.O.Ds’ OFFICE (A/C)

Min.

113

To provide for 11 staff and

9

STAFF ROOM (A/C)

Min.

390

To provide for 73 staff and

10

STAFF LOUNGE (A/C)

Min.

Min. 40

11

STAFF RESOURCE ROOM (A/C)

Min.

Min. 65

1 1

guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.

1 1

must adhere to existing IM

workstation area of 8 m2 per HOD. workstation area of 4 m2 per staff.

-Nil-

1 (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL)

778

ANCILLARY 1

MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY (A/C)

Min.

Min. 450

1 2

MULTI-PURPOSE HALL

1

1177

-

STAGE AREA

1

Min. 30

-

SEATING AREA

1

Min. 990

To provide Librarian Workroom and

Can explore provisions for

Instructional Area.

multiple usages.

Hall’s seating area to provide

If the Stage and Seating areas

capacity for maximum enrolment

total less than 1070 m2, the

has to be provided in the school. If

with other facilities e.g. AV Room

and staff. A full performance stage this is not provided in the Hall, the Hall area shall accommodate a minimum basic stage.

3

CANTEEN

Min.

Min. 700

1

excess area can be recombined to include the full performance stage.

Total Canteen areas to provide for

School can decide on different

maximum student enrolment per

canteen type but total minimum

session over 2 recess periods.

area must not be less than 700m2.

Can explore provisions for multiple usages. Can be combined with “FAVE” areas. 4

BOOK SHOP

Min.

Min. 12

1

-Nil-

5

DENTAL CLINIC (A/C)

1

42

To provide facility as required only.

6

NON-TEACHING STAFF ROOM

1

10

-Nil-

Can explore provisions for multiple usages. -NilCan explore provisions for multiple usages.

(RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL)

2361 (excluding Dental Clinic)

TOTAL ESSENTIAL AREA

9660.5

REV-02 / FEB 06

VOL.

1

SECONDARY SCHOOL

APPENDICES

FACILITIES TABLE

4.8-3

SCHOOL WHITE AREA (GROUP 2) FLEXIBLE SPECIFICATION FACILITY TYPE

NO. OF

UNIT

TOTAL

UNITS

AREA

AREA

3

45

135

(m2)

REMARKS

(m2)

GENERAL TEACHING 1

MOTHER TONGUE LANGUAGE ROOM

This facility can be converted into other facilities.

SPECIAL TEACHING 2

HUMANITIES ROOM

1

90

90

3

HUMANITIES WORKROOM / STORE

1

22.5

22.5

4

COMMERCE ROOM

1

135

135

5

ART & CRAFTS ROOM

1

135

135

6

PROJECT ROOM

1

45

45

7

CASTING ROOM

1

22.5

22.5

8

AUDIO VISUAL ROOM (A/C)

1

135

135

9

AV STORE

1

45

45

10

IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM (A/C)

2

90

180

11

NEEDLEWORK ROOM

1

115

115

These facilities can be

converted into other facilities to support the school’s niche areas.

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 1

DESIGN ROOM

1

200

200

2

DESIGN ROOM STORE

1

20

20

These facilities can be converted into other facilities to support the school’s niche areas.

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF AREAS 1

PREFECTS’ ROOM

1

25

25

2

COUNSELLING ROOM

1

24

24

3

CAREER GUIDANCE ROOM

1

40

40

4

MEETING ROOM (A/C)

1

65

65 96

These facilities can be

converted into other facilities to support the school’s niche areas.

ANCILLARY 1

CCA ROOM

4

24

2

NPCC / NCC ROOM

2

24

48

3

ARMOURY

1

20

20

4

RIFLE RANGE

1

208

208

5

HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM

1

72

72

6

FURNITURE STORE

1

72

72

1

72

72

7

GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE TOTAL SCHOOL WHITE AREA

converted into other facilities to support the school’s niche areas.

2022

TOTAL NFA * INCLUDING : ESSENTIAL AREA, SCHOOL WHITE AREA * The total NFA of the school must not exceed 11682.5m2

REV-02 / FEB 06

These facilities can be

11682.5m2

VOL.

1

SECONDARY SCHOOL APPENDICES

4.8-4

FACILITIES TABLE

“FAVE” AREA (GROUP 3) FIXED SPECIFICATION

TYPE OF SPACE

Approximately

1110m2

1

CIRCULATION SPACE

2

SERVICES AREAS

school’s circulation space can be

TOTAL “FAVE” AREA (M2)

1110

FLEXIBLE SPECIFICATION

(10%) of the

To cater for future expansion of

facilities while currently serving as

carved from.

informal learning spaces.

OTHER AREA (GROUP 4) FIXED SPECIFICATION FACILITY TYPE

NO. OF

DIMENSIONS (m)

TOTAL AREA

UNITS

1

STAFF & VISITORS CAR PARK LOTS

40

4.8 x 2.4

2

BUS LOTS

4

13.2 X 3.6

190

3

MOTORCYCLE LOTS

6

2.4 X 1.0

14.4

4

BASKETBALL COURT

1

32.0 X 19.0

608

5

NETBALL-CUM-VOLLEYBALL COURT

1

32.0 X 17.0

544

6

LONG JUMP PIT

1

7

SCHOOL FIELD

1

100.0 x 66.0

6600

8

PARADE SQUARE

1

40.0 x 30.0

1200

9

OUTDOOR FITNESS AREA

1

40.0 x 5.0

200

REV-02 / FEB 06

REMARKS

(m2) 461

AS REQUIRED

In general, these facilities have to be provided as stated. Schools will be required to justify all deviations.

VOL.

1

APPENDICES

SPACE NORMS

4.9-1

TYPICAL PRIMARY SCHOOL 1970’s Design Site Area (ha)

between

1.42 and 1.6

Planned Student Enrolment

1980’s Design 1.8

1120

1260

4

4

Nos. of storeys

1990’s Design

2000 Design

1.8

1.8

between

1470

1050 and 1470 4

between 4 and 6

Nos. of Classrooms

28

36

Area of Classrooms

64

65

(m2)

36

42, 36+6, 24

between

90

65 and 90

Total NFA (m2)

3068 2.74

Space Norm per

5046 4.00

student (m2) by NFA Total GFA (m2)

5522.4

9082.8

between

between

5147 and 8705

8856 and 8911

between

between

4.08 and 6.96

5.27 and 6.06

between 9264.6 and 15669

approx. 17523 and 17618

4.93

Space Norm per student (m2) by GFA

7.21

between 7.35 and 12.44

between 10.43 and 11.99

New Facilities

Staff Rm

Mathematics Rm

2nd Science Rm

MRL

Art Store

School White

ECA Rm

Music Store Computer Rm H.O.Ds’ Rm Staff Resource Rm Meeting Rm SA and OM’s Offices Non-Teaching Staff Rm Counselling Rm Pastoral Care Rm

REV-00 / FEB 06

Area

Visitors’ Lounge at General Office

VOL.

1

APPENDICES

4.9-2

SPACE NORMS

TYPICAL PRIMARY SCHOOL 1970’s Design

1980’s Design

1990’s Design

New Facilities

Health & Fitness

(Continued)

Rm

2000 Design

IT Learning Resource Rm LAN Rm Central Server Rm Coaxial Distribution Rm Increase in Facilities

Classroom

Classroom

Size

2nd Language

Mother Tongue

Rm Language Lab

Rm

Rm

AVA Rm

Art & Crafts Rm

Music Rm

Art & Crafts Rm

Science Rm

AVA Rm

AVA Rm

Computer Rm

Music Rm

Music Rm

Mathematics

Science Rm

Science Rm

General Office

General Office

Staff Rm

Staff Rm

MRL

H.O.Ds’ Office

Hall

MRL

Furniture Store

Hall

Canteen

Furniture Store

Games

Canteen

Equipment Store Dental Clinic CCA Rm

REV-00 / FEB 06

Art & Crafts

Games Equipment Store Dental Clinic CCA Rm

Rm Music Store General Office AM Office Staff Room

VOL.

1

APPENDICES

SPACE NORMS

4.9-3

TYPICAL SECONDARY SCHOOL 1970’s Design Site Area (ha) Planned Student Enrolment Nos. of Classrooms Area of Classrooms

1980’s Design

3.04

2.7

980

980

28

1990’s Design 3.0 between 1260 to 1330

between

between

28 and 36

36 and 38

64

72

between

(m2) Total NFA (m2)

2000 Design 3.0 1330 38 90

72 and 90 7448

between

between

between

7959 and 9508

9793 and 11619

11644.5 and 11908

Space Norm per

7.6

Student (m2) by NFA Total GFA (m2)

between

between

between

7.55 and 8.12

7.77 and 9.04

8.76 and 8.95

between

between

approx.

14326.2 and

17627.4 and 20914.2

13406.4

17114.4 Space Norm per

13.68

Student (m2) by GFA New Facilities

Art Store Casting Rm Science Prep. Rm Needlework Rm Housecraft Rm Multi Purpose Rm CCA Rm NCC/NPCC Rm Armoury

between

between

between

13.58 and 14.62

13.99 and 15.72

16.81 and 17.15

Language

Mother Tongue

OM/AM’s Office

Laboratory

Language Rm

Visitors Lounge

History/Geo. Rm

IT Learning

at General office

History/Geo.

Resource Rm

Workrm

Commerce Rm

Audio Visual

SA and OM’s

Store

Offices

Music Rm

Project Rm

Music Store

Counselling Rm

Computer Laboratory

Career Guidance Rm

Vice-Principal’s

Meeting Rm

Rm Office Store H.O.Ds’ Office Staff Lounge Furniture Store

Staff Resource Rm Printing Rm D & T Workshop 2 Technology Store Games Equipment Store Health & Fitness Rm

REV-00 / FEB 06

22358

VOL.

1

APPENDICES

4.9-4

SPACE NORMS

TYPICAL SECONDARY SCHOOL 1970’s Design

1980’s Design

1990’s Design

New Facilities

Non-Teaching Staff

(Continued)

Rm

2000 Design

LAN Rms Central Server Rm Coaxial Distribution Rm Increase in Facilities Size

Classroom

Classroom

Classroom

Special Rm

Science

Music Rm

Art & Crafts Rm Principal’s Office Sick Bay Prefects’ Rm Staff Rm MRL Bookshop Technical Areas

Laboratory Kitchen Staff Rm MRL

Computer Laboratory Science Laboratory Kitchen Office Store Home Economics Prep. Rm/Store General Office Office Store Printing Rm H.O.Ds’ Office Staff Rm MRL Hall Furniture Store Canteen CCA Rm Technical Areas

REV-00 / FEB 06

Commerce Rm Art & Crafts Rm Music Rm Project Rm Staff Rm

Master Revision List Index

Master Revision List Design Handbook Vol. 1 - General Volume

Chapter/ Section/ Page

Revision Series

No.

No.

No./ Date

Circular No. / Circular Date

SCHOOL DESIGN HANDBOOK EDITION 2006

Vol. 2

Produced by

Research, Innovation & Specifications Unit | Research & Procurement Branch| MOE

Copyright of Ministry of Education 2006

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any other information storage and retrieval systems, without prior permission in writing from the copyright holder. Applications for use of the information within should be addressed to Research & Procurement Branch, Infrastructure & Facility Services Group, Ministry of Education.

FOREWORD The Ministry of Education has invested a great deal of resources into

developing its school buildings. Many existing schools have seen their

facilities enlarged, renovated or rebuilt to purposefully fulfil the varying needs and expectations of school educators and students alike.

Today, the design direction for schools is towards innovative, adaptable

and flexible learning environments. Being centres of teaching and learning, it is an inarguable fact that the schools serve as important

models of inspiration for our young. Schools’ physical environments, at the same time, serve as the platforms which facilitate their intellectual and physical growth. Thus, it is of concern that our schools be built to be conducive, efficient and easily maintainable.

The collaborative efforts of educators and designers will continue to be helpful in creating desirable spaces to nurture our young. Improvements

that are responsive to the changing pedagogical styles will continue to be expected of our school buildings. To assist schools and designers in their tasks, Research & Procurement Branch (RPM) conducted a review of the School Design Handbook and put together existing good practices as well as fresh ideas on school design into this new 2006 edition.

As we resume our journey forward in school design and in garnering

even more learning points, it is hoped that the information herein would help facility planners to design learning environments that will be meaningful and enriching to both educators and students.

School Design Handbook

Vol. 2

> PRIMARY SCHOOL <

CONTENTS Introduction

1

General teaching 1.1

Classroom

1.3

Mother Tongue Language Room

1.2

2

Special Teaching 2.1

Mathematics Room

2.3

Audio Visual Room

2.2

Art & Crafts Room

2.4

Music Room & Store

2.6

Computer Room

2.5 2.7

3

Learning Support Coordinator’s Room

Science Room

IT Learning Resource Room

Administrative / Staff 3.1

Principal’s Office

3.2

Vice-Principal’s Office

3.4

Office Store

3.6

H.O.Ds’ Office

3.8

Counselling Room

3.3 3.5 3.7 3.9

General Office

Printing Room

Meeting Room

Staff Room

3.10 Staff Lounge

3.11 Staff Resource Room 3.12 Sick Bay

REV 00/ FEB 06

4

Ancillary 4.1

Media Resource Library

4.3

Multi-Purpose Hall

4.4

Furniture Store

4.6

Non-Teaching Staff (NTS) Room

4.7

Health & Fitness Room

4.9

Co-Curricular Activities (CCA) Room

4.2

4.5

4.8

Multi-Purpose Hall

(1. Control Room 2. Changing Room 3. Store) Canteen

Games Equipment Room

4.10 Bookshop

4.11 Dental Clinic

4.12 Pastoral Care Room

5

Services & Circulation 5.1

Toilets

5.2

LAN Room

5.3

5.4

6

Central Server Room FAVE Area

External Works 6.1

Carpark, Driveway & Porch

6.3

Play Courts & Parade Square

6.4

Outdoor Fitness Area

6.6

Guard Post

6.2

6.5

Field, Fence & Footbath

Gates & Signwall

List of Abbreviations User’s Reference

Master Revision List

REV 00/ FEB 06

Introduction

VOL.

INTRODUCTION

2 1.0

Introduction

1.1

The information found in this Volume is a compilation of data describing the major provisions and particular specifications for each of the school’s facilities. 1

2.0

Planning Parameters

2.1

The overall facility provisions were computed based on the following planning scenario: ƒ ƒ

School operating on a 4:2 session model

Having a max. enrolment of 1440 students (critical session)

2.2

In designing the provisions for each type of facility, the above planning

3.0

How to use this Volume

3.1

Each facility is represented by a datasheet which lays down the

parameters must be taken into account, unless otherwise stated.

recommended provisions as well as the critical requirements of the facility. A sample layout of the facility is also provided to show how the space within the facility could be configured.

3.2

The recommended provisions and sample layouts shown in the datasheets are

3.3

As certain facilities may require revisions to their size and/or unit numbers or

to be used only as a guide by Consultants who are designing the facility.

other details due to the school’s specific programmes, Consultants are required to seek the school’s and MOE’s advice as to the relevancy of the

information to the project. Should any deviation from the specifications be necessary, the Consultant shall advise the school or MOE on the extent of it and the implications, if any, accordingly.

1

The list of facilities is as tabulated in the Primary School and Secondary School’s Facilities Tables. (Refer to Vol. 1

- Chapters 4.7 & 4.8 of the School Design Handbook).

REV-02 / FEB 06

1 General Teaching 1.1

Classroom 1.2

Learning Support Coordinator’s Room 1.3

Mother Tongue Language Room

VOL.

Critical Information

2

GENERAL TEACHING

NO. OF UNITS

CLASSROOM

1.1-1

(per school)

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 MODULE

Min. 42

When required, no. of units must be able to revert to 42 (90 m2 each).

AREA

Min. module of 45 m2 per classroom

When required, area must be able to revert to 90 m2 (42 units)

CAPACITY

For a module of 90 m2: 1 Staff, 40 Students For modules other than 90 m2: The appropriate space per student norm to be used to derive the capacity, based on the proposed function of the room

FUNCTION

General Instruction Area Other possible functions include – project work, multi-group activity, independent learning

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Quiet zone

Preferably near the Special Teaching areas

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Students’ seating to be min. 3m clear from whiteboard Moveable wall partition if installed should have a min. sound insulation of 42 dBA. State Flag shall be above all other decoration or emblem of any kind

SERVICES --

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of slab

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain/ Blinds Whiteboard

As required 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m

Projection Screen

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m

Students’ Table

Computer Table Cabinets

State Flag

Moveable Wall Partition

1 no. 1.2m high x minimum 30% of rear wall length

Retractable

40 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m x 0.8m

1 no. 0.7m x 0.6m

1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m Storage Space for 40

students per session

1 no. to comply with specifications (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) As required

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Key alike per room Master Key Set C

Security System

As required

Others

(See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Nil

OTHERS

Classrooms should face North-South direction and address vision care needs (See Vol. 1 – 3.4) Walls between classrooms to be impact-resistant Window arrangement and other façade openings to be appropriately designed to suit the module size allocated to each classroom unit, and to take into account any future conversions to a different module size. Consideration must be given to the proper distribution of mechanical & electrical services as well.

SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

3 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

Air-Conditioning

4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)

6 nos. Ceiling Mounted

1 no. Wall Mounted for teacher Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Others

DB Closet as required

Water Supply

REV-01 / FEB 06

3 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher)

Power Points

As required (for Primary Schools only)

VOL.

2

GENERAL TEACHING

1.1-2

CLASSROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT (FOR A 90

M2

MODULE)

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Students’ Tables Area 3. Cabinet 4. Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 5. Pin-up Board 6. Students’ Storage Cabinet Area 7. Computer Tables 8. LCD Projector 9. Printer

POSITION OF STATE FLAG/ MAGNETIC WHITEBOARD & PIN-UP BOARD AT FRONT WALL REV-00 / FEB 06

LEARNING SUPPORT

VOL.

Critical Information

2

GENERAL TEACHING

1.2-1

NO. OF UNITS

Min. 1 When required, units must be able to revert to 1 unit of 90m2 each

AREA

Min. 45 m2 per module to include: 1. Teacher’s Corner 2. Interview Area

COORDINATOR’S ROOM RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 MODULE

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogenous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

3. Listening Post

4. Library Corner

5. Group Instructional Area

When required, area must be able to revert to 1 unit of 90 m2

CAPACITY 1 Staff

10 Students

FUNCTION

General Instruction Area Project work / Individual coaching / Independent learning

LOCATION/PROXIMITY On 1st Storey

Preferably near to Special Teaching areas Separated from Music Room and Canteen/ Hall

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain/Blinds Whiteboard

As Required 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

Pin-up Board

1 no. 1.4m x 1.2m at each Specific Area

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m

Projection Screen

Students’ Table Cabinets

State Flag

Moveable Wall Partition

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable

10 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m x 0.8m

Worktop with High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Storage Space for 10 students

1 no. to comply with specifications

(See Vol. 4 – 1.2) As Required

FITMENT/FURNITURE

State Flag shall be above all other decoration or emblem of any kind 1.5m high partitions to be provided for specific area

SERVICES --

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Security System Others

Key alike per room Master Key Set C (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) As required

Nil

OTHERS

When required, area must be able to revert to 1 x 90 m2 with consideration given to façade elements and proper distribution of mechanical and electrical services. If moveable wall partition is installed, it should have a min. sound insulation of 42 dBA.

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for

Power Points

7 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &

printer)

1 no. for printer)

4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD & 1

Lighting (Lux) Fans

Air-Conditioning

6 nos. Ceiling Mounted

1 no. Wall Mounted for teacher Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Others

DB Closet as required

Water Supply

REV-01 / MAY 06

no. for TV)

500

As required

VOL.

2

GENERAL TEACHING

1.2-2

LEARNING SUPPORT COORDINATOR’S ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT FOR A 90 M2 MODULE LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Students’ Tables Area 3. Library Corner 4. Group Instructional Area 5. Listening Post 6. Interview Area 7. Low Cabinet for EP Resources & Student’s Storage 8. Low Cabinet/ Computer Workstation Area 9. Worktop with High Cabinet 10. LCD Projector 11. Min 1.5m High Partition 12. Magnetic Whiteboard & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 13. Pin-up Board 14. TV 15. Printer

REV-01 / MAY 06

MOTHER TONGUE

VOL.

Critical Information

2

GENERAL TEACHING

1.3-1

NO. OF UNITS

LANGUAGE ROOM RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 45 M2 ROOM

3 nos.

AREA

45 m2 per unit

Total of 135 m2 to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY 1 Staff

30 Students

FINISHES Floor Wall

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint / Sliding Folding Partition

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

between 2 Rooms

FUNCTION

Teaching of Mother Tongue Languages: Chinese, Tamil & Malay Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Centrally accessible from classrooms Near Staff Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Nil 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with

Projection Screen Teacher’s Table Students’ Table Cabinets

with High Cabinet

High Cabinet

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and

Retractable

1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m

10 nos. of Mobile Table

High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

OTHERS

2 rooms to be interconnected with sliding folding partition (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Sliding folding partition to be usable as Pin-up Board

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil Nil

SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Lighting (Lux) Fans

Air-Conditioning

printer)

5 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &

1 no. for printer)

4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)

500

3 nos. Ceiling Mounted

1 no. Wall Mounted for teacher Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol.4 – 2.3)

Others

DB Closet as required

Water Supply

REV-00 / FEB 06

5 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for

Nil

MOTHER TONGUE

VOL.

2

GENERAL TEACHING

1.3-2

LANGUAGE ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 3 MOTHER TONGUE LANGUAGE ROOMS

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Students’ Tables Area 3. High Cabinet with Sliding Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. LCD Projector 5. Sliding Folding Partition

REV-00 / FEB 06

2 Special Teaching 2.1

Mathematics Room 2.2

Art & Crafts Room 2.3

Audio Visual Room 2.4

Music Room & Store 2.5

Science Room 2.6

Computer Room 2.7

IT Learning Resource Room

VOL.

Critical Information

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

MATHEMATICS ROOM

2.1-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90M2 MATHEMATICS ROOM

1 no.

AREA 90 m2

Area to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY 1 Staff

FINISHES Floor

Concrete Topping

Wall

Emulsion Paint

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

40 Students

FUNCTION

Repository for Mathematics materials and resources Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Should not be on 1st storey

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Blackout Blinds

Whiteboard

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated with High Cabinet

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet

Near Classrooms

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

OTHERS --

1 no. to cover minimum 30% of the rear wall length Projection Screen

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable*

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m

Students’ Table

14 nos. 1.6m/0.8 x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Computer Table

5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m

Cabinets

High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Nil

Others

1 no. of Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer)

Power Points

7 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

6 nos. Ceiling Mounted

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

DB Closet as required

4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.1-2

MATHEMATICS ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 90 M2 MATHEMATICS ROOM LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Students’ Tables Area 3. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. Computer Tables 5. Pin-up Board 6. LCD Projector

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

ART & CRAFTS ROOM

2.2-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90M2 ART & CRAFTS ROOM

Min. 1

AREA

Min. 90

FINISHES m2

If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above shall be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

Floor

Homogeneous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles

Wall

Emulsion Paint / Sliding Folding Partition

Ceiling

between 2 Rooms Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

1-2 Staff

40 Students

FUNCTION

Instructional Strategies Mostly activity-based learning strategies involving hands-on experience Storage of Art Materials

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

As required 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m integrated with High Cabinet

with High Cabinet

1 no. 1.2m high x appropriate rear wall length

Can explore provision for multiple usages (for min. 1 unit)

Projection Screen

If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above can be converted into other facilities

Students’ Table

40 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m x 0.8m or

Computer Table

5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Min. 1 no. Art & Crafts Room preferably adjoining an open courtyard, balcony or field to hold larger/bulky projects and for drying pottery/ clay sculptures

Teacher’s Table

Cabinets

All fitment located outside Art & Crafts Room must be weather-resistant

SERVICES

Ceiling mounted track lighting to be provided for still life session

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board Worktop with High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Low Cabinet with Sinks (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Kiln is optional - Safety and ventilation requirements to be ensured where kiln is placed

Sliding folding acoustic partition to be usable for mounting of display items

14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Tables

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Counter top with sink to be of non-porous finish

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable

1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m

Supply Cabinet Kiln

Others

Folio Cabinet

1 no. 8 cubic (Optional, to be confirmed) Soap Dispenser

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Burglar Alarm

1 no. of Fire Extinguisher

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock Security Grilles to Drying Terrace

OTHERS

Art Store to be provided and should have visual link with the Art and Crafts Rooms Drying terrace to be a hard non-porous surface with a min. 2.5m shelter/ overhang to protect area from rain Drying terrace should be fenced, with access only from Art and Crafts Room

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT

Computer Ports Power Points

printer)

7 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &

1 no. for printer)

1 no. Single Gang for LCD

Door to Store to be min. 1.2m wide

1 no. Isolator for Kiln (where kiln is provided)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

6 nos. Ceiling Mounted

Communications

PA System (See Vol.4 – 2.3)

Others

DB Closet as required

Air-Conditioning Water Supply

REV-01 / MAY 06

7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for

2 nos. 3m Long Track Lighting Nil

2 nos. of Cold Water Supply for each Art Room Isolator to be provided for Exhaust Fans

VOL.

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.2-2

ART & CRAFTS ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF ART & CRAFTS ROOMS 1 & 2 (90 M2 EACH) AND ART STORE (WITHOUT KILN)

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Students’ Tables Area 3. Large Format Table Area (14 nos. Trapezoidal Tables) 4. Computer Tables Area 5. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 6. 2 nos. of double-sided Mobile Whiteboard 7. Pin-up Board 8. Low Cabinet with Sinks 9. Low Cabinet 10. Worktop with High Cabinets

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF STORE (KILN IS OPTIONAL)

11. Sliding Folding Acoustic Partition 12. LCD Projector 13. Space for Kiln

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.2-3

ART & CRAFTS ROOM

SAMPLE DIAGRAM OF SEATING AREA FOR STILL LIFE LESSONS

PHOTO OF ART & CRAFTS ROOM AS SEEN FROM REAR OF ROOM

REV-00 / FEB 06

PHOTO OF DRYING DECK

VOL.

Critical Information

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

AUDIO VISUAL ROOM

2.3-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 AUDIO VISUAL ROOM

2 nos.

AREA 90

m2

Total of 180 m2 to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY 1 Staff

FINISHES Floor

Vinyl

Wall

Acoustic Treatment

Ceiling

Non-Acoustic Ceiling

40 Students

FUNCTION

FITMENT/FURNITURE

For screening of films, slides, OHP transparency filmstrips, television etc.

Curtain

Blackout Blinds

Can be converted into other facilities

Whiteboard

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding

Projection Screen

1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted and Retractable

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m

Cabinets

High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Centrally located with respect to Classrooms and preferably near MRL Should be on upper storeys

FITMENT / FURNITURE --

SERVICES

SAFETY/SECURITY

Microphone points to be evenly distributed within room

Master Key

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

OTHERS

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Others

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel

The 2 Audio Visual Rooms preferably to be adjacent to each other with sliding folding partition in between Sliding folding partition to be acoustic type

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

1 no.

Power Points

2 nos. Twin Gang

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

Nil

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with isolator

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

1 no. TV

1 no. Single Gang

1 no. Telephone Point

1 no. LCD

4 nos. microphone points for each room DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.3-2

AUDIO VISUAL ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 2 AUDIO VISUAL ROOMS

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s table 2. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 3. LCD Projector 4. Sliding Folding Acoustic Partition 5. TV

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

MUSIC ROOM & STORE

2.4-1

NO. OF UNITS Min. 1 Music Room Min. 1 Music Store

AREA

Min. 90 m2 per Music Room If more than 1 unit is provided, 1 unit of 90 m2 to be School White Area (SWA) Min. 45 m2 per Music Store

CAPACITY 1 Staff

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 MUSIC ROOM & A 45 M2 MUSIC STORE FINISHES Floor

Timber Strip (Music Room)

Wall

Acoustic Treatment (One Music Room to have 2.4m High Full Height Mirror on one side)

Concrete Topping (Music Store)

Emulsion Paint (Music Store) Ceiling

40 Students

FUNCTION

Instructional Strategies: Mostly activity-based learning strategies involving hands-on experience

Non-Acoustic Ceiling (Music Room) Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab (Music Store)

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Blackout Blinds

Whiteboard

1 no. Magnetic with 1m Manuscript Lines

Can explore provision for multiple usages

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m integrated with High Cabinet

Projection Screen

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m

Preferably interconnected with Music Store

Computer Table

5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m

Cabinets

Music Rack & Adjustable Rack Shelves (Store)

Others

1 no. Piano

Storage of musical instruments

Away from Classroom Areas

Separated from General and other Special Teaching Areas

1 no. AV Table

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Pin-up Boards to flank Whiteboard Adjustable shelves in rack required 2.4m full-height mirror and 2 grab bars at 840mm and 1050mm from the floor level and 250mm from the wall

SERVICES

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Others

TV to be mounted on wall/ ceiling beside whiteboard, on the side of the AV hardware cabinet

OTHERS Store door to be min. 1.5m wide

1 no. of Fire Extinguisher (Music Room) Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel (Music Room) Solid Door (Music Store)

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer)

Power Points

7 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 5 no. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD & 1 no. in Music Store)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

2 nos. Ceiling Mounted (Music Store)

300 (Music Store) Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Communications

PA System (Music Room) (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

1 no. TV DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.4-2

MUSIC ROOM & STORE

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 2 MUSIC ROOMS (90 M2 EACH) & MUSIC STORE

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Computer Tables Area 3. AV Hardware Cabinet 4. Piano 5. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board 6. Full Height Mirror (in one music room only) 7. Music Rack with adjustable shelves 8. LCD Projector 9. TV

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

SCIENCE ROOM

2.5-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 TYPE FACILITY

Min. 1

AREA

Min. 90 m2 per unit If more than I unit is provided, 1 unit of 90 m2 to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

FINISHES Floor

Homogenous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles

Wall

Glazed ceramic tiles to min. 2.2m Height (except for walls behind High Cabinet in Preparation Room)

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

1 Staff

40 Students

FUNCTION

Science based subjects and hands-on experiments Storage of teaching aids and lab materials Preparation of class activities Can explore provision for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Near Classrooms

FITMENT/FURNITURE

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Blackout Blinds

Whiteboard

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic and 1.2m x 1.2m Sliding Graph Board integrated with High Cabinet

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m integrated with High Cabinet

Projection Screen

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable

Teacher’s Table

1 no. Worktable with sink

Students’ Table

14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Tables (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Computer Table

5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m

Cabinets

High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Worktops to be finished with solid surfacing material with no-drip edge Sink to be polypropylene and vitreous enamel 2 trolleys located in the store/Preparation Room

Worktop with Sink & High Cabinet (See Vol. 4- 1.4) Low Cabinet with Sink (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Others

1 no. Refrigerator (in preparation room) 1 no. Soap Dispenser

SERVICES --

OTHERS

SAFETY/SECURITY

Preparation Room should have visual link to the Science Room

Master Key

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Door to Store to be min. 1.2m wide

Others

1 no. of Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer)

Power Points

8 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 3 no. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

6 nos. Ceiling Mounted

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 1 – 2.3)

Water Supply

3 nos. 3-way Swan-Neck Laboratory Tap

Others

1 no. TV DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.5-2

SCIENCE ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 90 M2 SCIENCE ROOM

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Worktable with sink 2. Students’ Tables Area 3. Computer Tables Area 4. High Cabinet with Sliding Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 5. Low Cabinet with Sink 6. Worktop with Sink & High Cabinet 7. Low Cabinet 8. Refrigerator 9. LCD Projector 10. TV

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

COMPUTER ROOM

2.6-1

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 135 M2 TYPE FACILITY NO. OF UNITS Min. 3 Nos.

AREA

Min. 135 m2 (including Workroom)

CAPACITY 1 Staff

FINISHES Floor

Vinyl with concealed floor trunking (See Vol. 4 – 1.3)

Wall

Emulsion Paint

Ceiling

Non-Acoustic Ceiling

40 Students

FUNCTION

Hands-on computer-based learning Computer Workroom for Technical Assistant Can explore provisions for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Interconnected with Computer Workroom Near Classrooms

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Projection screen to be positioned centrally to room

SERVICES

1 twin gang power point and 2 LAN points mounted in service outlet box for each computer table 1 twin gang power point and 1 LAN point mounted in service outlet box for teacher’s table

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

As required

Whiteboard

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated with High Cabinet

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m integrated with High Cabinet

Projection Screen

1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted and Retractable

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.6m x 0.7m

Computer Table

21 nos. 1.6m x 0.7m

Cabinets

High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m (Computer Workroom)

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Security System

Burglar Alarm

Others

1 no. of Fire Extinguisher Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel

Room lights to be controlled row by row parallel to whiteboard

OTHERS

Visual connection between Computer Workroom and Computer Rooms to be provided Vinyl floor finish to be anti-static type

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

44 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer)

Power Points

26 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher, 1 no. for printer & 1 no. for workroom)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

Nil

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with isolator

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

1 no. Master Switch

1 no. Single Gang for LCD

1 no. Telephone Point

DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.6-2

COMPUTER ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 135 M2 COMPUTER ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF COMPUTER WORKROOM LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Computer Tables Area 3. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. LCD Projector

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM

2.7-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED MINIMUM PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 MODULE

1 no.

AREA 90 m2

Area to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY 1 Staff

42 Students

FINISHES Floor

Vinyl with concealed floor trunking (See Vol 4 – 2.3)

Wall

Emulsion Paint

Ceiling

Non-Acoustic Ceiling

FUNCTION

Hands-on Computer based Group Learning Group Studies Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION /PROXIMITY Near Classrooms

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Blinds

Whiteboard

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated with High Cabinet

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Projection Screen to be positioned centrally to Room

SERVICES

1 no. twin gang power point and 2 LAN points mounted in service outlet box for 2 computer tables

OTHERS

1 no. to cover minimum 30% of rear wall length Projection Screen

1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted and Retractable

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.6m x 0.7m

Computer Table

14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Cabinets

High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Others

Nil

Vinyl floor finish to be anti-static type Max. viewing distance from projection screen to last row of students to be 12.5m

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Others

1 no. of Fire Extinguisher Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

17 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer)

Power Points

11 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 2 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

Nil

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

1 no. Master Switch DB Closet as required

REV-01 / MAY 06

IT LEARNING

VOL.

2

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.7-2

RESOURCE ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 90 M2 IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Computer Tables Area 3. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. LCD Projector

REV-00 / FEB 06

3 Administration 3.1

3.7

Principal’s Office

Meeting Room

3.2

3.8

Vice-Principal’s Office 3.3

Counselling Room 3.9

General Office

Staff Room

3.4

3.10

Office Store 3.5

Staff Lounge 3.11

Printing Room

Staff Resource Room

3.6

3.12

H.O.D’s Store

Sick Bay

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / 3.1-1 STAFF

PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 OFFICE NO. OF UNITS 1 no.

AREA 20

m2

CAPACITY

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

1 Principal 5 Visitors

FUNCTION

Principal’s work area

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Preferably on 1st storey near main entrance Interconnected with Vice-Principal’s Office and General Office Near Staff Room, Staff Lounge and HODs’ Office

FITMENT/ FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Pin-up Board

Projection Screen

Principal’s Tables Cabinets

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Built-in safe for Chubb Castle Size 2 or Australian Safe Company AS 2002 or Fische Bauche Size 2 or equivalent to be embedded on concrete pedestal

Others

Blinds 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic

1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Nil

1 no. 1.9m x 1.0m

2 nos. 0.7m x 0.5m

1 no. High Cabinet with Built-in Safe

2 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-seater Sofa set

2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-seater Sofa set 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.5m Side Table

1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table

Ensure no blind zone in front of the safe Safe to be 850mm above FFL

SERVICES --

OTHERS

School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Security System

Others

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Burglar Alarm

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock if access is from outside with Door Closer & Viewing Panel

1 no. Safe (See Critical Information)

SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no.

2 nos. Twin Gang

1 no. Telephone Point

1 no. Battery Operated Clock

VOL

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / 3.1-2 STAFF

PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE

SAMPLE LAYOUT SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 20 M2 PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE

LEGEND 1. Principal’s Work Area 2. Lounge Area (Sofa Set & Side Tables) 3. High Cabinet with Built-in Safe 4. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet 5. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 6. Pin-up Board 7. Magnetic Whiteboard

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

VICE-PRINCIPAL’S

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 3.2-1

OFFICE

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 12 M2 OFFICE NO. OF UNITS 1 per VP

FINISHES

AREA

Floor

12 m2 per VP

Wall

CAPACITY

Ceiling

Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

1 Staff , 2 Visitors

FUNCTION

Vice-principal’s work area

LOCATION/PROXIMITY On 1st storey

Accessible through General Office Interconnected with General Office Near Principal’s Office and H.O.D’s Office

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

OTHERS

School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Pin-up Board

Vice-Principal’s Table

Cabinets Others

Blinds 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic

1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m

1 no. 1.6m x 1.0m 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet

1 no. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet

Nil

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Others

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock if access is

Security System

Burglar Alarm

from outside with Door Closer & Viewing Panel

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no.

2 nos. Twin Gang

1 no. Telephone Point

1 no. Battery Operated Clock

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 3.2-2

VICE-PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF VICE-PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE

LEGEND 1. Vice-Principal’s Work Area 2. Magnetic Whiteboard 3. Pin-up Board 4. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 5. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 3.3-1

GENERAL OFFICE RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR 78 M2 TYPE FACILITY

NO. OF UNITS 1 no.

FINISHES

AREA

Floor

1. General Office

Ceiling

Min. 54 m2 comprising:

Wall

Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

2. Administration Manager’s Workstation (8 m2) 3. Operation Manager’s Workstation (8 m2) 4. 1 AM/1 OM/2 CSO (Additional 8 m2) 5. Visitors’ Lounge

CAPACITY

3 Staff + 3 Managers (Administration Manager, AM/Operation Manager, OM) or

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Pin-up Board

1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m

Cabinets

5 nos. 1.3m x 0.8m 2 nos. 2-Doors Cupboards

Typist’s Table

3 Staff + 2 Managers + 2 Clerical Support Officers (CSO)

FUNCTION

Others

1 no. Workstation (for 1 AM) or 2 nos. Workstation (for 2 CSOs) (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

SAFETY/SECURITY

Interconnected with Principal’s Office & Printing Room

Master key

Away from Canteen

Others

Security System

FITMENT/FURNITURE

OTHERS

Key deposit box must be cylindrical & placed within concrete wall beside entrance to General Office and flushed with wall

Burglar Alarm

Roller Shutter to be provided at the entrance of the

General Office

Entrance Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door Closer

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Entrance door to be tempered glass

6 nos. (including 1 no. for printer) 1 no. each (AM/OM/CSO)

7 nos. Twin Gang (General Office, including 1 no. for

Scanner & 1 no. for Printer)

3 nos. Single Gang (General Office)

Adjacent FAVE spaces shall be incorporated to provide for future expansion School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provision for individual staff

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

1 no. of Fire Extinguisher

--

--

1 no. Key Deposit Box

1 no. Keyboard Vol. 4 – 1.4)

On 1st storey with clear unobstructed view of main entrance

SERVICES

Reception Counter

2 nos. Workstation (1 no. each for AM and OM) (See

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Recommended to be in view of Parade Square

3 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

For school administration

Easily accessible to public

Blinds 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic

2 nos. Twin Gang (AM)

1 nos. Twin Gang and 1 nos. Single Gang (OM)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fan

Nil

Communications

PA System (General Office) (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

2 nos. Telephone Points each (General Office/AM) 1 no. Telephone Point (OM)

1 no. Battery Operated Clock

Control Panel for Bell Timer LED Mimic Panel

Lightning Warning System Console Photocopier

DB Closet as required REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / 3.3-2 STAFF

GENERAL OFFICE

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 78 M2 OFFICE LEGEND 1. AM/OM/CSO Area 2. Typists’ Tables Area 3. Visitors’ Lounge 4. Reception Counter 5. High Cabinet 6. Photocopier 7. Printer/Scanner Area 8. 2-Doors Cupboards 9. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet 10. Magnetic Whiteboard 11. Pin-up Board 12. Fire Alarm Panel 13. PA System 14. Keyboard 15. Key Deposit Box

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / 3.4-1 STAFF

OFFICE STORE

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 STORE NO. OF UNITS Min. 1

FINISHES

AREA

Floor

Min. 20 m2

Wall

CAPACITY

Ceiling

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

--

FUNCTION

Storage of office stationery, equipment and printing

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Interconnected with General Office Near Principal’s & Vice-Principal’s Offices and Staff Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Nil Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Pin-up Board Cabinets

Nil

6 nos. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet

Open Shelves

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

OTHERS

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Others

Burglar Alarm System Control Panel (direct feed

Security System

Door to be min. 1.2m wide

Burglar Alarm

from Distribution Board)

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. Single Gang 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / 3.5-1 STAFF

PRINTING ROOM

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20M2 ROOM NO. OF UNITS Min. 1

FINISHES

AREA

Floor

Min. 20 m2

Wall

CAPACITY

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

--

FUNCTION

Storage of office stationery, equipment and printing

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Pin-up Board

Interconnected with General Office

Projection Screen

Near Principal’s & Vice-Principal’s Offices and Staff Room

Cabinets Others

Blinds Nil Nil

Nil

Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Nil

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

OTHERS

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Others

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Windows to face external Door to be min. 1.2m wide

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

1 no.

4 nos. Twin Gang

Lighting (Lux)

300

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3)

Others

Shredder (0.6m x 0.6m), Photocopy Machine,

Water Supply

Nil

Laminating Machine, Transparency Maker, Photostat Maker, Scanner, Duplicator, Cyclostyling Machine

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

H.O.Ds’ OFFICE

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

3.6-1

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 103M2 OFFICE NO. OF UNITS 1 no.

AREA 103 sqm comprising: 1. Staff workstation area (8 m2 each)

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

2. Central area for printer, scanner and copier

CAPACITY 10 Staff

20 Visitors (2 visitors per workstation)

FUNCTION

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Blinds 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Whiteboard

Heads of Departments’ office

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

DB Closet

1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m

Preferably on 1st floor

Interconnected with General Office, Principal’s & Vice-Principal’s Offices

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Staff workstation to be system furniture Whiteboard and Pin-up Boards can be either wall-mounted or free-standing

Projection Screen Others

Nil

10 nos. of Workstations (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Security System Others

SERVICES

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Burglar Alarm

Roller Shutters to be provided at the entrance

Entrance Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door Closer

See Vol. 4 – 1.4 on requirements for workstation

OTHERS

Main entrance door to H.O.Ds’ Office to be tempered glass School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

15 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for printer)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

12 nos. (including 1 no. for printer)

2 nos. Telephone Points

1 no. Battery Operated Clock

VOL.

2

H.O.Ds’ OFFICE

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

3.6-2

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 103 M2 H.O.Ds’ OFFICE

LEGEND

REV-00 / FEB 06

1.

H.O.Ds’ Workstations

2.

Printer/Scanner Area

3.

Magnetic Whiteboard

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

MEETING ROOM

3.7-1

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65M2 MEETING ROOM NO. OF UNITS 1 no.

AREA

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

65 m2 Area is School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

26 Staff including: 16 seated at table and 10 backbenchers

FUNCTION

Weekly staff meeting, various committee meetings, external appraisal visits, etc Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION/ PROXIMITY

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Pin-up Board

Projection Screen Cabinets Others

Near General Office, Principal’s & VicePrincipal’s Offices

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

Blinds 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

2 nos. 3.6m x 1.2m

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and

Retractable

Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

1 no. 4.8m x 1.8m Conference Table

18 nos. 0.5m x 0.4m Swivel Chairs

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Others

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

Security System

Burglar Alarm

OTHERS --

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

1 no.

Power Points

3 nos. Twin Gang

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

1 no. Single Gang for LCD Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

1 no. Telephone Point

1 no. LCD

1 no. Tape Recorder 1 no. OHP

DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

3.7-2

MEETING ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 MEETING ROOM

LEGEND 1. Conference Table and Swivel Chairs Area 2. LCD Projector 3. Low Cabinet 4. Pin-up Board 5. Magnetic Whiteboard & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

COUNSELLING ROOM

3.8-1

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 24 M2 COUNSELLING ROOM NO. OF UNITS 1 no.

FINISHES

AREA

Floor

24 m2

Wall

Area is School White Area (SWA)

Ceiling

Vinyl Flooring Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of slab

CAPACITY 5 persons

FUNCTION

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Private area to counsel students and parents

Curtain

Can be converted into other facilities

Whiteboard

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Preferably on 2nd storey Access from corridor Easily accessible to staff and students There should be sufficient privacy to encourage students requiring counselling to use it

Blinds Nil

Pin-up Board

1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m

Projection Screen Cabinets Others

Counselling Room should be on the same level as Pastoral Care Room, preferably next to each other

Nil

Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

1 no. 0.5m x 0.6m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet 1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-Seater Sofa Set

2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-Seater Sofa Set 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.7m Side Table

1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table

10 nos. Pouffes (0.4m in Diameter)

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

OTHERS

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

Door with Vision Panel

To ensure privacy, room should have full height walls and not half-partitions

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

1 no.

Power Points

1 no. Twin Gang

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

Air-Conditioning

3 nos. Single Gang

1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Others

1 no. Tape Recorder

Water Supply

Nil

2 nos. Other Electrical Equipment DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

3.8-2

COUNSELLING ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 COUNSELLING ROOM

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Lounge Area (3+1+1 sofa set, side table and coffee table) 3. Pouffes Area 4. Low Cabinet 5. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet 6. Pin-up Board

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

STAFF ROOM

3.9-1

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 502 M2 STAFF ROOM NO. OF UNITS (PER SCHOOL) Min. 1

AREA

502 m2 comprising:

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

1. Staff workstation area (4 m2 each) 2. Common area for printers, scanners, copiers

CAPACITY

FITMENT/FURNITURE

94 Staff

Curtain

FUNCTION

Pin-up Board

1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m

Others

78 nos. Workstation for 36 + 6 Classrooms or

Teaching staff office

LOCATION /PROXIMITY

Whiteboard

Projection Screen

Not higher than 2nd storey and preferably to be on one single storey Preferably Interconnected with Staff Lounge and Staff Resource Room Near General Office, H.O.Ds’ Office and Office Store

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Staff workstation to be system furniture

Blinds 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Nil

94 nos. Workstation for 42 Classrooms (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Security System Others

Whiteboard and Pin-up Boards to be wallmounted

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Burglar Alarm

Entrance Door to be with Jimmy-Proof Lock

with Door Closer

Roller Shutters to be provided at the Entrance

SERVICES

The power points and data points to be recessed into system furniture and located slightly above the worktable See Vol. 4 – 1.4 on requirements for workstation

OTHERS

For schools with 36 + 6 classrooms, 78 nos. of workstations to be provided, with space for future 16 nos. additional workstations Consultants are to consult the MOE Officer-inCharge on the possible increase in the number of teachers due to the conduct of special programmes, e.g. GEP, at selected schools School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff. Main entrance door to Staff Room be tempered glass

REV-00 / FEB 06

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

98 nos. (including 1 no. for printer)

102 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for printer)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

2 nos. Telephone Points

1 no. Battery Operated Clock

DB Closet as required

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

3.9-2

STAFF ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 502 M2 STAFF ROOM

LEGEND 1. Workstations Area 2. Common Printer Area 3. Magnetic Whiteboard 4. Pin-up Board

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

STAFF LOUNGE

3.10-1

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 40 M2 STAFF LOUNGE NO. OF UNITS Min. 1

AREA

Min. 40 m2

CAPACITY

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

20 seats

FUNCTION

Relaxation area for staff

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Not higher than 2nd storey

Preferable interconnected with Staff Room Near General Office and H.O.Ds’ Office

FITMENT/FURNITURE

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Blinds Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Pin-up Board Cabinets Others

Solid surfacing material countertop to cabinet with sink

SERVICES --

OTHERS --

Nil

Low Cabinet with Sink (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) 20 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m Lounge Sofa

2 nos. 0.8m x 0.6m Coffee Table 1 no. 1.0m x 0.6m Journal Rack

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door

Closer

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Power Points Fans

Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

2 nos. Single Gang Nil

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

1 no. Hot and Cold Water Dispenser 1 no. Refrigerator

DB Closet as required

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

3.10-2

STAFF LOUNGE

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 40 M2 STAFF LOUNGE

LEGEND 1. Lounge Sofa Area 2. Journal Rack 3. Low Cabinet with Sink 4. Refrigerator

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

STAFF RESOURCE ROOM

3.11-1

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 STAFF RESOURCE ROOM NO. OF UNITS Min. 1

AREA

Min. 65 m2

CAPACITY

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

16 Staff

FUNCTION

Repository for shared teaching materials Preparation of teaching materials Secure place to prepare examination/ assessment questions

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Preferably interconnected with Staff Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Polypropylene and vitreous enamel sink

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Pin-up Board

Projection Screen Teacher’s Table

Computer Table Cabinets

Sink to have swan neck laboratory tap

Blinds 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and

Retractable*

5 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m

4 nos. 0.8m x 0.7m

Worktop with High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Low Cabinet with Sink (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

8 nos. 0.9m x 0.5m Double-Sided Bookshelves 2 nos. 0.9m x 0.5m 2-doors Filing Cabinet

SERVICES --

OTHERS --

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Others

1 no. Fire Extinguisher

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

10 nos. Twin Gang

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

1 no. Single Gang for LCD Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3)

Water Supply

1 no. Hot/Cold

Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

5 nos.

Power Points

1 no. Telephone Point

5 nos. Other Electrical Equipment DB Closet as required

VOL.

2

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

3.11-2

STAFF RESOURCE ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 STAFF RESOURCE ROOM

LEGEND

REV-00 / FEB 06

1.

Teachers’ Tables Area

2.

Book Shelves Area

3.

Computer Tables Area

4.

2-door Filing Cabinet

5.

Worktop with High Cabinet

6.

Low Cabinet with Sink

7.

LCD Projector

8.

Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen

VOL.

Critical Information

2

ANCILLARY

SICKBAY

3.12-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 SICKBAY

Min. 1

AREA Min. 20

FINISHES m2

CAPACITY 2 Students

Floor

Homogeneous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles

Wall

Emulsion Paint

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

FUNCTION

Simple first aid treatment Resting

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Blinds

Preferably on 1st storey

Whiteboard

Nil

Accessible from General Office for close supervision

Pin-up Board

Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Preferably interconnected with General Office

Teacher’s Tables

2 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m

Cabinets

1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet

LOCATION /PROXIMITY

FITMENT /FURNITURE

Cater for future air-conditioning

Others

2 nos. 1.8m x 0.9m Folding Single Bed Towel Rail and Mirror

Backsplash to be provided for Sink

1 no. Soap Dispenser

SERVICES

Power point to be located at table area

OTHERS --

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Nil

Others

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock and Viewing Panel

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT

REV-00 / FEB 06

Computer Ports

Nil

Power Points

2 nos. Single Gang

Lighting (Lux)

300 (Bedhead lights to be provided)

Fans

2 nos. Ceiling Mounted

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

1 no.

Others

1 no. Sink

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

3.12-2

SICKBAY

SAMPLE LAYOUT 1

SAMPLE LAYOUT 2

SAMPLE LAYOUT 3

ABOVE : SAMPLE LAYOUTS OF 20 M2 SICK BAY

LEGEND 1. Table 2. Folding Single Bed 3. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 4. Sink 5. Dry Wall Partition 6. 2.1m High Curtains

REV-00 / FEB 06

4 Ancillary 4.1

4.7

Media Resource Library

Health & Fitness Room

4.2

4.8

Multi-Purpose Hall

Games Equipment Room

4.3

4.9

Multi-Purpose Hall (Control Room,

Co-Curricular Activities (CCA) Room

Changing Room, Store) 4.4

4.10

Furniture Store

Bookshop

4.5

4.11

Canteen

Dental Clinic

4.6

4.12

Non-Teaching Staff (NTS) Room

Pastoral Care Room

VOL.

Critical Information

2

ANCILLARY

MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY

4.1-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 368M2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY

1 no.

AREA

Min. 368 m2 comprising: 1.

Reading / Reference Area (RRA)

2.

Instructional Area (IA) (80 m2)

3. 4.

Librarian’s Workroom (LW) (25 m2) Circulation Counter (CC)

CAPACITY 120 users seated and standing 2 teacher librarians 10 student librarians 21000 volumes of books

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Vinyl Flooring Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Blinds (All Areas) 1 no. 1.8m x 1.2m Magnetic Whiteboard (IA)

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m (1 no. each at RRA & IA)

Projection Screen

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable (IA)

FUNCTION

Teacher’s Table

Can explore provision for multiple usage

Computer Table

1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m (IA) 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m (LW) 3 nos. 1.4m x 0.7m Double Seat (IA)

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Cabinets

1 no. 3.0m x 0.6m Non-Print Media Cabinet (CA) 1 no. 4.8m x 0.7m Circulation Counter (CA) 8 nos. 2.7m x 0.6m Double-Sided Bookshelves (RRA) 10 nos. 1.5m x 0.6m Single-Sided Bookshelves (RRA) 1 no. 1.5m x 0.6m Picture-Book Shelf (RRA) 1 no. 0.7m x 0.6m TV/VCR Cabinet (IA) 1 no. 3.8m x 0.7m Open Shelf (LW) 1 no. 0.5m x 0.8m Filing Cabinet (LW) 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m Steel Cabinet (LW) (See Vol. 4 for the details of some of the above items.)

Others

2 nos. 1.0m x 0.5m Book Trolley (CA) 1 no. 0.8m x 0.6m Book Chute (CA) 3 nos. 1.6m x 1.6m Media Island (1 no. at RRA and 2 nos. at IA) 14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table (RRA) 8 nos. 1.5m x 0.6m Open Table (RRA) 2 nos. 0.6m x 0.4m x 0.9m Atlas Stand (RRA) 2 nos. 2.6m x 0.7m AV Equipment Worktop (RRA) 5 pcs Sofa Set (RRA) 1 no. 1.0m x 0.3m Newspaper Rack (RRA) 2 nos. 1.0m x 0.4m Periodicals Shelf (single or double sided) (RRA) 1 no. Overhead Projector Trolley (I A) 1 no. 1.2m x 0.7m Copy Machine (LW) 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m Worktables (LW)

Reading and Referencing; Group learning

Away from noisy area

2 nos. 0.9m x 0.7m Single Seat (LW)

Access preferably on 1st or 2nd storey Away from Music Room and Hall/Canteen Can consider other locations if for alternative usage

FITMENT/FURNITURE

All fitment shelves to be removable and adjustable

SERVICES

TV point in Reading Reference Area to be located near AV Equipment Worktop

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 –1.2)

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Others

1 no. of Fire Extinguisher Roller Shutters to be provided at the entrance of MRL

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

4.1-2

MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 368M2 MRL

OTHERS

Minimum 2 nos. direct access doorways from corridor to be provided

Direct access and visual connection to be provided from Media Resource Library (MRL) to

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

where necessary

2 nos. (LW)

Book drop/chute to allow return of books from

Power Points

outside the MRL to be provided arranged

openings

perpendicularly

to

window

12 nos. Single Gang (RRA), 6 nos. Single Gang at Counter Area 25 nos. Single Gang (IA)

Reading tables and Periodicals display shelves to be

3 nos. + 3 nos. at Counter Area (RRA) 10 nos. (IA)

Librarians’ Workroom and Instructional Area

8 nos. Single Gang (LW) Lighting (Lux)

500

Book shelves to be arranged perpendicularly to

Fans

Nil

Circulation Counter for easy supervision

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Glass doors and screens (if provided) to be

Communications

PA System at Counter (RRA)

tempered and sandblasted

PA System (IA and LW)

Half height glass partition for visual access to be

1 no. Telephone Point at Counter (RRA) 1 no. Telephone Point (LW)

provided to Instructional Area and Librarian’s Workroom

Water Supply

All windows to have locks

Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

Nil 2 nos. TV (1 no. each at RRA and IA) 1 no. LCD (LW)

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

4.1-3

MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY

SAMPLE LAYOUT FOR A 368M2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY

LEGEND 1.

Circulation Area

15. Librarian’s Workroom

2.

Book Chute

16. Timber Open Shelves

3.

Circulation Counter Area

17. Teacher’s Table

4.

Queue Area

18. Pin-up Board

5.

Reading/Reference Area

19. Work Table Area

6.

5-piece Sofa Set

20. Single Seat Computer Table Area

7.

Raised Platform

21. Filing Cabinet, Steel Cabinet, Copy Machine

8.

Trapezoidal Tables Area

22. Instructional Area

9.

Open Table Area

23. Double Seat Computer Table Area

10. Double-Sided Bookshelves

24. TV/VCR Cabinet

11. Single-Sided Bookshelves

25. Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable

12. Media Islands Area 13. Picture-Book Shelf, Newspaper Rack, Periodicals Shelf, Atlas Stand 14. AV Equipment Worktop

REV-00 / FEB 06

Wall Mounted Projection Screen 26. LCD Projector 27. Overhead Projector Trolley

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

4.1-4

EXAMPLE OF LIBRARY BOOK SHELVES

EXAMPLE OF READING / REFERENCE AREA

EXAMPLE OF READING / REFERENCE AREA

REV-00 / FEB 06

MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY

VOL.

Critical Information

2

ANCILLARY

NO. OF UNITS 1no.

AREA

MULTI-PURPOSE HALL

4.2-1

RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 1070M2 MULTI-PURPOSE HALL (1070 M2 TO INCLUDE STAGE, CONTROL ROOM AND CHANGING ROOM)

FINISHES – SEATING AREA AND STAGE m2

Min. 910 ( for Seating Area including 3 badminton courts) Min. 30 m2 (for Stage Area) A full performance Stage must be provided in the school. If this is not provided in the Hall, a minimum basic stage (30 m2) shall be provided.

CAPACITY

To provide for maximum student enrolment and teaching staff

FUNCTION

For school assembly, talks, concert, school examination and sports like badminton, gymnastics, aerobics, etc.

Floor Wall

T&G Timber Strips Emulsion Paint (Seating Area) / Acoustic wall

Ceiling

Suspended Acoustic Ceiling

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Pin-up Board

Projection Screen DB closet Others

Can explore provision for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY On ground or second storey

Master Key

Should be adjacent to the Playfield and Outdoor Courts

Others

Security System

Preferably interconnected with Furniture Store

Projection screen should be positioned so that it is highly visible to all students in the Seating Area

Row switching control for high bay lighting Microphone point position should be at same line as curtain line (if full performance stage is provided)

OTHERS

Steps to be provided at front of the stage

Computer Ports Power Points

All openings should be adjustable to cater for varying ventilation and lighting requirements

1 no. 4.88m x 4.88m Wall Mounted Motorized

1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m

Manually Operated Flybar on Stage

2 nos. Wall Climbing Rack

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

2 nos. minimum Hosereels 5 nos. Fire Extinguisher

1 no. (Stage)

1 no. for every Column (Seating Area)

4 nos. (Stage)

4 nos. 13A Twin Gang Power Points (Seating Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications

Door into Hall to be min. 1.5m wide The number and location of access doors should ensure efficient circulation and discharge of students

Nil

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT

School crest to be provided above the stage

SERVICES

Fire Retardant Motorized Stage Curtain (Stage) Nil

SAFETY/SECURITY

Directly accessible from the main entrance of the school

FITMENT/FURNITURE

treatment (Rear of Hall)

Area)

300/500 (Seating Area) 300 (Stage)

Wall Mounted at 3-4.5m C/C

4 nos. Ceiling Mounted (Stage) Nil

Sound Reinforcement System (Seating Area)

Intercom System (connecting Stage and Control Room)

Water Supply Others

2 nos. Telephone Points (Stage)

Nil

Exit Light at every Exit

Isolator for Stage Lighting

These openings should be operable from a service platform or corridor

Stage Lighting System

Badminton Area to have a min. clear height of 7.6m

4 nos. Microphone Points (Seating Area)

Control Room is to be linked at upper rear of the Hall

3 nos. Microphone Points (Behind Stage Area)

REV-00 / FEB 06

2 nos. Battery Operated Clock

3 nos. Microphone Points (Front part of Stage)

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

4.2-2

Plan

MULTI-PURPOSE HALL

Section A-A

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF FULL PERFORMANCE STAGE (IF PROVIDED WITHIN HALL)

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF BADMINTON COURTS

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

4.2-3

MULTI-PURPOSE HALL

Section

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS FOR EXAMINATIONS

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS FOR ASSEMBLY

WALL CLIMBING RACK FOR PRIMARY SCHOOLS

REV-00 / FEB 06

MULTI-PURPOSE HALL

VOL.

Critical Information

2

ANCILLARY

4.3-1

NO. OF UNITS

1. CONTROL ROOM 2. STAGE 3. CHANGING ROOM & STORE

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS

1. Control Room (1 no.) 2. Stage (Min. 1 no. basic) 3. Changing Room + Store (Min. 1)

AREA

1. Control Room (8 m2 exclusive of Hall area)

FINISHES Floor Wall

Glazing (Control Room) Ceiling

3. Changing Room + Store (Min. 1 person)

Non-Acoustic Ceiling (Control Room) Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab (Changing Room, Store)

CAPACITY 1. Control Room (3 persons maximum) 2. Stage (To provide appropriate capacity for either basic stage or full performance stage)

Emulsion Paint (Control Room, Store) Glazed Ceramic Tile to minimum 2.2m Height (Changing Room)

2. Stage (Min. 30 m2 included within Hall area) 3. Changing Room + Store (As required within Hall area)

Concrete Topping (Control Room, Store) Non-Slip Tiles (Changing Room)

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

To provide (Dressing Area)

Whiteboard

Nil

Control Room: To control the sound and lighting systems

Pin-up Board

1 no. 1.4m x 1.2m (Control Room)

2.

Changing Room: To provide toilet & dressing facilities for performers & stage crew only;

Cabinet

2 nos. Dressing Tables with Wall Mirrors

Others

1 no. Stage Light Control Desk (Control Room)

3.

Store: For storage of badminton posts, vaulting horses (2 nos.), landing mats (20 nos.), crash mats and trampoline

FUNCTION 1.

LOCATION/PROXIMITY 1.

Control Room: At the rear of the hall and at least 3.6m above the Seating Area with unobstructed view of the Stage

2.

Changing Room: Easily accessible from the stage but ensure that noise in the Changing Room is not transmitted to the Stage and Seating Area

3.

Store: Directly accessible from Seating Area

FITMENT/FURNITURE

1 no. Sound Reinforcement System Housing Rack (Control Room)

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Burglar Alarm (Control Room)

Others

Nil

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Power Points

4 nos. Single Gang (Control Room) 4 nos. Twin Gang (Changing Room)

--

1 no. Single Gang (Store) Lighting (Lux)

300

SERVICES

Fans

1 no. Wall Mounted (Control Room, Store)

Nil

OTHERS

AirConditioning

To allow table/ cabinet for equipment in Control Room

Communicatio ns

Intercom System (1 no. connecting Stage and Control Room)

To provide door at back of stage for performers to enter and exit

Water Supply

No. of taps to comply with latest statutory requirement

Changing Room to include min. 1 wash basin and 1 changing area

Others

2 nos. Exhaust Fans (1 no. per Changing Room)

--

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. Ceiling Mounted (Changing Room) per room

MULTI-PURPOSE HALL

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

4.3-2

1. CONTROL ROOM 2. STAGE 3. CHANGING ROOM & STORE

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 8 M2 CONTROL ROOM LEGEND

1. Stage Layout Control Desk 2. Sound Reinforcement System Equipment Housing Rack

PHOTO OF HALL AND FULL PERFORMANCE STAGE

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

ANCILLARY

4.4-1

NO. OF UNITS Min. 1

AREA 65 m2 Area to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

FURNITURE STORE RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65M2 STORE FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

--

FUNCTION

Storing of furniture Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Near Multi-Purpose Hall

Preferably interconnected with Multi-Purpose Hall

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Nil Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Pin-up Board

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Security System

SERVICES

Nil

Others

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 –1.2)

Nil Nil

--

OTHERS

Door to be min. 1.5m wide

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. Single Gang 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

VOL.

Critical Information

2

ANCILLARY

CANTEEN

4.5-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 700 M2 TYPE FACILITY

Min. 1

AREA

Total Canteen areas to be min. 700 m2 Each Canteen area to comprise: 1.

Refreshment / Seating Area

2.

Food Stalls

3.

Central Wash Area

4.

Stores and toilets

FINISHES Floor

Homogenous Non-Slip Tiles Concrete Topping (Store)

Wall

Glazed Tile to minimum 2.2m height

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

Emulsion Paint (Store)

CAPACITY

Total Canteen Areas to provide for maximum student enrolment over a maximum of 2 recess periods

FUNCTION

For preparation, serving, consumption of meals

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

FITMENT/FURNITURE Foodstalls

8 nos. including 2 nos. drinks stall

Tables

52 nos. 1.8m x 0.6m

Seating Benches

104 nos. 1.8m x 0.3m

Worktop

1 no. Food Preparation top per stall (total of 8 Foodstalls) 2.1m wide serving counter per stall (total of 8 Foodstalls)

1st storey accessible by vehicle for goods delivery Near Field and Playcourts

Wash Troughs

Away from General Office and Teaching areas

1 no. Wash Sink per stall

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Soap dispenser at students’ wash trough to be provided

SERVICES --

OTHERS

Sufficient clearance outside of the Refreshment /seating area to be provided for queuing at food stalls Finishes for serving counter, stall worktop & fixtures to be stainless steel Kitchen exhaust duct material shall be aluminium Separate meters for gas, water and electrical for each stall Bottle Store to be min. 2.4m wide Central Wash area to provide separate washing trough for Muslim and non-Muslim stalls Lockable taps connected to separate meters to be provided at wash areas

2 nos. Wash Troughs for Toothbrushing drills (with 5 tap points each) 3 nos. Dishwashing Trough

Others

16 nos. Lockers (2 nos. per Foodstall)

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 –1.2)

Security System

See Vol. 4 – 2.3

Others

2 nos. minimum Hosereels (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) 4 nos. Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT

Computer Ports

As required

Power Points

8 nos. (Refreshment Area) 24 nos. (3 nos. per stall) 1 no. (Store)

Lighting (Lux) Fans

300 18 nos. Ceiling Mounted (Refreshment Area) 1 no. Wall Mounted per stall 1 no. Wall Mounted (Store)

Communications

PA System (Refreshment Area)(See Vol. 4 – 2.3) 1 Microphone Point 2 nos. Telephone Points (Public Phones)

Water Supply

10 nos. (Wash Trough) 2 nos. (Water Cooler) 8 nos. (Foodstall) 8 nos. (Central Wash Area)

Others

Minimum 8 nos. Gas points (Foodstall) Hood & Flue over cooking range at food stalls Isolator for Mechanical Ventilation Exhaust Fans 2 nos. Water Coolers Minimum 2 nos. Vending Machines

REV-01 / MAY 06

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

4.5-2

CANTEEN

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 700 M2 CANTEEN LEGEND

REV-00 / FEB 06

1.

Long Table & Bench

2.

Food Stalls

3.

Canteen Store/ Toilets/ Central Wash Area/ Bottle Store

4.

Wash Trough for Tooth-brushing

5.

Water Cooler

6.

Vending Machines

7.

Public Telephones

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

4.5-3

CANTEEN

RECOMMENDED CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF FOOD STALL / DRINK STALL

TYPICAL ELEVATION OF FOODSTALL FITMENT

RECOMMENDED CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF STAINLESS STEEL WASH TROUGH

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

NON-TEACHING STAFF ANCILLARY

(NTS) ROOM

4.6-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 10 M2 ROOM

1 no.

AREA 10 m2

CAPACITY 4 persons

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

FUNCTION

Resting room for executive & administrative staff, including all Division 1-4 officers Can explore provisions for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Near Principal’s Office and General Office

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Pin-up Board

Projection Screen Cabinets

DB Closet

Nil Nil Nil

Nil

High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m

--

OTHERS --

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil Nil

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. Twin Gang 1 no. of Ceiling Mounted Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

VOL.

2

NON-TEACHING STAFF

ANCILLARY

4.6-2

(NTS) ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 10 M2 NON-TEACHING STAFF ROOM

LEGEND 1. Dining Table & Chairs Area 2. High Cabinet

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

ANCILLARY

HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM

4.7-1

NO. OF UNITS (PER SCHOOL)

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 TYPE FACILITY

1 no.

AREA 65 m2

Area is School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY 1 Staff

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Sports Flooring of Homogeneous Vinyl Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

20 Students

FUNCTION

Activities include mainly weight training exercises, aerobic type exercises & TV/video presentations Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION /PROXIMITY

Accessible after school hours without having to pass through other controlled areas Away from quiet areas

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Nil 1 no. 4.0 m x 1.2m

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m

Others

1 no. full length mirror with timber bar

Projection Screen Cabinets

Nil

Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Preferably on 1st storey

10 sets 1 kg weight Dumbbells on weights’ rack

Near Field, Games Equipment Store and CCA Room

rack

10 sets 1.5kg weight Dumbbells on weights’ 2 nos. Manual Treadmills for Juniors

FITMENT/FURNITURE

2 nos. Bicycle Ergometers for Juniors

--

2 nos. Rowers (Non-Hydraulic) for Juniors 2 nos. Hydraulic Steppers for Juniors

SERVICES

16 nos. “Step-Training” Platforms

--

3 nos. Climbing Poles (Galvanised Pipes) 1 no. Target Heart Rate Chart

OTHERS

Min. clear distance between any equipment or between equipment and wall is 0.5m

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Lighting (Lux) Fans

Air-Conditioning

300

4 nos. of Wall Mounted at 2.5m minimum from floor level Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no.

3 nos. Twin Gang

1 no. Telephone Point

DB Closet as required

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

4.7-2

HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 HEALTH FITNESS ROOM LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. 1 kg weight Dumbbells on weights’ rack 3. 1.5 kg weight Dumbbells on weights’ rack 4. Step Training Platforms 5. Bicycle Ergonomics 6. Manual Treadmills 7. Rowers 8. Hydraulic Steppers 9. Low Timber Cabinet 10. 1.5m high x 6mm thick mirror on plywood backing with aluminium trimming (mounted at 300mm above floor level) and floor mounted 6.0m long 40mm diameter timber wall-bar at 800mm from floor with 4 anchor points 11. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

ANCILLARY

GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE

4.8-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 STORE

1 no.

AREA 65 m2

Area is School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY --

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

FUNCTION

Storage of equipment for physical education/games Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION /PROXIMITY

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Nil Nil

1st storey

Pin-up Board

1 no. 1.2m x 2.4m

Near Playcourts, Field, Canteen and Changing Room

Cabinets

High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

FITMENT /FURNITURE

High Cabinets to store knee guards, ankle guards, stopwatches, measuring tapes, tape recorder, megaphone, shuttlecocks, table tennis balls, football boots, stockings and jerseys High Open Shelves to store hoops, skipping ropes, starter blocks, shot puts, discuses, swimming floats, hockey sticks, abdominal guards and goalkeeper’s pads, gloves and masks, softball bases, softballs, pitcher and plates, body protectors, table tennis bats, sepak takraw balls, athletes’ batons

SERVICES

1 single power point to be located near teacher’s table

OTHERS

Door to be min. 1.2m wide

Teacher’s Table

DB Closet

High Open Shelves

3 nos. Aluminium Cages for balls

1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Others

1 no. Fire Extinguisher

Security System

Burglar Alarm

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m

1 no. Single Gang 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

4.8-2

GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 GAMES EQUIPMENT ROOM

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. High Cabinet 3. High Open Shelves 4. Aluminium Cages 5. Pin-up Board

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

ANCILLARY

CCA ROOM

4.9-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 ROOM

3 nos.

FINISHES

AREA 65 m2 195

m2

to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

Floor

Homogeneous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles

Wall

Emulsion Paint

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

--

FUNCTION

For uniformed groups, indoor games, CCA clubs & activities

LOCATION /PROXIMITY Away from Teaching Area

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

Pin-up Board

1 no. at back to cover minimum 30% of rear wall length

Projection Screen

Nil

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m

Student’s Table

10 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m

Preferably on 1st storey Near Field and Games Equipment Store

FITMENT/FURNITURE

2 nos. of pin-up board to flank Whiteboard

SERVICES

Nil

Whiteboard

2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m in front

Cabinets

2 nos. Filing Cabinets

DB Closet

1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m

--

OTHERS --

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Nil

Others

Nil

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

1 no.

Power Points

1 no. Single Gang

Lighting (Lux)

300

Fans

2 nos. Ceiling Mounted

2 nos. Twin Gang

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) 1 no. of Telephone Point

REV-00 / FEB 06

Water Supply

Nil

Others

Nil

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

4.9-2

CCA ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 CCA ROOM LEGEND 1. Teacher’s & Students’ Tables Area 2. Filing Cabinet 3. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board 4. Pin-up Board

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

ANCILLARY

BOOKSHOP

4.10-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 24 M2 BOOKSHOP

Min. 1

AREA

Min. 12 m

2

CAPACITY 1 – 2 Staff

FINISHES Floor

Homogeneous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles

Wall

Emulsion Paint

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

FUNCTION

For sale of books and stationery Can explore provisions for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Must be on 1st Storey Near Canteen Away from Classrooms and Staff Area

FITMENT/FURNITURE

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Nil

Whiteboard

Nil

Pin-up Board

Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Cabinets

SERVICES --

OTHERS

Grilles (if any) for the counter should be fixed on the external side of the roller shutter

Counter Cabinet High Open Shelves

Counter cabinet should not be higher than 750mm high

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Nil

Others

Roller shutter to be min. 1.8m wide

Grilles to all Windows, Vents & Counters Solid Door with Jimmy- Proof Lock 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT

REV-01 / MAY 06

Computer Ports

Nil

Power Points

2 nos. Single Gang

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

1 no. Ceiling Mounted

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Communications

1 no. Telephone Point

Water Supply

Nil

Others

DB Closet as required

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

BOOKSHOP

4.10-2

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 BOOKSHOP LEGEND 1. Counter Cabinet 2. High Open Shelves Area

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

ANCILLARY

DENTAL CLINIC

4.11-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 42 M2 DENTAL CLINIC

1 no.

AREA 42 m2

CAPACITY

FINISHES Floor

2 Dental Therapists and 1 Dentist 2 students

Wall

Ceiling

On

Non-acoustic Ceiling (Dental Clinic) Emulsion Paint (Compressor Compartment)

LOCATION/PROXIMITY 1st

Glazed Wall Tiles to Full Height (Dental Clinic) 100mm thick Brickwall with Glazed Wall Tiles internally (Compressor Compartment)

FUNCTION

For carrying out dental health services

Non-Slip Tiles (Dental Clinic) 100mm thk Concrete Plinth (Compressor Compartment)

storey

Away from Classrooms

FITMENT/FURNITURE

All drawers and cupboards of cabinets and writing tables shall have locksets and handles Long cabinets with sinks shall have solid surfacing worktop

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Blinds

Whiteboard

1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Magnetic

Pin-up Board

Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Sinks to be stainless steel of size 0.4m (L) x 0.4m(W) x 0.2m(D)

Cabinets

Long Cabinet with Sinks

Each sink to have individual water stop cock, swivel swan neck tap with lever elbow handle

Others

Waiting Bench

Wash hand basin to have elbow tap, water stop cock, paper towel dispenser, soap dispenser Wall hung cabinet shall not have glass door panels Wall Cabinet to have 1 adjustable shelf within

SERVICES

High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Worktable

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Burglar Alarm

Others

Grilles to all Windows and Vents Security Grille Gate at entrance to be lockable from both inside and outside

Compressor Compartment: a. b. c.

d.

e.

shall have a clear height of 2200mm light switch shall be located outside the compartment for easy reach control switch to the compressor shall be located outside the compressor compartment but within the clinic Door to compartment to be 1.2m x 2.2m high solid timber double-leaf door, louvered at lower half and with lockset shall have 1 light fitting

Dental Unit: a. b. c. d.

The 7 nos. of utility pipes must be within 160mm diameter. (See diagram on 4.11-3) Provide filter at incoming water pipes to the 2 dental chairs Isolated electrical wall switch & water stop cock for each unit Control switch for dental unit shall be located on wall of surgery and shall have a red light indicator

Clinic to have 6 sets of light fittings with 2 fluorescent tubes each. 3 sets of these lights to be connected to one switch. DB with Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker to be provided in the Clinic.

OTHERS

Windows shall be sliding type and top hung above. No fixed glass windows are allowed REV-01 / MAY 06

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock, Vision Panel and Door Closer

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Lighting (Lux) Fans

Air-Conditioning

5 nos. (including 3 nos. at Worktable and 1 no.

for each Dental chair)

6 nos. Twin Gang and 1 no. Single Gang (Dental

Clinic)

1 no. Twin Gang (Compressor Compartment)

See critical information for details Nil

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Communications

2 nos. Telephone Points at Worktable

Water Supply

3 nos. Cold (Dental Clinic)

Others

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

DB Closet as required

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

DENTAL CLINIC

4.11-2

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 42 M2 DENTAL CLINIC

LEGEND 1. Dental Units 2. Long Cabinet with Sinks 3. Worktable 4. Space for Autosonic Cleanser 5. Space for Autoclave 6. Waiting Area 7. High Cabinet 8. Waiting Bench 9. LAN points, Telephone Points & Magnetic Whiteboard

REV-00 / FEB 06

WSC

Water Stop Cock

PTD

Paper Towel Dispenser

SD

Soap Dispenser

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

4.11-3

DENTAL CLINIC

LEGEND 1.

Drain Connection 40mm (internal diameter) PVC pipe Drainage connection is 30mm above floor gradient at least 1:100

2.

Electrical Core 20mm diameter Electrical conduit with 3 core wire (3 x 1.5 sq mm)

Electric Cord free & 1000mm above floor 230V, 50Hz, 13A Automatic Circuit Breaker C16 Control switch to be mounted on the wall of the surgery for turning on the main power supply 3.

Vacuum Connection 40mm (internal diameter) PVC pipe Vacuum connection is 30mm above floor

The Suction pipe will lead to the suction machine (located in the compressor compartment) 4.

Suction Control Cable

20mm diameter Electrical conduit with 3 core wire (3 x 1.5 sq mm) Electric Control Cable free & 1000mm above floor

5.

Compressed Air Connection 15mm (outer diameter) copper pipe finish with BSPF 1/2 Connector

Connection is 50mm above floor Pressure Between 5.2 - 7.5 Bar Free from oil & Contamination 6.

Water connection 15mm (outer diameter) copper pipe finish with BSPF 1/2 Connector Water Connection is 50mm above floor Pressure between 2.5 – 6 bar

5 Microns water filtration (if possible) 7.

Cable Connection 20 mm diameter with minimum 3m length LANs cable/terminated with faceplate at the end of 3m for future connection to chair side computer

REV-01 / MAY 06

TEMPLATE OF JUNCTION BOX FOR DENTAL UNIT

VOL.

Critical Information

2

ANCILLARY

PASTORAL CARE ROOM

4.12-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 40 M2 ROOM

1 no.

AREA 40 m2

Area to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY 40 students

FINISHES Floor

Vinyl Flooring

Wall

Emulsion Paint

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

FUNCTION

For conducting Pastoral Care activities Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Blinds

Whiteboard

1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Magnetic

Pin-up Board

1 no. to cover minimum 30% of wall length

Near Counseling Room and Staff Room

Projection Screen

1 no. 1.5m x 1.5m Wall Mounted and Retractable

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m

Student’s Table

SERVICES

14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table (See Vol. 4 -1.4)

Cabinets

Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Others

10 nos. Big Floor Cushions

Pastoral Care Room should be on the same storey as Counseling Room

--

--

OTHERS --

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Nil

Others

Nil

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

REV-00 / FEB 06

Nil

Power Points

3 nos. Single Gang

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

1 no. Ceiling Mounted

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Communications

Nil

Water Supply

Nil

Others

DB Closet as required

VOL.

2

ANCILLARY

4.12-2

PASTORAL CARE ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 40 M2 PASTORAL CARE ROOM LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Trapezoidal Activity Tables Area 3. Low Cabinet 4. Magnetic Whiteboard 5. Pin-up Board 6. Projection Screen

REV-00 / FEB 06

5 Services & Circulation 5.1

Toilets 5.2

LAN Room 5.3

Central Server Room 5.4

FAVE Area

VOL.

2

SERVICES &

CIRCULATION

TOILETS

5.1-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TOILET UNIT

As required

Critical Information

AREA As required

CAPACITY For every 40 students (male), to provide: 1 WC, 2 urinals (including 1 floor urinal) & 1 washbasin For every 40 students (female), to provide: 3 WCs & 2 washbasins If the actual ratio of male to female students in the school is not available, and if school has no preference, consultants can assume 50% male and 50% female. The provisions prescribed above represent the minimum only. For schools with layouts resulting in longer distances between blocks, consultants shall ensure a good distribution of toilets and provide the appropriate no. of WCs across the school. A total of 12 centralized shower cubicles (6 male and 6 female) and adequate changing space to be provided for students. A total of 2 shower cubicles (1 male, 1 female) to be provided for staff.

FUNCTION Showering, changing, toilets needs

LOCATION /PROXIMITY Toilets shall not be located at remote areas within the school, especially female toilets. Staff toilets to be near Staff and Administration as well as Teaching areas. Centralized showers for students should be near the school field, preferably at the Canteen area. Shower cubicles to be housed separately from WCs in toilet. Basic facilities for the disabled to be provided in all

FINISHES Floor

Non-Slip Tiles

Wall

Wall Tiles up to 2.2m high only

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

FITMENT/FURNITURE Soap Dispenser

1 no. for every two basins

Cleansing Tap

1 no. to be provided to at least one toilet cubicle

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Key Alike to all Toilets (where main doors are provided) (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Nil

Others

Nil

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT

Computer Ports Power Points

Nil

1 no. 15 A for Hand Dryer Isolator for mechanical ventilation 1 no. for Fan

Lighting (Lux)

300

Fans

1 no. Wall Mounted

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Communications

Nil

Water Supply

1 no. Bib Tap in each Squatting Pan Cubicle

Others

13A Power Points for Handicapped Toilets Ducted Mechanical Ventilation System for Toilet Stack Extractor Fan for individual toilet.

schools to include: one handicapped toilet for the

1 no. Electric Hand Dryer

Canteen, Administration areas and in at least one

Sensor Flush Valves to be provided in all Handicapped Toilet Cubicles

wheelchair-bound at the 1st storey each at the

Classroom block; one WC for the ambulant disabled at every level above the 1st storey at the Administrative area and in at least one Classroom block.

4 nos. water coolers to be distributed outside toilet

clusters at every level of the Classroom blocks, 2 nos. at the Canteen and 1 no. outside the Administrative /General Office area.

FITMENT /FURNITURE The sanitary appliances and fittings installed shall be of heavy-duty classification and quality. All fitment including pedestal WC and wash hand basin to be installed at heights that cater to average height students as well as smaller lower primary students. At least 1 squat pan WC with a bib tap shall be provided per toilet.

REV-00 / FEB 06

7 nos. Water Coolers

VOL.

Critical Information

2

SERVICES &

CIRCULATION

5.1-2

FITMENT /FURNITURE (CON’T) Urinal flush/sensor should be 950mm above finished floor level (F.F.L).Wash hand basin to be under-counter type, designed to minimize water spilling over from basin onto the counter.

TOILETS RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS OF TOILET FTTINGS

Vanity tops to be solid-surfacing finish or cultured marble. All wash basin taps shall have their water pressure and flow rate adjusted to minimize splashing. Self-closing delayed action taps to be provided, with large surface area for easy palm-pressing. Soap dispenser to have a transparent window to show the remaining level of liquid soap clearly. Proprietary system partitions to be provided for toilet cubicles. Drum type of tissue holder to be provided in each toilet cubicle.

PEDESTAL TYPE

Hand dryer to be appropriately mounted to prevent hot air from blowing on the face of shorter students.

SERVICES

Toilet stack served by ducted mechanical ventilation system should have central exhaust fans located at roof level. Individual toilets should be served by wall mounted exhaust fans. Ensure that extracted air from toilet is not directed at other habitable or main circulation areas. Foul air extraction to be at low level close to source. Low capacity flushing cisterns to be provided for all water closets.

SQUAT PAN TYPE

Individual control valves to be provided for urinal flush valves and low capacity flushing cisterns.

OTHERS Main entrance to the toilets shall be positioned to ensure sufficient visual privacy for the users inside the toilet. Toilet walls to be finished with smooth wall tiles or other impervious materials. Storage closet of minimum 1.0m x 0.6m to be provided for every cluster of toilets on all floors to store cleaning equipment and mop sink at low height. Handicapped toilet provisions to comply with the latest statutory Code on Barrier-Free Accessibility in Buildings.

URINAL

Squat pan WC cubicle to be kerbed to prevent water from flowing outside the cubicle and its floor to be graded towards gully trap within cubicle. Gully/Floor trap covers to be made of stainless steel.

WASH BASIN

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

SERVICES &

CIRCULATION

LAN ROOM

5.2-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 7.5 M2 LAN ROOM

As required

AREA 7.5 m2

CAPACITY --

FUNCTION

FINISHES Floor

Thick Heavy Duty Anti-Static Vinyl

Wall

Calcium Silicate or Cement Board with Insulation on Inner Wall

Ceiling

Thermally Insulated Ceiling Membrane/ Board

--

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Located at central block and must not be more than 90m from the furthest data outlet that it is serving

FITMENT/FURNITURE Racks (by others)

3 nos. (maximum) 0.8m x 0.8m x 2.2m high

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SAFETY/SECURITY

SERVICES

Master Key

FCU = 2

Security System

Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Burglar Alarm

Heatload = 3.9KW

Others

1 no. of Fire Extinguisher Air Tight Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

Cooling capacity of each FCU = 5.8KW Indoor temperature = 23 + 1oC R.H. = 60% + 5%

OTHERS

LAN Riser shall be located outside the LAN Room facing internal and on all floors Room height to be 2.7m minimum

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Power Points

4 nos. Twin Gang (Computer) 2 nos. Single Gang (FCU)

Maximum weight allowed: 1,500kg No windows allowed

1 no. Single Gang (PLC)

No viewing panel on door

Lighting (Lux)

500

No toilet, planter box or gas pipes shall be allowed to run above or inside the LAN Room

Fans

Nil

Air-Conditioning

24 hr Air-Conditioning to be provided

All openings to be sealed or airtight

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3)

To provide 100mm high concrete kerb at the door opening

Water Supply

Nil

Others

Heat and Smoke detectors

Grounding strip to be located at the same level and near to the power point For schools under upgrading, no riser access and no high tension electrical switchboard in the LAN Room

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

SERVICES &

CIRCULATION

5.2-2

LAN ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 7.5 M2 LAN ROOM LEGEND 1. Rack 2. Air-conditioning Fan Coil Units (2.2m from finished floor level) 3. Wall mounted Lights (1.8m from finished floor level) 4. Wall mounted DB (1.8m from finished floor level)

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

SERVICES &

CIRCULATION

CENTRAL SERVER ROOM

5.3-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 12.6 M2 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM

1 No.

AREA

Min. 12.6 m2

CAPACITY --

FUNCTION

FINISHES Floor

Thick Heavy Duty Anti-Static Vinyl

Wall

Calcium Silicate or Cement Insulation on Inner Wall

Ceiling

Thermally Insulated Ceiling Membrane/ Board

Board

with

--

LOCATION /PROXIMITY

Located at 1st storey and preferably nearby to the General Office Must be nearby telephone equipment room and coaxial distribution room

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES FCU = 4

FITMENT/FURNITURE Rack

5 nos. (maximum) 0.8m x 0.6m x 2.2m high

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Others

1 no. Fire Extinguisher Air Tight Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

Heat Load = 9KW Cooling capacity of each FCU = 5.8KW Indoor temperature = 23 + 1oC R.H. = 60% + 5%

OTHERS

The size of the central server room is 4.2m x 3.0m (minimum internal clearance)

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Power Points

5 nos. Twin Gang (Computer) 4 nos. Single Gang (FCU)

Room height to be min. 2.7m Max. weight allowed: 1,800kg No window allowed

1 no. Single Gang (PLC) Lighting (Lux)

500

No viewing panel allowed on door

Fans

Nil

No toilet, planter box or gas pipes shall be allowed to run above or inside the Server Room

Air-Conditioning

24 hr Air-Conditioning to be provided

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 –2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

Heat and Smoke Detector

2 nos. of Telephone Points

All openings to be sealed or airtight To provide 100mm high concrete kerb at the door opening Grounding strip to be located at the same level and near to the power point For schools under upgrading, no riser access and no high tension electrical switchboard in the Server Room

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

SERVICES &

CIRCULATION

5.3-2

CENTRAL SERVER ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 12.6 M2 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM

LEGEND 1. Rack 2. Air-con Fan Coils (2.2m from finished floor level) 3. Wall mounted lights (1.8m from finished floor level) 4. Wall mounted DB (1.8m from finished floor level)

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

SERVICES &

CIRCULATION

FAVE AREA

5.4-1

AREA 10% of school’s circulation area (approximately 890 m2 to be made available for FAVE space.

Before expansion

LOCATION

Corridor

Preferably sited near Administration areas like General Office, Staff Room or Canteen and other areas that support teaching and learning.

FUNCTION

Staircase

Study Corner “FAVE”

To provide space for school’s future expansion or modification of existing facilities.

Room Space

space

Circulation area can be used as Study Area before it is carved out to form the expanded space or the modified area of an existing facility.

OTHERS If Classrooms need to be reconverted into 42

After expansion

nos. 90 m2 modules, FAVE area can be used.

Corridor

Staircase

Study

Corner

“optimized”

REV-00 / FEB 06

Room Space

Room Space

6 External Works 6.1

Carpark, Driveway & Porch 6.2

Field, Fence & Footbath 6.3

Play Courts & Parade Square 6.4

Outdoor Fitness Area 6.5

Gates & Signwall 6.6

Guard Post

VOL.

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

CARPARK, DRIVEWAY & PORCH

6.1-1

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL PRIMARY SCHOOL NO. OF UNITS As required. To provide 1 no. carpark lot for the handicapped from the total no. of required lots.

DIMENSIONS Porch shelter shall be min. 9.6m wide

FINISHES Road Marking

100mm wide LTA Approved Road Marking Paint

Entrance Porch

Interlocking Pavers

Bus Lots

Interlocking Perforated Slab

Carpark

Interlocking Perforated Slab

Motorcycle Lots

Interlocking Pavers

Driveway

Interlocking Pavers

Min. 3.8m high for bus clearance Min. 4.5m high for fire engine clearance

PARKING LOTS USAGE

Bus Lots

For staff and visitors vehicle parking.

Carpark Lots

23 nos. 4.8m x 2.4m

Motorcycle Lots

6 nos. 2.4m x 1.0m

REV-00 / FEB 06

4 nos. 13.2m x 3.6m

VOL.

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

6.1-2

CARPARK, DRIVEWAY & PORCH

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF CARPARK / DRIVEWAY

SAMPLE SECTION OF ENTRANCE PORCH

REV-00 / FEB 06

FIELD, FENCE &

VOL.

Critical Information

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

FOOTBATH

6.2-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL PRIMARY SCHOOL

1 no.

FIELD SIZE Fenced-up area = 40.0m x 80.0m or 0.32ha (inclusive of tree-planting, buffer, etc.) A buffer of 3m all round field

FINISHES Fence

Chain-link fence with Galvanized Mild Steel Post & Painted

Sub-Soil Drain

To be Designed by Geo-Technical Engineer

FIELD ORIENTATION Ideally North-South

Maximum deviation: 45° to North-South axis

GATES Field Gates

A high fence is to be provided for the field with the following site conditions:

2 nos. 2.4m wide gates between school and field

Side Gates

Refer plan showing critical dimensions D1, D2, D3& D4

1 no. 1.2m wide side gate for community use of the field

Exit Gates

2 nos. 1.2m wide exit gates with a signboard “Emergency Exit Only” at both sides along the fence and to be located near to HDB void decks or open space. The location could be relocated upon principal’s request.

HIGH FENCE

At the ends of the field where the goal posts are located Located next to the school, carpark/public carpark or pavement of public road If the buffer is on a slope of more than 15° or 1:3.73, the high fence is to be at the top of the slope. A 1.0m wide gate is to be centrally located along this fence, however, a low fence is still required at the bottom of the slope when the distance between play courts and the field is less than 3.0m

DRAINAGE

Optimize drains to take run off from field, courts and building Open galvanized steel gratings drain cover should be provided in new schools to replace concrete slab cover to meet statutory requirement To facilitate the cleaning of the drains by power jets, gratings should be placed parallel instead of perpendicular to the edges of surface drains

OTHERS

Goal posts to be provided by school Footbath near field to be provided, consist of 2 tap points, flooring to be of anti-slip material and necessary grating for proper drainage. Field to be designed so that it can be fenced up for use as a community field Refer to MOE Officer in Charge for the Guidelines on Assessment of Landscaping works for the field.

REV-00 / FEB 06

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Others

2 Horn Speakers & 1 no. microphone point to be provided

FIELD, FENCE &

VOL.

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

6.2-2

FOOTBATH

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF PRIMARY SCHOOL FIELD

REV-00 / FEB 06

FIELD, FENCE &

VOL.

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

FOOTBATH

6.2-3

SECTION A-A

PLAN OF FOOTBATH

ELEVATION 1

PLAN OF G.S GRATING

SECTION B-B

SAMPLE OF FOOTBATH DETAIL

REV-00 / FEB 06

FIELD, FENCE &

VOL.

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

6.2-4

FOOTBATH

CRITICAL DIMENSION OF HIGH FENCE

Front Elevation

Side Elevation CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF GOAL POST REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE

6.3-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL PRIMARY SCHOOL

Play Courts – 2 nos. Parade Square – 1 no.

LOCATION

To be located away from roads, carparks and pedestrian linkways Consultants to propose appropriate means of protection for MOE approval when courts have to be located near such places due to site constraint

NETBALL COURT

FINISHES Basketball

Provide pavings/footpath of 3.0m minimum between two courts Provide drains with grating at least on one side of court Avoid planting tall trees near courts Court finish level at least 25mm above surrounding turf level All lines to be 50mm wide Regular cement screed flooring to all sports courts

PARADE SQUARE

Parade square 30.0m x 40.0m Planting space for trees and shrubs are recommended at the perimeter of the parade square A rostrum and 2 flag posts shall be provided at the parade square Drains surrounding the parade square and any internal drain courtyard shall be covered with grating running parallel to the drain

REV-00 / FEB 06

Support

of

Galvanized

Steel

&

Painted 50mm Wide Lines in approved Pack Solvent with Volleyball/Sepak Takraw

Volley court lines to be provided with provision of galvanized steel sleeves for posts

ALL COURTS

Backboard

‘Fast Borundico’ Galvanized Steel Post & Painted

Suitable Galvanized Steel Sleeves for net post Sleeve Cover of Solid Brass

50mm Wide Lines in approved Pack Solvent with ‘Fast Borundico’

Netball Court

Cement Screed (if Netball Court is integrated

Parade Square

Interlocking Pavers

with the Parade Square)

VOL.

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

6.3-2

PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE

NETBALL COURT

(TO BE DRAWN ONTO PARADE SQUARE, WHEREVER POSSIBLE)

Goal Ring

Elevation NETBALL GOAL POST

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE

6.3-3

See Detail A

BASKETBALL COURT

Front Elevation

Side Elevation BASKETBALL POST

DETAIL A

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE

6.3-4

See Detail A

See Detail B

VOLLEYBALL COURT

(COULD BE DRAWN ON BASKETBALL COURT )

DETAIL A

REV-00 / 28 JAN 04

VOLLEYBALL POST

REV-00 / FEB 06

DETAIL B

VOL.

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

6.3-5

PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE

ELEVATION OF FLAG POLES FRONTING ASSEMBLY GROUND

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

6.3-6

PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE

PLAN OF RAISED PLATFORM

SECTION THROUGH PLATFORM

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

6.4-1

AREA

OUTDOOR FITNESS AREA RECOMMENDED FITNESS EQUIPMENT FOR PRIMARY SCHOOLS

120 m2 or 30.0m X 4.0m

LOCATION

Area to be located free from underground services

OTHERS

School principal to select 7 out of 11 fitness equipment

Horizontal Ladder

Step Up/ Astride Jump Benches

Inclined Flex Arm Hang

Climbing Ropes

Leg Raise

Forward Jump

Pull-up Bars Vertical Ladder

Sit-up Bench (4 pieces) Balance Beam

Parallel Bars REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

6.5-1

GATES & SIGNWALL

MAIN ENTRANCE & SIDE GATE Open inwards

Security over gate (e.g. provide spikes) 1 no. of drop bolt for each leaf with metal sleeves Provide ball-bearing hinges if gate is too large and heavy Gates should not be designed with horizontal bars which can be easily climbed. Distance between bars should not exceed 150mm.

SIGNWALL

School name to be written in 4 languages in the following order:

Plan

Malay Chinese Tamil English School crest to be provided School name in English (Box Lettering) to be mounted on the school building located above first storey

OTHERS

To provide directional signs at strategic locations of new schools to be built to guide visitors to the school. This requirement is to be evaluated by consultants on a case by case basis. Consultants should review the location of the school and advise on the need and locations of the signs.

Plan

Elevation GATE FOR MAIN ENTRANCE & SUBSTATION

REV-00 / FEB 06

Elevation SIDE GATE

VOL.

2

EXTERNAL WORKS

6.5-2

GATES & SIGNWALL

SAMPLE PLAN OF SIGNWALL

SAMPLE ELEVATION OF SIGN WALL

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

FACILITIES

Critical Information

2

OTHER

6.6-1

GUARD POST

AREA

Max. 4sqm

CAPACITY

2 security officers

FUNCTION

To monitor human and vehicular traffic at school gates; To log in visitor’s particulars and issue entry passes; To monitor activities on CCTV screen

LOCATION / PROXIMITY

To be near main entrance gates of school with clear unobstructed view of the entrances for vehicles and visitors.

FITMENT / FURNITURE Minimal provision.

Window counter to be designed to facilitate exchange of passes and visitors’ enquiry.

SERVICES

Lighting and power points as required to be provided.

Exterior view GUARD POST

Electric fan to be provided and positioned as appropriate.

Connection to school’s CCTV network to be provided.

OTHERS

Guard post design should not be opulent. Doors and windows to be lockable to prevent theft. Signage to be provided to enable visitors to identify Guard Post as a point of security. Lightning Protection System shall be provided as required.

Interior of GUARD POST

REV-00 / FEB 06

Master Revision List Index

Master Revision List Design Handbook Vol. 2 – Primary School S/

Page No.

No. 1.

1.1-1

Revision

Circular No. /

No.

Circular Date

01

03/2006 (May 06)

Amendment Critical Info>Others - Proper distribution of M&E services

Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security: - Renamed and amend type of “Security Key System” - Renamed “Alarm System”

2.

1.2-1 & 2

01

03/2006 (May 06)

Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Projection Screen: - Omitted “ * ” Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security: - Amended type of Security System Pg. 1.2-2>Legend: – Inserted items 13 to 15

3.

2.2-1

01

03/2006 (May 06)

Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Pin-up board: - Amended text Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture>Kiln: - Rearranged text

4.

2.7-1

01

03/2006 (May 06)

Critical info>No. of units: - Amended no. of units Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Floor: – Amended page reference

Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Ceiling: - Omitted “Suspended Ceiling” 5.

4.5-1

01

03/2006 (May 06)

Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Wall: - Omitted “Ceramic”

Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security>Others: - Amended page reference - Omitted text Recommended Provisions>Services/Eqt>Communications: – Amended page reference 6.

4.7-1 & 2

01

03/2006 (May 06)

Critical info>Fitment/Furniture: -Added “mirror” details Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Floor: -Amended text Recommended Provisions>Services/Eqt >Fans: - Relocated detail description to Critical Info column 4.7-2>Drawing>Legend

- Relocated detail of mirror to Critical Info column 7.

4.10-1

01

03/2006 (May 06)

Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security>Master key:

8.

4.11-1

01

03/2006 (May 06)

Critical info>Fitment/furniture:

– Amended page reference

- Amended detail on wall hung cabinet & wall cabinet Critical info>Services>Compressor compartment: - Amended door dimensions. >Services>Dental unit – Amended page reference >Others -Amended Windows Recommended Provisions>Finishes: - Amended ceiling type

SCHOOL DESIGN HANDBOOK EDITION 2006

Vol. 3

Produced by

Research, Innovation & Specifications Unit | Research & Procurement Branch| MOE

Copyright of Ministry of Education 2006

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any other information storage and retrieval systems, without prior permission in writing from the copyright holder. Applications for use of the information within should be addressed to Research & Procurement Branch, Infrastructure & Facility Services Group, Ministry of Education.

FOREWORD The Ministry of Education has invested a great deal of resources into

developing its school buildings. Many existing schools have seen their

facilities enlarged, renovated or rebuilt to purposefully fulfil the varying needs and expectations of school educators and students alike.

Today, the design direction for schools is towards innovative, adaptable

and flexible learning environments. Being centres of teaching and learning, it is an inarguable fact that the schools serve as important

models of inspiration for our young. Schools’ physical environments, at the same time, serve as the platforms which facilitate their intellectual and physical growth. Thus, it is of concern that our schools be built to be conducive, efficient and easily maintainable.

The collaborative efforts of educators and designers will continue to be helpful in creating desirable spaces to nurture our young. Improvements

that are responsive to the changing pedagogical styles will continue to be expected of our school buildings. To assist schools and designers in their tasks, Research & Procurement Branch (RPM) conducted a review of the School Design Handbook and put together existing good practices as well as fresh ideas on school design into this new 2006 edition.

As we resume our journey forward in school design and in garnering

even more learning points, it is hoped that the information herein would help facility planners to design learning environments that will be meaningful and enriching to both educators and students.

School Design Handbook

Vol. 3

> SECONDARY SCHOOL <

CONTENTS Introduction

1

General Teaching 1.1

1.2

2

Classroom

Mother Tongue Language Room

Special Teaching 2.1

Humanities Room

2.2

Humanities Workroom

2.4

Art & Crafts Room

2.6

Casting Room

2.8

Audio Visual Room

2.3 2.5 2.7

2.9

Commerce Room

Project Room Art Store

Audio Visual Store

2.10 Music Room 2.11 Music Store

2.12 Computer Room 2.13 IT Learning Resource Room 2.14 Chemistry Laboratory

2.15 Biology/Physics Laboratory

2.16 Science Laboratory’s Preparation Room 2.17 Kitchen

2.18 Kitchen Preparation Room 2.19 Needlework Room

REV 00 / FEB 06

3

Design & Technology 3.1

3.2

D&T Studio 2

3.3

Wood Machineshop

3.5

Design Room Store

3.4 3.6 3.7 3.8

4

D&T Studio 1

Design Room

D & T Studio Store

(1. Studio Store 2. Main Store)

D & T Staff Room

D & T Studio (LS)

Administrative / Staff 4.1

Principal’s Office

4.2

Vice-Principal’s Office

4.4

Office Store

4.6

H.O.D’s Office

4.3 4.5

General Office

Printing Room

4.7

Meeting Room

4.8

Counselling Room

4.9

Prefects’ Room

4.10 Career Guidance Room 4.11 Staff Room

4.12 Staff Lounge

4.13 Staff Resource Room 4.14 Sickbay

5

Ancillary 5.1

Media Resource Library

5.3

Multi-Purpose Hall

5.2

5.4

(1. Control Room 2. Changing Room 3. Store) Furniture Store

5.5

Canteen

5.7

Non-Teaching Staff (NTS) Room

5.6

REV 00 / FEB 06

Multi-Purpose Hall

Bookshop

5

Ancillary ( con’t) 5.8

Health & Fitness Room

5.9

Games Equipment Store

5.10 Co-Curricular Activities (CCA) Room 5.11 NCC / NPCC Room

5.12 Rifle Range (Indoor) 5.13 Rifle Range (Outdoor) 5.14 Armoury 5.15 Dental Clinic

6

7

Services & Circulation 6.1

Toilets & Showers

6.2

LAN Room

6.3

Central Server Room

6.4

FAVE Area

External Works 7.1

Carpark, Driveway & Porch

7.3

Playcourts & Parade Square

7.4

Outdoor Fitness Area

7.5

Gates & Signwall

7.6

Guard Post

7.2

Field, Fence & Footbath

List of Abbreviations User’s Reference Master Revision List

REV 00 / FEB 06

Introduction

VOL.

INTRODUCTION

3 1.0

Introduction

1.1

The information found in this Volume is a compilation of data describing the major provisions and particular specifications for each of the school’s facilities. 1

2.0

Planning Parameters

2.1

The overall facility provisions were computed based on the following planning scenario: ƒ ƒ

School operating on a single-session model

Having a max. enrolment of 1520 students (critical session)

2.2

In designing the provisions for each type of facility, the above planning

3.0

How to use this Volume

3.1

Each facility is represented by a datasheet which lays down the

parameters must be taken into account, unless otherwise stated.

recommended provisions as well as the critical requirements of the facility. A sample layout of the facility is also provided to show how the space within the facility could be configured.

3.2

The recommended provisions and sample layouts shown in the datasheets are to be used only as a guide by Consultants who are designing the facility.

3.3

As certain facilities may require revisions to their size and/or unit numbers or other details due to the school’s specific programmes, Consultants are

required to seek the school’s and MOE’s advice as to the relevancy of the information to the project. Should any deviation from the specifications be

necessary, the Consultant shall advise the school or MOE on the extent of it and the implications, if any, accordingly.

1

The list of facilities is as tabulated in the Primary School and Secondary School’s Facilities Tables. (Refer to Vol. 1

- Chapters 4.7 & 4.8 of the School Design Handbook).

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 General Teaching 1.1

Classroom 1.2

Mother Tongue Language Room

VOL.

Critical Information

3

GENERAL TEACHING

NO. OF UNITS

CLASSROOM

1.1-1

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 MODULE

(per school)

Min. 34

When required, no. of units must be able to revert to 38 (90 m2 each).

FINISHES

AREA

Minimum module of 45 m2 per classroom

When required, area must be able to revert to 90 m2 (38 units).

CAPACITY

For a module of 90 m2: 1 Staff, 40 Students For modules other than 90 m2: The appropriate space per student norm to be used to derive the capacity, based on the proposed function of the room

FUNCTION

Floor Wall

Ceiling

Other possible functions include – project work, multi-group activity, independent learning

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Quiet zone

Preferably near the Special Teaching areas

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Students’ seating to be minimum 3m clear from whiteboard Moveable wall partition if installed should have a minimum sound insulation of 42 dBA. State Flag shall be above all other decoration or emblem of any kind

SERVICES --

OTHERS

Classrooms should face North-South direction and address vision care needs (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Walls between classrooms to be impact-resistant Window arrangement and other façade openings to be appropriately designed to suit the module size allocated to each classroom unit, and to take into account any future conversions to a different module size. Consideration must be given to the proper distribution of mechanical & electrical services as well.

Curtain/ Blinds Whiteboard

Pin-up Board

Projection Screen

As required 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m

1 no. 1.2m high x minimum 30% of rear wall length

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted Retractable

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m

Computer Table

1 no. 0.7m x 0.6m

Students’ Table Cabinets

State Flag

Moveable Wall Partition

35 nos. 0.6m x 0.5m

1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m

1 no. to comply with specifications

(See Vol. 4 – 1.2) As required

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Key alike per room Master Key Set C

Security System

As required

Others

(See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Nil

SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

3 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher)

Power Points

3 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD) 6 nos. Ceiling Mounted

1 no. Wall Mounted for teacher

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Water Supply

Nil

Communications Others

REV-01 / MAY 06

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of slab

FITMENT/FURNITURE

1.1-1

General Instruction Area

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) DB Closet as required

VOL.

3

GENERAL TEACHING

1.1-2

CLASSROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT (FOR A 90

M2

MODULE)

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Students’ Tables Area 3. Cabinet 4. Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 5. Pin-up Board 6. Students’ Storage Cabinet Area 7. Computer Tables 8. LCD Projector 9. Printer

POSITION OF STATE FLAG/ MAGNETIC WHITEBOARD & PIN-UP BOARD AT FRONT WALL

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

GENERAL TEACHING

MOTHER TONGUE LANGUAGE ROOM

1.2-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 45 M2 TYPE FACILITY

3 nos.

AREA

45 m2 per unit

FINISHES

Total of 135 m2 to be School White Area (SWA)

Floor

CAPACITY

Wall

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint / Sliding Folding Partition

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

1 Staff 20 Students

between 2 Rooms

FUNCTION

Teaching of Mother Tongue Languages: Chinese, Tamil & Malay Can explore provision for multiple usages

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain/ Blinds Whiteboard

Nil 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated

Near Staff Room

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Projection Screen

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted Retractable

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Centrally accessible from classrooms

--

SERVICES --

with High Cabinet High Cabinet

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m

Cabinets

High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board

Students’ Table

10 nos. Mobile Table (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

OTHERS

2 rooms to be interconnected with sliding folding partition (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Sliding folding partition to be usable as Pin-up Board

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

Nil

SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

5 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Fans

1 no. for printer)

4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)

3 nos. Ceiling Mounted

1 no. Wall Mounted for teacher

Communications

PA System (See Vol.4 – 2.3)

Others

DB Closet as required

Water Supply

REV-01 / MAY 06

5 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for

printer)

Nil

MOTHER TONGUE

VOL.

3

GENERAL TEACHING

1.2-2

LANGUAGE ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF MOTHER TONGUE LANGUAGE ROOMS

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Students’ Tables Area 3. High Cabinet with Sliding Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. LCD Projector 5. Sliding Folding Partition

REV-00 / FEB 06

2 Special Teaching 2.1

Humanities Room 2.2

2.11

Music Store 2.12

Humanities Workroom

Computer Room

2.3

2.13

Commerce Room 2.4

IT Learning Resource Room 2.14

Art & Crafts Room

Chemistry Laboratory

2.5

2.15

Project Room

Biology/Physics Laboratory

2.6

2.16

Casting Room

2.7

Art Store

Science Laboratory’s Preparation Room/Store 2.17

Kitchen

2.8

2.18

Audio Visual Room

Kitchen Preparation Room/Store

2.9

2.19

Audio Visual Store 2.10

Music Room

Needlework Room

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

HUMANITIES ROOM

2.1-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 TYPE FACILITY

1 no.

AREA 90 m2

Area to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY 1 Staff 40 Students

FUNCTION

For teaching of Humanities Subjects such as Geography and History Can explore provision for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Preferably on the 2nd storey

FINISHES Floor

Concrete Topping

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

Wall

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain/Blinds

Cabinets should be provided to store equipment, models and students’ project work

SERVICES --

Nil

Whiteboard

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with

Interconnected with Humanities Store

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Emulsion Paint

Projection Screen Teacher’s Table Students’ Table Cabinet

with High Cabinet

High Cabinet

1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m at rear of room

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable

1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m

20 nos. 1.6m x 0.7m Mobile Table

High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board

(See Vol. 4– 1.4)

OTHERS --

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil Nil

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Lighting (Lux) Fans

Air-Conditioning

printer)

7 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &

1 no. for printer)

4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)

500

6 nos. Ceiling Mounted at 2.5m minimum from floor level Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Others

1 no. TV

Water Supply

REV-01 / MAY 06

7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for

Nil

DB Closet as required

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.1-2

HUMANITIES ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF HUMANITIES ROOM SAMPLE LAYOUT

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Students’ Table Area 3. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. Pin-up Board 5. LCD Projector Screen 6. TV

REV-01 / MAY 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

HUMANITIES WORKROOM

2.2-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 22.5M2 TYPE FACILITY

1 no.

AREA

22.5 m2

Area to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

2 – 3 Teachers

FINISHES Floor

Concrete Topping

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

Wall

Emulsion Paint

FUNCTION

For storage of Humanities teaching aids and workspace for teachers Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Preferably on the 2nd storey

Interconnected with Humanities Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Track

Nil

Whiteboard

Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Pin-up Board Cabinets

Nil

High Cabinet

FITMENT/FURNITURE

High Cabinet to span length of room

SERVICES

SAFETY/SECURITY

--

Master Key

OTHERS

Others

Security System

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil Nil

--

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

500

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

2 nos. Single Gang 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

HUMANITIES WORKROOM

2.2-2

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF HUMANITIES WORKROOM

LEGEND

1.

REV-00 / FEB 06

High Cabinet

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

COMMERCE ROOM

2.3-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 135M2 TYPE FACILITY

1 no.

AREA

135 m2 comprising: Teaching area and Practical Simulation area Total area to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

FINISHES Floor

Vinyl

Ceiling

Non-Acoustic Ceiling

Wall

Emulsion Paint

1 Staff

40 Students

FUNCTION

For teaching of Elements of Office Practice Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Near General Office and Staff Room so that equipment could be used for non-teaching purposes

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Reception counter to be movable on rollers

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain/ Blinds

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with

Projection Screen Teacher’s Table Students’ Table Cabinets

SERVICES --

As required

Whiteboard

Others

OTHERS

with High Cabinet

High Cabinet

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and

Retractable

1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m

16 nos. 1.6m x 0.7m

High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

2 nos. Table for Typewriters 1 no. Reception Counter

Minimum 2 door openings Vinyl flooring must be heavy duty to withstand equipment loads, scratch-resistant to withstand furniture movement

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Burglar Alarm

1 no. Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

12 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for

Power Points

12 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

Air-Conditioning

printer)

& 1 no. for printer)

14 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)

8 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

3 nos. Telephone Points

1 no. TV

1 no. Fax Machine 1 no. Photocopier

DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.3-2

COMMERCE ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF COMMERCE ROOM

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Students’ Table Area 3. Reception Counter 4. Sofa Set 5. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard and Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 6. Table for Typewriter 7. Photocopier & Fax Machine on Low Cabinet 8. LCD projector

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

ART & CRAFTS ROOM

2.4-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 135M2 TYPE FACILITY

Min. 1 no.

AREA Min. 135 m2 If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above shall be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

1-2 Staff/Supervisors

FINISHES Floor Wall

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint / Sliding Folding

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

between 2 rooms

Partition

40 Students

FUNCTION Instructional Strategies Still life sketching and other Art and Crafts activities Storage of Art works and materials Can explore provision for multiple usages (for min. 1 unit)

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Min. 1 Art & Crafts Room preferably adjoining an open courtyard, balcony or field to hold larger/ bulky projects and for drying pottery/clay sculptures 2 Art & Crafts Rooms shall preferably be located on the ground floor

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

As required 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m integrated with High

Projection Screen

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted Retractable

Teacher’s Table

integrated with High Cabinet

Cabinet

1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m

Students’ Table

35 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m x 0.8m

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board

Cabinets

Others

Low Cabinet

Worktop with High Cabinet Low Cabinet with Sinks

Soap Dispenser

Interconnected with Art Store, Casting Room and Project Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Counter top with sink to be of non-porous finish Sliding folding acoustic partition to be usable for mounting of display items All fitment located outside Art and Crafts Room must be weather-resistant

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Burglar Alarm

Security Grilles to Drying Terrace

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock 1 no. Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES

Ceiling mounted track lighting to be provided for still life session

OTHERS

Drying terrace to be a hard non-porous surface with a 2.5m minimum shelter/ overhang to protect from rain

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Drying terrace should be fenced, with access only from the Art and Crafts Room

Lighting (Lux)

Sliding folding acoustic partition to be usable for display

Fans

Air-Conditioning

8 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &

1 no. for printer)

1 no. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)

500

2 nos. Track Lighting

9 nos. Ceiling Mounted

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Others

DB Closet as required

Water Supply

REV-01 / MAY 06

7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for

printer)

3 nos.

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.4-2

ART & CRAFTS ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF TWO ART & CRAFTS ROOMS OF 135 M2 EACH

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Students’ Table Area 3. Still life session arrangement for 18 students 4. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 5. Low Cabinet 6. High Cabinet with Worktop 7. Low Cabinet with Sink 8. Sliding Folding Partition 9. 3m long lighting track 10. LCD Projector

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

ART & CRAFTS ROOM

2.4-3

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF FURNITURE LAYOUT

LONGITUDINAL SECTION

(For still life session: seating arrangement for 18 students)

PHOTO OF ART & CRAFTS ROOM AS SEEN FROM SIDE OF ROOM

PHOTO OF PROJECT ROOM REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

PROJECT ROOM

2.5-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 45 M2 TYPE FACILITY

1 no.

A AREA

45 m2 Area to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY 1 Staff

FINISHES Floor

Homogenous Tiles

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

Wall

Emulsion Paint

6 Students

FUNCTION

Photographic Work, Pyrography, Ceramics, Print Making, etc. Can explore provision for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Near Art Store and Casting Room Interconnected with Art & Crafts Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Nil

Whiteboard

Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Pin-up Board Cabinets

(See Vol. 4– 1.4)

Nil

Low Cabinet with Open Shelves Low Cabinet with 2 nos. Sinks

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Solid surfacing finish for sink counter top

SERVICES --

OTHERS

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4– 1.2)

Nil

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

Both sinks to be close to each other

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

500

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

3 nos. 13 Amp 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

2 nos. Nil

DB Closet as required

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

CASTING ROOM

2.6-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 22.5M2 TYPE FACILITY

1 no.

AREA

22.5 m2 Area to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY 10 Persons

FINISHES Floor

Homogeneous Tiles

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

Wall

Glazed Ceramic Tiles to minimum 2.2m height

FUNCTION

Practical works relating to hand crafted and 3-D art projects such as ceramic structure, print making, modeling with clay & Plaster of Paris

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Interconnected with Art & Crafts Room Near Art Store and Project Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Solid surfacing finish for counter tops and backsplash for sink

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Nil

Whiteboard

Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Pin-up Board Cabinets

(See Vol.4 – 1.4) Others

Nil

Low Cabinet with Open Shelves Low Cabinet with Sink

1 no. Kiln

Both sinks to be close to each other

SERVICES

Exhaust fan to be located as close to the kiln as possible Clay trap to be provided for each sink

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4– 1.2)

Nil

Solid Door

OTHERS

Access to Casting Room should be from the Art & Crafts Room and not directly from corridor The Kiln should be placed against an external wall opening for effective heat dissipation

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Power Points

Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. 13 Amp

1 no. 30A 3 phase for Kiln

1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Nil

2 nos. (1 no. per sink) 1 no. Exhaust Fan

DB Closet as required

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

CASTING ROOM

2.6-2

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 22.5 M2 CASTING ROOM LEGEND 1. Low Cabinet with Open Shelves 2. Kiln

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

ART STORE

2.7-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 22.5 M2 ART STORE

Min. 1

AREA Min. 22.5 m2

CAPACITY --

FINISHES Floor

Concrete Topping

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

Wall

Emulsion Paint

FUNCTION

Storage of art materials and large folios Can explore provision for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Should be easily accessible from the corridor Near Project Room and Casting Room Interconnected with Art & Crafts Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Nil

Whiteboard

Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Pin-up Board Cabinets

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Nil

Supply Cabinet

Folio Cabinet

Folio cabinet to span longest wall length

SERVICES --

OTHERS

Store door to be minimum 1.2m wide

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil Nil

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. Single Gang 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.7-2

ART STORE

SAMPLE LAYOUT LEGEND 1. Folio Cabinet 2. Supply Cabinet

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

AUDIO VISUAL ROOM

2.8-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 135 M2 TYPE FACILITY

1 no.

AREA

FINISHES

135 m2 Area to be School White Area (SWA)

Floor

Vinyl

CAPACITY

Ceiling

Non-Acoustic Ceiling

Wall

Acoustic Treatment

1 Staff

80 Students

FUNCTION

For screening of films, slides, OHP, transparency, filmstrips, television, etc.

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain/Blinds

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4 x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High

Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Centrally located with respect to Classroom and preferably near Media Resource Library

Projection Screen

Interconnected with Audio Visual Store

Cabinets

Should not be on 1st storey Separated from Design & Technology Areas

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Students’ chairs to have adjustable writing board

SERVICES

1 power point at midway of central aisle is required

Blackout Blinds

Whiteboard

DB Closet Others

with High Cabinet

Cabinets

1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted and

Retractable

High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m

82 nos. 0.62m x 0.45m Students’ Chairs

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

OTHERS

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Burglar Alarm

Solid Door with Jimmy Proof-Lock with Door

Closer & Viewing Panel

Max. viewing Distance from last row of seat to screen to be 6 x width of screen Min. Viewing Distance from 1st row of seat to be 2 x width of screen Base of screen to be 1.2m above floor level

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

1 no.

Power Points

3 nos. Twin Gang

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

1 no. Single Gang Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

Sound Reinforcement System 1 no. Telephone Point

1 no. TV

1 no. LCD

DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.8-2

AUDIO VISUAL ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT

SECTION LEGEND 1. Student Seats with Writing Top 2. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 3. LCD Projector

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.8-3

AUDIO VISUAL ROOM

PHOTOS SHOWING AUDIO VISUAL ROOM

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3 Critical Information

SPECIAL TEACHING

AUDIO VISUAL STORE

2.9-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 45 M2 TYPE FACILITY

1 no.

AREA

45 m2 Area to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY --

FINISHES Floor

Concrete Topping

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

Wall

Emulsion Paint

FUNCTION

Storage of audio and visual equipment Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Interconnected with Audio Visual Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Nil

Whiteboard

Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Pin-up Board Cabinets

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Nil

Low Cabinet

Open Shelves

OTHERS --

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Burglar Alarm

1 no. Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. Single Gang 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

VOL.

3 Critical Information

SPECIAL TEACHING

MUSIC ROOM

2.10-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 135 M2 TYPE FACILITY

Min. 1

AREA

Min. 135 m2

CAPACITY 40 Students

FINISHES Floor

Teak Parquet

Wall

Acoustic Treatment

Ceiling

Non-Acoustic Ceiling

FUNCTION

For conducting lessons, choir practice and orchestra practice Can explore provision for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Away from Classroom areas

Interconnected with Music Store Separated from general and other specific teaching areas

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain/Blinds

Blackout Blinds

Whiteboard

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic with 1m Manuscript Lines integrated with High Cabinet

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet

Projection Screen

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted Retractable

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m

2.4m high mirror on wall opposite whiteboard

Computer Table

5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m

2 nos. grab bars at 840mm and 1050mm from the floor level and 250mm from the mirrored wall (in Music Room 1 only)

Cabinets

High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board

Others

40 nos. Practice Modules

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

SERVICES ---

OTHERS

Room layout to be determined by orchestra practice requiring the largest area Door to be 1.2m – 1.5m wide

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Others

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel 1 no. Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer)

Power Points

11 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher, 1 no. for printer)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

Nil

2 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

1 no. TV 1 no. Piano 1 no. Hi-Fi set Other Instruments DB Closet as required

REV-01 / MAY 06

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

MUSIC ROOM

2.10-2

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 135 M2 MUSIC ROOM

MODULE A:

MODULE B:

MODULE C:

ORCHESTRA PRACTICE

CHOIR PRACTICE

TEACHING PURPOSE

LEGEND 1.

Teacher’s Table

2.

Module A

3.

Piano

4.

Computer Table Area

5.

High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen

REV-00 / FEB 06

6.

LCD Projector

7.

TV

8.

Full Height Mirror

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

MUSIC STORE

2.11-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 45 M2 STORE

Min. 1

AREA

Min. 45 m2

CAPACITY --

FINISHES Floor

Concrete Topping

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

Wall

Emulsion Paint

FUNCTION

Storage of musical instruments, teaching aids and accessories Can explore provision for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Interconnected with Music Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE

All shelves to be adjustable

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Nil

Whiteboard

Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Pin-up Board Cabinets

Nil

1 no. cabinet for curriculum music

1 no. cabinet for band instruments

SERVICES --

OTHERS Room to be 5.0m minimum wide Door to be 1.2m – 1.5m wide

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Burglar Alarm

Solid Door

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. Single Gang 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.11-2

MUSIC STORE

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 45 M2 MUSIC STORE

LEGEND 1. Cabinet for Curriculum Music 2. Cabinet for Band Instrument

REV-00 / FEB 06

2 Special Teaching 2.1

Humanities Room 2.2

2.11

Music Store 2.12

Humanities Workroom

Computer Room

2.3

2.13

Commerce Room 2.4

IT Learning Resource Room 2.14

Art & Crafts Room

Chemistry Laboratory

2.5

2.15

Project Room

Biology/Physics Laboratory

2.6

2.16

Casting Room

2.7

Art Store

Science Laboratory’s Preparation Room/Store 2.17

Kitchen

2.8

2.18

Audio Visual Room

Kitchen Preparation Room/Store

2.9

2.19

Audio Visual Store 2.10

Music Room

Needlework Room

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

COMPUTER ROOM

2.12-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 135 M2 TYPE FACILITY

Min. 4

AREA

Min. 135 m2 (including Workroom)

CAPACITY 1 Staff

40 Students

FUNCTION

Hands-on computer-based learning

FINISHES Floor

Vinyl with concealed floor trunking (See Vol. 4-1.3)

Wall

Emulsion Paint 1.8m x 1.2m viewing glass panel on Computer Workroom wall

Ceiling

Non-Acoustic Ceiling

Computer Workroom for Technical Assistant Can explore provision for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Interconnected with Computer Workroom Near Classrooms

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Projection screen to be positioned centrally to room

SERVICES

1 twin gang power point and 2 LAN points mounted in service outlet box for each computer table 1 twin gang power point and 1 LAN point mounted in service outlet box for teacher’s table Room lights to be controlled row by row parallel to whiteboard

OTHERS

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

As required

Whiteboard

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated with High Cabinet

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.3m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet

Projection Screen

1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted and Retractable

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.6m x 0.7m

Computer Table

21 nos. 1.6m x 0.7m

Cabinets

High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board

1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m (Computer Workroom)

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

SAFETY/SECURITY

Visual connection between Computer Workroom and Computer Rooms to be provided

Master Key

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Vinyl floor finish to be anti-static type

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Others

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel 1 no. Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

44 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher, 1 no. for printer & 1 no. for workroom)

Power Points

26 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher, 1 no. for printer & 1 no. for workroom)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

Nil

1 no. Single Gang for LCD

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

1 no. Master Switch DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.12-2

COMPUTER ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 135 M2 COMPUTER ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF COMPUTER WORKROOM LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Computer Tables Area 3. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. LCD Projector

REV-00 / FEB 06

IT LEARNING

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

RESOURCE ROOM

2.13-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 TYPE FACILITY

Min. 1

AREA

Min. 90 m2 If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above shall be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY 1 Staff

FINISHES Floor

Vinyl with concealed floor trunking (See Vol. 4 -2.3)

Wall

Emulsion Paint

Ceiling

Non-Acoustic Ceiling

42 Students

FUNCTION

Hands-on Computer based Group Learning Can explore provision for multiple usages (for min. 1 unit) If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION /PROXIMITY Near Classrooms

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Projection Screen to be positioned centrally to room

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Blinds

Whiteboard

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated with High Cabinet

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet

Projection Screen

1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted Retractable

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.6m x 0.7m

Computer Table

14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Cabinets

High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

SERVICES

1 no. twin gang power point and 2 LAN points mounted in Cable TV outlet box for 2 computer tables

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Others

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel 1 no. Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

17 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer)

Power Points

11 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

Nil

2 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

1 no. Master Switch DB Closet as required

REV-01 /MAY 06

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

IT LEARNING 2.13-2

RESOURCE ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 90 M2 IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Computer Tables Area 3. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. LCD Projector

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.14-1

NO. OF UNITS

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 144 M2 TYPE FACILITY

Min. 2

AREA

Min. 144 m2

CAPACITY 1 Staff

40 Students

FINISHES Floor

Homogenous Tiles

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

Wall

Emulsion Paint

FUNCTION For conducting Chemistry lessons and experiments Can explore provision for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Preferably on 1st storey Near Biology and Physics laboratories Laboratories are to be grouped together such that they can be cordoned off during examinations Interconnected with Science Preparation Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE

4 students to 1 student’s workbench

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Whiteboard

Blackout Curtains

1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m

Teacher’s Bench

1 no. 4.2m x 0.8m with Sink

Projection Screen

1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted Retractable

Students’ Bench

10 nos. 3.6m x 0.8m with Sink

Others

1 no. Fume Cupboard

Cabinets

Side/Rear Cabinet cum Workbench with Sink

4 nos. workbench cum cabinet to be provided at side and/or rear of lab (See sample layouts 1 & 2) Sufficient knee space along both lengths of students’ workbench to be provided so that 4 students (facing each other) can sit comfortably during group activities Acid resistant top to workbenches to be epoxy resin Workbenches to have anti-spill edge

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Sinks and sanitary piping to be polypropylene

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Burglar Alarm

Solid Door with Jimmy- Proof Lock

Overhead emergency shower 2 nos. Fire Extinguishers

Safety Screen for Teacher’s Bench to be provided

SERVICES

Fume cupboard to have 1 no. gas point Teacher’s workbench to have 1 no. gas point, 1 no. computer point, 2 nos. twin gang power points and 1 no. water point Each student’s bench to have 2 nos. gas points, 1 no. computer point located at the side nearest the central aisle, 2 nos. twin gang power points and 1 no. water point Each side cabinet cum workbench to have 4 nos. gas points, 6 nos. twin gang power points evenly distributed and 2 nos. sinks Service pipe trenches to be provided for ground floor laboratories Exhaust duct to roof level to be provided for fume cupboard All trenches to have solid trench cover composing of steel frame and tile infill Authorities’ requirements, e.g. PowerGas to be complied with

OTHERS

Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m Overhead emergency shower area to have 100mm drop in floor level Position of projector and projection screen to be determined on-site to ensure full view from students’ workbenches area The area of projection on the screen to be maximised and unobstructed

REV-00 / FEB 06

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points Lighting (Lux) Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

11 nos. (10 nos. for students’ benches, 1 no. for teacher’s bench) 30 nos. Twin Gang

1 no. Single Gang for LCD

500

8 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

13 nos. 3-way swan neck lab taps 1 no. for emergency shower

26 nos. gas points (double outlet)

1 nos. gas point for fume cupboard DB Closet as required

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.14-2

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY

SAMPLE LAYOUT 1 FOR A 144 M2 LAB (for elongated lab)

SAMPLE LAYOUT 2 FOR A 144 M2 LAB (for square lab) LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Bench with Sink on 0.15m high platform 2. Students’ Bench with Sink 3. Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. Fume Cupboard 5. Overhead Shower Area 6. Side or Rear Cabinet cum Workbench with Sink 7. Workbench Module 8. LCD Projector

REV-01 / MAY 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

BIOLOGY/PHYSICS LABORATORY

2.15-1

NO. OF UNITS Min. 4

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 144 M2 TYPE FACILITY

AREA

Min. 144 m2

CAPACITY 1 Staff

40 Students

FUNCTION

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogenous Tiles

Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

For conducting Physics and Biology lessons and experiments

Can explore provision for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

All Laboratories are to be grouped together such that they can be cordoned off during examinations Every 2 labs to be interconnected with Science Preparation Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE

4 students (with 2 sets of 2 students facing each other) to one student’s workbench

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

Projection Screen

1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted Retractable

Students’ Bench

10 nos. 1.6 m x 1.0 m

Pin-up Board Teacher’s Bench Cabinets

2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m

1 no. 4.2m x 0.8m with Sink

3 nos. 8.1m x 0.8m Side Workbench with Sink Wall mounted Microscope Cupboards (for Biology laboratories only)

Acid resistant worktops to laboratory benches to be epoxy resin Workbenches in Physics laboratories to have bull-nosed edge

Blackout Blinds

Whiteboard

SAFETY/SECURITY

Workbenches in Biology laboratories to have anti-spill edge

Master key

Sufficient knee clearance for seated students to be provided at all workbenches

Others

Security System

Safety Screen for Teacher’s Bench to be provided

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Burglar Alarm

2 nos. Fire Extinguishers

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock Overhead emergency shower

SERVICES

Teacher’s workbench to have 1 no. gas point, 1 no. computer point, 2 nos. twin gang power points and 1 no. water point At each island core unit, 3 nos. water points shall be provided. Where the side is to be connected to the students’ bench, there shall be 2 nos. computer point & 2 nos. twin gang power points each

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

27 nos. comprising:

(20 nos. at students’ benches, 1 no. at teacher’s bench &

Each side cabinet cum workbench to have 4 nos. gas points, 4 nos. twin gang power points and 2 nos. LAN points evenly distributed

Power Points

Services pipe trenches to be provided for ground floor laboratories

Lighting (Lux)

All services trenches to have solid trench cover composed of steel frame and tile infill

Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications

Nil

Authorities’ requirements, e.g. PowerGas to be complied with

Water Supply

19 nos. 3-way Swan-neck

OTHERS

Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m Overhead emergency shower area to have 100mm drop in floor level Position of projector and projection screen to be determined on-site to ensure full view from students’ seating area The area of projection on the screen to be maximised and unobstructed

REV-01 / MAY 06

Others

6 nos. at side/rear workbench) 36 nos. Twin Gang

1 no. Single Gang for LCD

500

8 nos. Ceiling Mounted PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

1 no. for Emergency Shower

13 nos. gas points (double outlet)

DB Closet as required

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

BIOLOGY/PHYSICS 2.15-2

LABORATORY

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 144 M2 PHYSICS / BIOLOGY LAB

LEGEND

REV-00 / FEB 06

1.

Teacher’s Workbench

2.

Students’ Bench

3.

Island Core Unit

4.

Side Workbenches with Sink

5.

Overhead Shower Area

6.

Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen

7.

Microscope Cupboard (Wall Mounted)

8.

LCD Projector

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

BIOLOGY/PHYSICS 2.15-3

LABORATORY

SAMPLE OF ISLAND CORE UNIT

SAMPLE OF A CLUSTER OF LABORATORY BENCHES

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

BIOLOGY/PHYSICS 2.15-4

LABORATORY

PHOTO OF BIOLOGY/PHYSICS LABORATORY

CLOSE-UP OF ISLAND CORE UNIT AT STUDENTS’ WORKBENCH

REV-00 / FEB 06

SCIENCE LABORATORY’S

VOL.

3 Critical Information

SPECIAL TEACHING

PREPARATION ROOM

2.16-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 50 M2 TYPE FACILITY

Min. 3

AREA

Min. 50 m2

CAPACITY

FINISHES

Floor

Homogenous Tiles

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

Wall

Glazed Ceramic Tiles to minimum 2.2m height

2 Staff

FUNCTION

Preparation for experiments, storage of equipment & work area for Laboratory Assistant Can explore provision for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Interconnected with Science Laboratories

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Whiteboard

Pin-up Board

Projection Screen Cabinets

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Movable high cabinet to have timber-framed glass doors with ventilation gaps

Nil

Workbench cum overhead storage with 2 Workstations and Sink (See Vol. 4 - 1.4)

Sinks and sanitary pipes to be polypropylene

Overhead storage cabinet to have glass doors

Nil

Movable High Cabinet with Glass Doors

Acid resistant worktop to be epoxy resin Workbench to be designed to accommodate computer workstations at appropriate height and with knee clearances for staff seating

Nil

Nil

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

SERVICES

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Burglar Alarm (for Chemistry Preparation Room) 1 no. Fire Extinguisher Solid Door

Service pipe trenches to be provided for ground floor Lab Preparation Room LAN points to be 200mm above counter top

OTHERS

Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m Connecting doors to be provided to laboratories Doors to be located near entrance of laboratories

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Lighting (Lux) Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

2 nos.

3 nos. Twin Gang

500

2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

1 no. 3-way Swan-Neck Laboratory Taps 2 nos. Gas Points (double outlet)

DB Closet as required

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

SCIENCE LABORATORY’S 2.16-2

PREPARATION ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 50 M2 LAB PREPARATION ROOM LEGEND 1. Workbench cum overhead storage with 2 Workstations and Sink 2. Cabinet with Glass Door

PHOTOS OF SCIENCE LABORATORY’S PREPARATION ROOM/STORE

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

KITCHEN

2.17-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 125 M2 TYPE FACILITY

Min. 2

AREA

Min. 125 m2 comprising: 1. Instructional area 2. Practical area 3. Resource area (for 1 kitchen only)

FINISHES Floor

Homogenous Tiles

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

Wall

Glazed Ceramic Tiles to min 2.2m height

CAPACITY 1 Staff

20 Students

FITMENT/FURNITURE

FUNCTION

Curtain

Nil

Can explore provision for multiple usages

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m

For cookery lessons

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Whiteboard

Projection Screen

1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and

Retractable

Preferably on the 1st storey and should not be higher than the 2nd storey

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 3.5m x 0.6m Teacher’s Demonstration

Interconnected with Kitchen Preparation Room

Students’ Table

10 nos. 3.7m x 0.6m Students’ Workbench

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Resource Corner Cabinet (for 1 kitchen only)

All kitchens preferably on same storey, but Needlework Room can be on different storey

Cabinet

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Teacher’s Demonstration Bench to incorporate double bowl sink with space for electric cum gas cooker at the end

Low Cabinet with Louvred Door Open Shelves

Others

Display Cabinet

2 nos. 1.5m x 0.8m Storage Table

4 nos. double bowl sink & 2 nos. single bowl for students

1 no. single bowl sink for teacher

SERVICES

Student’s workbench and Teacher’s demonstration bench to have 1 no. twin gang, 1 no. single gang and power point each

Low Cabinet

Low Cabinet with Louvred Door with Sink

2 students per workbench

Sinks to be well distributed and accessible from workbench

Bench

SAFETY/SECURITY

Ceiling fans are not to be located directly above gas hob

Master Key

LAN and power points for computers to be appropriately distributed at front and rear of kitchen

Others

Security System

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Burglar Alarm

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

3 nos. Fire Extinguishers

OTHERS 2 Kitchens with 1 preparation room/store to be provided for all schools including boys’ school Solar panels are to be located on the accessible RC Flat roof nearest to kitchens

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Lighting (Lux) Fans

Air-Conditioning

5 nos.

13 nos. Twin Gang

18 nos. Single Gang (including 2 nos. for Resource Corner)

500

8 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Others

1 no. LCD

Water Supply

1 no. Swan-neck per sink (Hot and Cold) 11 nos. Gas Point

1 no. Solar Heater

11 nos. Electric cum Gas Cooker 1 no. Refrigerator

2 nos. Microwave Oven

DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.17-2

KITCHEN

SAMPLE LAYOUT 1 OF A 125 M2 KITCHEN

SAMPLE LAYOUT 2 OF A 125 M2 KITCHEN

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Demonstration Bench 2. Students’ Workbench 3. Gas Hob 4. Resource Centre Cabinet (for 1 Kitchen only) 5. Open Shelves 6. Display Cabinet 7. Storage Table 8. Low Cabinet with Microwave Oven 9. Low Cabinet with Louvred Door 10. Refrigerator 11. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Boards 12. LCD Projector

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.17-3

KITCHEN

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF COOKING STATIONS LEGEND 1. Storage Table 2. Low Cabinet / Microwave Oven 3. Students’ Workbench 4. Electric cum Gas Cooker 5. Low Cabinet with Louvred Doors with Sink 6. Low Cabinet/Resource Corner Cabinet (for 1 Kitchen only)

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF DEMONSTRATION AREA (FOR GROUP OF 20 STUDENTS) LEGEND 1. Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 2. Teacher’s Demonstration Bench with built-in sink and standalone Electric cum Gas Cooker 3. 0.3m x 0.3m Stools Area for 20 students

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.17-4

KITCHEN

PHOTO OF KITCHEN

PHOTO OF COOKING STATIONS

REV-00 / FEB 06

KITCHEN PREPARATION

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

ROOM/STORE

2.18-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 42 M2 TYPE FACILITY

Min. 1

AREA

Min. 42m2

CAPACITY

Max. 4 persons

FINISHES Floor

Homogeneous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

Wall

Glazed Ceramic Tiles to minimum 2.2m height

FUNCTION

Preparation of materials/ food for cookery lessons, teacher’s workroom Can explore provision for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Nil

Whiteboard

Nil

Entry to the Preparation Room should be via the Kitchen

Projection Screen

Nil

Interconnected with Kitchen

Workstation

Preparation Room should be located near the corridor

Preferably near Needlework Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Pin-up Board Teacher’s Cabinets

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Cabinets to be provided for the storage of charts, audio visual materials like film strips, video tapes, transparencies, etc.

Nil

3 nos. 2.0m x 0.6m Workstation Low Cabinet with Sink

Wall Hung Display Cabinet Charts Cabinet

High Cabinet with Drawers

Worktop with High Cabinet High Cabinet

Cupboard for storage of brooms, dustbins, vacuum cleaners, etc.

Low Cabinet

1 no. 0.9m x 0.6m Wash Trough [Laundry Area] 1 no. Laundry Trough

SERVICES --

OTHERS --

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

1 no. Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT

Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Power Points

Fans

Air-Conditioning

3 nos. 13 Amp

2 nos. 15 Amp (for washing machine and dryer)

2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

3 nos. (2 nos. for Wash Trough and 1 no. for

Others

1 no. Washing Machine

System

1 no. Telephone Point

Washing Machine) 1 no. Dryer

DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

KITCHEN PREPARATION

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

ROOM/STORE

2.18-2

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 42 M2 KITCHEN PREPARATION ROOM

LEGEND 1.

Low Cabinet with Sink

2.

Wall Hung Display Cabinet

3.

Teacher’s Workstation

4.

Charts Cabinet or High Cabinet with Drawers

5.

Low Cabinet and Wall Hung Display Cabinet

6.

Worktop with High Cabinet

7.

High Cabinets

8.

Laundry Trough

9.

Washing Machine

10. Dryer 11. Wash Trough

PHOTOS OF KITCHEN PREPARATION ROOM

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3 Critical Information

SPECIAL TEACHING

NEEDLEWORK ROOM

2.19-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 115M2 TYPE FACILITY

1 No.

AREA

115 m2 comprising: 1. General Instruction Area 2.

Resource & Science Corner

3.

Sewing/Machining

4.

Dressing Room (min. 8.4 m2)

Area to be School White Area (SWA)

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles

Emulsion Paint (Glazed Ceramic Tiles to

minimum 2.2m height at Resource & Science area)

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

CAPACITY 1 Staff

18 Students 10 Sewing Stations

FUNCTION

Sewing, Study of fabric etc Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Near Kitchen and Kitchen Preparation Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Nil

Pin-up Board

3 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m (1 no. at General

Whiteboard

Projection Screen Teacher’s Table

1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

Instruction Area, 2 nos. at Sewing/ Machining) 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and

Retractable

1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m

Students’ Table

9 nos. 1.5m x 0.8m

Cabinets

High Cabinet

Sewing Stations (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Water supply to be provided at Resource & Science Corner

10 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m

Garment Cabinet Open Shelves

Cabinet with Rack

Low Cabinet with Sink Display Cabinet

OTHERS

Wing Mirror

Ironing area must be sufficient to accommodate 3 ironing boards

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

1 no. Fire Extinguisher

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT

Computer Ports Power Points

Lighting (Lux) Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

5 nos. (General Instruction Area)

15 nos. 13 Amp (General Instruction Area) 1 no. 13 Amp (Resource & Science Area) 20 nos. 13 Amp (Sewing / Machining)

500

8 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

1 no. per sink (Resource & Science Area)

1 no. portable Bunsen Burner (Resource &

Science Area)

DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

SPECIAL TEACHING

2.19-2

NEEDLEWORK ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 115 M2 NEEDLEWORK ROOM LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table

9. Wing Mirror

2. General Instruction Area

10. Curtain

3. Resource & Science Area

11. Display Cabinet

4. Sewing/Machining Area

12. Low Cabinet with Sink

5. Dressing Area

13. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Boards

6. High Cabinet with Rack

14. LCD Projector

7. Garment Cabinet

15. Computer Workstations Area

8. High Cabinet

16. Open shelves

LEGEND 1.

Teacher’s Table

2.

Students’ Table

3.

Open Shelves

4.

Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projector Screen

5.

LCD Projector

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF GENERAL INSTRUCTION AREA (min. 51 m2)

REV-00 / FEB 06

3 Design & Technology 3.1

D&T Studio 1 3.2

D&T Studio2 3.3 Wood Machineshop 3.4

Design Room 3.5

Design Room Store 3.6

D&T Studio Store (1. Studio Store 2. Main Store) 3.7

D&T Staff Room 3.8

D&T Studio (LS)

VOL.

Critical Information

3

DESIGN &

D&T STUDIO 1

3.1-1

TECHNOLOGY

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 360 M2 TYPE FACILITY

NO. OF UNITS 1 nos.

AREA

FINISHES

Min. 360 m2

Floor

CAPACITY

Wall

3 Staff

Ceiling

56 students

FUNCTION

Multi-purpose D&T Studio (mainly woodwork and metalwork) for upper secondary students Can explore provisions for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Must be on 1st storey Interconnected with Tool Store and Wood Machineshop Near Main Store, D&T Staff Room and D&T Switch Room Separated from General Teaching and other Special Teaching Areas

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Concrete countertop shall be epoxy paint finish

Curtain Whiteboard

4 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m

Teacher’s Table

2 nos. 1.2m x 0.8m

Equipment on stands to be fixed at 0.6m above F.F.L Gas Forges to be served by ducted mechanical exhaust system with hoods

OTHERS

Spacing between benches and equipment are recommended safety distances to be complied with Safety zone for equipment to be 0.9m all around, where columns are situated within this spacing, clearance of 0.9m should be given from bench/equipment to column

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Sinks

Master Key

Security System

Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

Solid Door

Grilles to all Windows and Vents 3 nos. Fire Extinguishers

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Points

Nil

Power Points

18 nos. 13A Single Gang

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Equipment

2 nos. 15A Single Gang

14 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil

PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3)

6 nos. (3 nos. per sink)

2 nos. 1.2m x 0.8m Brazing Hearths & Gas Forging Hearths

5 nos. 1000kg 1.5m x 0.8m Metal Lathes

1 no. 120kg 0.7m x 0.7m Pedestal Grinder 1 no. 30kg 0.6m x 0.6m Welding Unit

1 no. 1500kg 1.2m x 1.0m Milling Machine

Backsplash to be in epoxy paint finish

1 no. 240kg 1.0m x 0.8m Power Hacksaw

Service and access road to technical block is required for loading and unloading of heavy machinery

1 no. 400kg 1.2m x 1.0m Folding Machine 1 no. 500kg 1.2m x 1.5m Treadle Shears 1 no. 150kg 0.7m x 0.5m Pillar Drill

Staircase leading to 2nd storey should have a min. Unloading/ Loading floor slab at

Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers

SAFETY/SECURITY

Door to be min. 1.2m (internal) and min. 2.1m (external) wide

2nd

Retractable

22 nos. 1.53m x 0.9m

Cabinets

Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m

width of 1.8m

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and

Integrated Bench

Isolator to be provided for each equipment except folding machines and treadle shears All machines to be provided with 3 phase electrical supply 440V

Nil 2 nos. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

Pin-up Board

Others

SERVICES

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Projection Screen

Away from quiet zone

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

2 nos. 300kg 1.5m x 0.7m Wood Lathes 1 no. CNC Lathe/ Mill

storey should

be strengthened for heavy machinery and vibration

Others

2 nos. 100kg 0.6m x 0.3m Buffing Machine 16 nos. Isolator

2 nos. Gas Points

7 nos. Emergency Stop Station Points

2 nos. Exhaust Fans (for Gas Forging Hearths) DB Closet as required REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

D&T STUDIO 1

3.1-2

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 360 M2 STUDIO LEGEND

1.

Integrated Benches Area

11. Treadle Shears

2.

Teacher’s Table

12. Brazing Hearths & Gas Forging Hearths With Isolator

3.

Metal Lathes with Isolators

13. Pedestal Grinder with Isolator

4.

Finishing Area

14. Welding Unit With Isolator

5.

Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers

15. Milling Machine With Isolator

6.

LCD Projector

16. CNC Machine

7.

Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Sinks

17. Power Hacksaw with Isolator

8.

Buffing Machines with Isolators

18. Pillar Drill with Isolator

9.

Wood Lathes with Isolators

19. Whiteboard & Projector Screen

10.

Folding Machine

20. Emergency Stop Station Point

REV-01 / May 06

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

D&T STUDIO 1

3.1-3

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF INTEGRATED BENCHES AREA

FINISHING AREA

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF INTEGRATED BENCHES

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

3.1-4

D&T STUDIO 1

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF WOOD LATHES LAYOUT CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF METAL LATHES LAYOUT

Alternative 1

LAYOUT OF METAL LATHES AREA

Alternative 2 ALTERNATIVE LAYOUTS OF WOOD LATHE AREA

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

D&T STUDIO 2

3.2-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 240 M2 TYPE FACILITY

Critical Information

1 no.

AREA

Min. 240

FINISHES m2

CAPACITY 3 Staff

Floor Wall

Ceiling

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

56 students

FUNCTION

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Multi-purpose D&T Studio for lower secondary students

Curtain

Can explore provisions for multiple usages

Pin-up Board

4 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m

Teacher’s Table

2 nos.

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Away from quiet zone

Preferably on the 1st storey and must not be higher than second storey Interconnected with Tools Store Near D&T Studio 1, Design Room and Main Store

Whiteboard

Projection Screen

--

SERVICES --

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.8 Wall Mounted and Retractable

Integrated Bench

22 nos. 1.525m x 0.9m

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Concrete Counter with Cabinet & Sink

Cabinets

Separated from General Teaching and other Special Teaching Areas

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Nil 2 nos. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

Concrete Counter with Cabinet & Drawers Concrete Counter with Cabinet for Soldering

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

Solid Door

Grilles to all Windows and Vents 3 nos. Fire Extinguishers

OTHERS

Concrete countertop shall be epoxy finish The spacing between benches and equipment are recommended safety distances and should be complied with

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT

Computer Ports

Nil

Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m

Lighting (Lux)

500

Door to be min. 1.2m (internal) and min. 2.1m (external) wide

Air-Conditioning

Where columns are situated within this spacing, clearance of 0.9m should be given from bench/equipment to column

Service and access road to D&T block is required for loading and unloading of heavy machinery Staircase leading to 2nd storey should have a min. width of 1.8m Note: D&T Studio (Lower Secondary (LS)) is to be provided for schools offering only lower secondary D&T curriculum

Power Points

Fans

Communications Water Supply Equipment Others

22 nos. 13A Single Gang 2 nos. 15A Single Gang

10 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

3 nos. cold

2 nos. 0.6m x 0.3m Buffing Machines 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.3m Scroll Saw

2 nos. Isolator (440V electrical supply)

3 nos. Gas Points (Brazing Hearths and Gas Soldering)

6 nos. Emergency Stop Station Points DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

3.2-2

D&T STUDIO 2

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 240 M2 D&T STUDIO 2 LEGEND 1.

Integrated Benches Area

7. Concrete Counter with Cabinet for Soldering

2.

Teacher’s Table

8. Buffing Machine with Isolator

3.

Planning Area

9. Scroll Saw

4.

Concrete Counter with Cabinet & Drawers

10. Whiteboard & Projector Screen

5.

Concrete Counter with Cabinet & Sink

11. Emergency Stop Station Point

6.

LCD Projector

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF INTEGRATED BENCHES AREA

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF INTEGRATED BENCHES AREA REV-01 / MAY 06

3 Design & Technology 3.1

D&T Studio 1 3.2

D&T Studio2 3.3 Wood Machineshop 3.4

Design Room 3.5

Design Room Store 3.6

D&T Studio Store (1. Studio Store 2. Main Store) 3.7

D&T Staff Room 3.8

D&T Studio (LS)

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

WOOD MACHINESHOP

3.3-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 124 M2 TYPE FACILITY

Critical Information

1 no.

AREA

Min. 124 m2 (including Timber Store)

CAPACITY 8 Persons

FUNCTION

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

Preparation of timber works by staff and storage of timber Can explore provisions for multiple usages

FITMENT/FURNITURE

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Curtain

Direct access from Design & Technology Studio 1 and corridor

Pin-up Board

Nil

Nearby Design & Technology Studio 2, Studio Store 1 and Studio Store 2

DB Closet

1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m

Must be located at 1st storey away from quiet area

Whiteboard

Projection Screen Others

Nil 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Nil

1 no. 0.5m x 0.4m Stainless Steel Sink

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

OTHERS

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

1 no. Fire Extinguisher Solid Door

Grilles to all Windows and Vents

Relationship of equipment should not be changed as they relate to work flow and safety requirement Room should be rectangular and column free Clear height of room to be 3.6m min. Door to be min. 1.8m wide

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

500

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Equipment

5 nos. Single Gang (1 no. for Timber Store)

6 nos. Ceiling Mounted (1 no. for Timber Store) Nil

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

1 no. cold

1 no. 290kg 0.8m x 0.5m Cross-out Saw 1 no. 250kg 0.7m x 0.6m Mortiser

1 no. 250kg 0.8m x 0.5m Bandsaw

1 no. 550kg 0.9m x 0.8m Thicknesser

1 no. 500kg 1.7m x 0.8m Surface Planer 1 no. 250kg 1.5m x 2.2m Rip Saw

1 no. 75kg 0.5m diameter Dust Extractor Others

1 no. 0.8m x 0.5m Grinder 8 nos. Isolators

3 nos. Emergency Stop Station Points

DB Closet as required

REV-01 / MAY 06

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

3.3-2

WOOD MACHINESHOP

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 124 M2 WOOD MACHINESHOP SHOWING CRITICAL DIMENSIONS AND THEIR RELATIONSHIPS (RELATED TO WORKFLOW)

LEGEND

REV-00 / FEB 06

1.

Bandsaw with Isolator

7.

Timber Store Area

2.

Mortiser with Isolator

8.

Grinder with Isolator

3.

Rip Saw with Isolator

9.

Stainless Steel Sink

4.

Thicknesser with Isolator

10.

Dust Extractor with Isolator

5.

Cross-out Saw with Isolator

11.

Magnetic Whiteboard

6.

Surface Planer with Isolator

12.

Emergency Stop Station Point

VOL.

3 Critical Information

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

DESIGN ROOM

3.4-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 200 M2 TYPE FACILITY

1 no.

AREA

200 m2 Area to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

2 Staff

40 Students divided into 2 groups

FUNCTION

Design and Drafting

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Within D&T Area

Should not be above 3rd storey Interconnected with Design Room Store Near D&T Studio 2, Main Store and D&T Staff Room Can be converted into other facilities

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teacher’s Table Students’ Table Cabinets Others

Nil 2 nos. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m

4 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m

2 nos. 2.1m x 2.1m Mounted and Retractable

1 no. 1.9m x 0.8m

20 nos. 1.9m x 0.8m

Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Computer Workbench with leg space

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

OTHERS

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Door to be min. 1.2m (internal) and min. 1.8m (external) wide

Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

Grilles to all windows and vents 1 no. Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Lighting (Lux) Fans

Air-Conditioning

35 nos. Twin Gang (including 20 nos. for 20 students’ tables)

5 nos. Single Gang

500

12 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Others

DB Closet as required

Water Supply

REV-01 / MAY 06

7 nos.

Nil

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

3.4-2

DESIGN ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 200 M2 DESIGN ROOM

LEGEND

REV-00 / FEB 06

1.

Teacher’s Table

2.

Students’ Table Area

3.

Activity Area

4.

Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers

5.

Computer Workbench with leg space

6.

Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board

7.

LCD Projector

8.

Projection Screen

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

DESIGN ROOM STORE

3.5-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 20 M2 STORE

Critical Information

1 no.

AREA m2

20 Area to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

--

FUNCTION

Storage of equipment, components and students’ project work

FITMENT/FURNITYRE Curtain Whiteboard

Nil Nil

Interconnected with Design Room

Projection Screen

Nil

FITMENT/FURNITURE

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION

Handles and locks to be provided for drawers and doors of cabinets

Pin-up Board Cabinets

Others

Nil

Open Shelves with Drawers High Cabinet with Drawers

Nil

SERVICES --

SAFETY/SECURITY

OTHERS

Master Key

Openings for ventilation (with louvers) to be provided above the cabinets

Others

Door width to be min. 1.2m

Security System

Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

Solid Door

1 no. Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

1 no. Twin Gang

Fans

1 no. Ceiling Mounted

Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-01 / MAY 06

Nil

Power Points

300 Nil Nil

Nil

Nil

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

3.5-2

DESIGN ROOM STORE

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF DESIGN ROOM STORE LEGEND

REV-00 / FEB 06

1.

Open Shelves with Drawers

2.

High Cabinet with Drawers

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

D&T STUDIO STORE 1. Studio Store

3.6-1

NO. OF UNITS

2. Main Store

RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 40 M2 STORE

Critical Information

Min. 1 per store type

AREA 1.

Min. 20 m2 (per Studio Store)

2.

Min. 40 m2 (Main Store)

CAPACITY

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

--

FUNCTION

Storage of D&T supplies Can explore provisions for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Main Store should be on 1st storey and easily accessible from service area Each Studio Store is to be attached to D&T Studios 1 and 2 respectively

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Nil Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Pin-up Board Cabinets

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Others

Nil

High Shelves for Studio Store

Low Cabinets with Open Shelves for Main Store

Nil

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SAFETY/SECURITY SERVICES --

OTHERS

Master Key

Security Alarm Others

Door widths to be min. 1.2m (Studio Store) and min. 1.8m (Main Store)

Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Burglar Alarm (Main Store)

1 no. Fire Extinguisher (Studio Store)

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock Roller Shutter

Grilles to all Windows and Vents

SERVICES/EQUPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. Single Gang each 1 no. Ceiling Mounted each Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

3.6-2

ALTERNATIVE 1

D&T STUDIO STORE 1. Studio Store

2. Main Store

ALTERNATIVE 2

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF FITMENT LAYOUT FOR DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY STUDIO STORE AND MAIN STORE

LEGEND

1.

High Shelves (for Design & Technology Studio Stores) OR Low Cabinet with Open Shelves (for Main Store)

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.7-1

NO. OF UNITS

D&T STAFF ROOM RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 24 M2 STAFF ROOM

Critical Information

1 no.

AREA

Min. 24

FINISHES m2

CAPACITY 6 Staff

Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles Emulsion Paint

Non-Acoustic Ceiling

FUNCTION

D&T Staff Office Can explore provisions for multiple usage

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Within D&T Area

Near D&T Studios 1 & 2, Wood Machineshop, Design Room, Main Store, Timber Store and D&T Switch Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Blinds Nil

Pin-up Board

1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m

Staff Table

6 workstations

Projection Screen Cabinets

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Others

Nil

Low Cabinet

Nil

SERVICES --

OTHERS

Ceiling height to be similar to that of classroom School to decide whether to house the D&T Staff at the main Staff Room or D&T Staff Room

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Burglar Alarm

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Lighting (Lux) Fans

Air-Conditioning

500 Nil

A/C to be provided with isolator

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

6 nos.

7 nos. Twin Gang

1 no. Telephone Point

DB Closet as required

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

3.7-2

D&T STAFF ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 D&T STAFF ROOM

LEGEND

REV-00 / FEB 06

1.

Staff Tables Area

2.

Low Cabinet

3.

Pin-up Board

VOL.

Critical Information

3

D&T STUDIO (LS)

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.8-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 300 M2 TYPE FACILITY

1 no.

AREA

Min. 300 m2 (including 24 m2 store)

CAPACITY 3 Staff

Max. 40 students

FINISHES Floor

Concrete Topping

Wall

Emulsion Paint

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

FUNCTION

Multi-purpose D&T Studio and Store for allgirls’ school or schools offering D&T education to lower secondary levels only Can explore provisions for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Away from quiet zones

Preferably on the 1st storey and must not be higher than 2nd storey Not to be located below Chemistry Laboratory

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

OTHERS

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Nil

Whiteboard

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated with High Cabinet 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

Pin-up Board Projection Screen

2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet

2 nos. 1.8m x 1.8 Wall Mounted and Retractable

Teacher’s Table

2 nos. 1.9m x 0.8m

Integrated Bench

22 nos. 1.3m x 0.9m

Cabinets

Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Sink

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers Concrete Counter with Cabinet for Soldering

--

Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers (with 3 gas points equally distributed) High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board High Cabinet with Drawers Open Shelves with Drawers Storage Closet

cum Workstation

1 nos.

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Burglar Alarm

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock (Store)

Grilles to all Windows and Vents Roller Shutters

3 nos. Fire Extinguishers DB Closet as required

REV-01 / MAY 06

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.8-2

D&T STUDIO (LS)

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

3 nos.

Power Points

25 nos. 13A 2 nos. 15A 2 nos. Twin Gang (13A)

Lighting (Lux)

500 (Teaching Area) 500 (Integrated Bench Area) 300 (Store)

Fans

18 nos. Ceiling Mounted (Studio) 1 no. Wall Mounted (Store)

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

3 nos.

Equipment

1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m Brazing cum Forging Unit 2 nos. 100kg 0.6m x 0.3m Buffing Machine 1 no. Folding Machine 1 no. 240kg 1.0m x 0.8m Power Hacksaw 1 no. Treadle Shears 2 nos. Strip Heater (400W, 240V) 2 nos. Strip Heater (200W, 240V) 4 nos. Scroll Saw 1 no. Fluidiser 1 no. Vacuum Forming Machine 1 no. Oven 1 no. Bandsaw 1 no. Drilling Machine 1 no. Bench Grinder

Others

3 nos. Isolator (440V electrical supply) 1 no. Isolator for Exhaust at Gas Forge 5 nos. Gas Points

2 nos. Emergency Stop Station Points DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.8-3

D&T STUDIO (LS)

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 300 M2 D&T STUDIO (FOR LOWER SECONDARY CURRICULUM (LS))

LEGEND 1.

Teaching Area

10. Folding Machine

2.

Integrated Benches

11. Treadle Shears

3.

Storage Closet cum workstation

12. Buffing Machines

4.

High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board

13. Power Hacksaw

5.

Teacher’s Table

14. Brazing cum Forging Unit with 2 Gas points on wall

6.

Concrete Counter Cabinets with Sink

15. Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers (with 3 gas

7.

Open Shelves with Drawers

8.

High Cabinet with Drawers

9.

Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers

REV-00 / FEB 06

points equally distributed) 16. Magnetic Whiteboard and Projection Screen 17. Emergency Stop Station Point 18. Projector and Screen

4 Administrative / Staff 4.1

Principal’s Office

4.8

Counselling Room

4.2

4.9

Vice-Principal’s Office

Prefect’s Room

4.3

4.10

General Office

Career Guidance Room

4.4

4.11

Office Store

Staff Room

4.5

4.12

Printing Room

Staff Lounge

4.6

4.13

H.O.D’s Store

Staff Resource Room

4.7

4.14

Meeting Room

Sick Bay

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.1-1 NO. OF UNITS

PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 OFFICE

1 no.

AREA 20 m2

CAPACITY 1 Principal 5 Visitors

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

FUNCTION

Principal’s work area

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

FITMENT/ FURNITURE

Preferably on 1st storey near main entrance

Curtain

Interconnected with Vice-Principal’s Office and General Office

Pin-up Board

Near Staff Room, Staff Lounge and H.O.Ds’ Office

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Built-in safe of Chubb Castle Size 2 or Australian Safe Company AS 2002 or Fische Bauche Size 2 or equivalent to be embedded on concrete pedestal

Whiteboard

Projection Screen

Principal’s Tables Cabinets

Others

Ensure no blind zone in front of the safe

Blinds 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic

1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Nil

1 no. 1.9m x 1.0m

2 nos. 0.7m x 0.5m

1 no. High Cabinet with Built-in safe

2 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-seater Sofa set

2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-seater Sofa set 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.5m Side Table

Safe to be 850mm above FFL

1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table

SERVICES --

OTHERS

School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Others

1 no. Safe (See Critical Information)

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock if access is from outside with Door Closer & Viewing Panel

SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no.

2 nos. Twin Gang

1 no. Telephone Point

1 no. Battery Operated Clock

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.1-2

PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE LEGEND 1. Principal’s Work area 2. Lounge Area (Sofa Set & Side Tables) 3. High Cabinet with Built-in Safe 4. 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet 5. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 6. Pin-up Board 7. Magnetic Whiteboard

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.2-1

NO. OF UNITS 1 per VP

AREA

12 m2 per VP

CAPACITY

VICE-PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 12M2 OFFICE FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non Acoustic Ceiling

1 Staff , 2 Visitors

FUNCTION

Vice-Principal’s work area

FITMENT/FURNITURE

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Curtain

Accessible through General Office

Pin-up Board

On 1st storey

Interconnected with General Office Near Principal’s Office and HODs’ Office

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

Whiteboard

Vice-Principal’s Table

Cabinets Others

Blinds 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic

1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m

1 no. 1.6m x 1.0m 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet

1 no. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet

Nil

SERVICES --

OTHERS

School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4– 1.2)

Others

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock if access is

Security System

Burglar Alarm

from outside with Door Closer & Viewing Panel

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no.

2 nos. Twin Gang

1 no. Telephone Point

1 no. Battery Operated Clock

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / 4.2-2 STAFF

VICE-PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF VICE-PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE

LEGEND 1. Vice-Principal’s Work area 2. Magnetic Whiteboard 3. Pin-up Board 4. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 5. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.3-1

GENERAL OFFICE RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR 78 M2 TYPE FACILITY

NO. OF UNITS 1 no.

FINISHES

AREA

Floor

1. General Office

Ceiling

Min. 54 m2 comprising:

Wall

Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

2. Administration Manager’s Workstation (8 m2) 3. Operation Manager’s Workstation (8 m2) 4. 1 AM/1 OM/2 CSO (Additional 8 m2) 5. Visitors’ Lounge

CAPACITY

3 Staff + 3 Managers (Administration Manager, AM/Operation Manager, OM) or

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Pin-up Board

1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m

Cabinets

5 nos. 1.3m x 0.8m 2 nos. 2-Doors Cupboards

Typist’s Table

3 Staff + 2 Managers + 2 Clerical Support Officers (CSO)

FUNCTION

Others

1 no. Workstation (for 1 AM) or 2 nos. Workstation (for 2 CSOs) (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

SAFETY/SECURITY

Interconnected with Principal’s Office & Printing Room

Master key

Away from Canteen

Others

Security System

FITMENT/FURNITURE

OTHERS

Key deposit box must be cylindrical & placed within concrete wall beside entrance to General Office and flushed with wall

Burglar Alarm

Roller Shutter to be provided at the entrance of the

General Office

Entrance Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door Closer

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Entrance door to be tempered glass

6 nos. (including 1 no. for printer) 1 no. each (AM/OM/CSO)

7 nos. Twin Gang (General Office, including 1 no. for

Scanner & 1 no. for Printer)

3 nos. Single Gang (General Office)

Adjacent FAVE spaces shall be incorporated to provide for future expansion School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provision for individual staff

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

1 no. of Fire Extinguisher

--

--

1 no. Key Deposit Box

1 no. Keyboard Vol. 4 – 1.4)

On 1st storey with clear unobstructed view of main entrance

SERVICES

Reception Counter

2 nos. Workstation (1 no. each for AM and OM) (See

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Recommended to be in view of Parade Square

3 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

For school administration

Easily accessible to public

Blinds 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic

2 nos. Twin Gang (AM)

1 nos. Twin Gang and 1 nos. Single Gang (OM)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fan

Nil

Communications

PA System (General Office) (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

2 nos. Telephone Points each (General Office/AM) 1 no. Telephone Point (OM)

1 no. Battery Operated Clock

Control Panel for Bell Timer LED Mimic Panel

Lightning Warning System Console Photocopier

DB Closet as required REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / 4.3-2 STAFF

GENERAL OFFICE

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 78 M2 OFFICE LEGEND 1. AM/OM/CSO Area 2. Typists’ Tables Area 3. Visitors’ Lounge 4. Reception Counter 5. High Cabinet 6. Photocopier 7. Printer/Scanner Area 8. 2-Doors Cupboards 9. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet 10. Magnetic Whiteboard 11. Pin-up Board 12. Fire Alarm Panel 13. PA System 14. Keyboard 15. Key Deposit Box

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / 4.4-1 STAFF

OFFICE STORE

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 STORE NO. OF UNITS Min. 1

FINISHES

AREA

Floor

Min. 20 m2

Wall

CAPACITY

Ceiling

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

--

FUNCTION

Storage of office stationery, equipment and printing

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Interconnected with General Office Near Principal’s & Vice-Principal’s Offices and Staff Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Nil Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Pin-up Board Cabinets

Nil

6 nos. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet

Open Shelves

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

OTHERS

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Others

Burglar Alarm System Control Panel (direct feed

Security System

Door to be min. 1.2m wide

Burglar Alarm

from Distribution Board)

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. Single Gang 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / 4.5-1 STAFF

PRINTING ROOM

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20M2 ROOM NO. OF UNITS Min. 1

FINISHES

AREA

Floor

Min. 20 m2

Wall

CAPACITY

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

--

FUNCTION

Storage of office stationery, equipment and printing

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Pin-up Board

Interconnected with General Office

Projection Screen

Near Principal’s & Vice-Principal’s Offices and Staff Room

Cabinets Others

Blinds Nil Nil

Nil

Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Nil

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

OTHERS

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Others

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Windows to face external Door to be min. 1.2m wide

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

1 no.

4 nos. Twin Gang

Lighting (Lux)

300

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3)

Others

Shredder (0.6m x 0.6m), Photocopy Machine,

Water Supply

Nil

Laminating Machine, Transparency Maker, Photostat Maker, Scanner, Duplicator, Cyclostyling Machine

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

H.O.Ds’ OFFICE

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

4.6-1

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 113 M2 OFFICE NO. OF UNITS 1 no.

AREA 113 m2 comprising: 1. Staff workstation area (8 m2 each)

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

2. Central area for printer, scanner and copier

CAPACITY 11 Staff

22 Visitors (2 visitors per workstation)

FUNCTION

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Blinds 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Whiteboard

Heads of Departments’ office

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Others

11 nos. of Workstations (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Preferably on 1st floor

Interconnected with General Office, Principal’s & Vice-Principal’s Offices

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Staff workstation to be system furniture Whiteboard and Pin-up Boards can be either wall-mounted or free-standing

Projection Screen

Nil

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Security System Others

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Burglar Alarm

Roller Shutters to be provided at the entrance

Entrance Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door Closer

SERVICES

See Vol. 4 – 1.4 on requirements for workstation

OTHERS

Main entrance door to H.O.Ds’ Office to be tempered glass School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

15 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for printer)

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

12 nos. (including 1 no. for printer)

2 nos. Telephone Points

1 no. Battery Operated Clock

DB Closet as required

VOL.

3

H.O.Ds’ OFFICE

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

4.6-2

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 113 M2 H.O.Ds’ OFFICE

LEGEND

REV-00 / FEB 06

1.

H.O.Ds’ Workstations

2.

Printer/Scanner Area

3.

Magnetic Whiteboard

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

MEETING ROOM

4.7-1

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 MEETING ROOM NO. OF UNITS 1 no.

AREA

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

65 m2 Area is School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

26 Staff including: 16 seated at table and 10 backbenchers

FUNCTION

Weekly staff meeting, various committee meetings, external appraisal visits, etc Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION/ PROXIMITY

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Pin-up Board

Projection Screen Cabinets Others

Near General Office, Principal’s & VicePrincipal’s Offices

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

Blinds 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

2 nos. 3.6m x 1.2m

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and

Retractable

Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

1 no. 4.8m x 1.8m Conference Table

18 nos. 0.5m x 0.4m Swivel Chairs

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Others

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

Security System

Burglar Alarm

OTHERS --

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

1 no.

Power Points

3 nos. Twin Gang

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

1 no. Single Gang for LCD Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

1 no. Telephone Point

1 no. LCD

1 no. Tape Recorder 1 no. OHP

DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

4.7-2

MEETING ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 MEETING ROOM

LEGEND 1. Conference Table and Swivel Chairs Area 2. LCD Projector 3. Low Cabinet 4. Pin-up Board 5. Magnetic Whiteboard & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

COUNSELLING ROOM

4.8-1

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 24 M2 COUNSELLING ROOM NO. OF UNITS 1 no.

FINISHES

AREA

Floor

24 m2

Wall

Area is School White Area (SWA)

Ceiling

Vinyl Flooring Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of slab

CAPACITY 5 persons

FUNCTION

Private area to counsel students and parents Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Preferably on 2nd storey Access from corridor Easily accessible to staff and students There should be sufficient privacy to encourage students requiring counselling to use it

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Whiteboard

Blinds Nil

Pin-up Board

1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m

Others

1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-Seater Sofa Set

Projection Screen Cabinets

Counselling Room should be on the same level as Career Guidance Room, preferably next to each other

Nil

Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

1 no. 0.5m x 0.6m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-Seater Sofa Set 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.7m Side Table

1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table

10 nos. Pouffes (0.4m in Diameter)

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

OTHERS

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

Door with Vision Panel

To ensure privacy, room should have full height walls and not half-partitions

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

1 no.

Power Points

1 no. Twin Gang

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

Air-Conditioning

3 nos. Single Gang

1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Others

1 no. Tape Recorder

Water Supply

Nil

2 nos. Other Electrical Equipment DB Closet as required

REV-01 / MAY 06

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

4.8-2

COUNSELLING ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 COUNSELLING ROOM

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Lounge Area (3+1+1 sofa set, side table and coffee table) 3. Pouffes Area 4. Low Cabinet 5. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet 6. Pin-up Board

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.9-1

NO. OF UNITS

PREFECTS’ ROOM RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 25 M2 PREFECTS’ ROOM

1 no.

AREA 25 m2

Area is School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY 12 Students

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogenous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

FUNCTION

Prefects’ Meeting and Discussions Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Near CCA Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Whiteboard

Pin-up Board

Projection Screen Table

Cabinets

Nil 1 no. 1.5m x 0.9m on castors Nil

Nil

4 nos. 1.4m x 0.8m

1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet

SERVICES --

OTHERS --

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Power Points Fans

2 nos. Ceiling Mounted

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Others

DB Closet as required

Water Supply

REV-01 / MAY 06

2 nos. Single Gang

Nil

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.9-2

PREFECTS’ ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 25 M2 PREFECTS’ ROOM LEGEND 1. Tables’ Area 2. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 3. Whiteboard on Castors

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.10-1 NO. OF UNITS

CAREER GUIDANCE ROOM RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 40 M2 CAREER GUIDANCE ROOM

1 no.

AREA 40 m2

Area is School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY 12 Persons

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of slab

FUNCTION

Career consultation, advice and exhibition for individual or group

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Can be converted into other facilities

Curtain

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Pin-up Board

Career Guidance Room must be on the same storey as Counselling Room Near Counselling Room, H.O.Ds’ Office and Library

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

Whiteboard

Projection Screen

Blinds 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Magnetic

1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Pin-Up Board Nil

Teacher’s Table

2 nos. 1.3m x 0.8m

Cabinets

1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet

Computer Table (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Others

SERVICES

2 nos. 1.2m x 0.8m

1 no. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet Low Cabinet

1 no. 3.6m min. length x 0.6m Display Stand 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.7m Side Table

--

2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-Seater Sofa 1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-Seater Sofa

OTHERS --

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

Nil

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Power Points Fans

2 nos. Ceiling Mounted

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Others

DB closet as required

Water Supply

REV-01 / MAY 06

3 nos. Single Gang

Nil

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.10-2

CAREER GUIDANCE ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 40 M2 CAREER GUIDANCE ROOM

LEGEND

REV-00 / FEB 06

1. Teacher’s Table

6. 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet

2. Low Cabinet

7. Pin-up Board

3. Computer Table

8. Lounge Area (3+1 Sofa Set, Coffee Table, Side Table)

4. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet

9. Display Stand

5. Magnetic Whiteboard

10. 2.1m High Screen

VOL.

3

STAFF ROOM

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.11-1

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 390 M2 STAFF ROOM NO. OF UNITS (PER SCHOOL) Min. 1

AREA

390 m2 comprising:

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

1. Staff workstation area (4 m2 each) 2. Common area for printers, scanners, copiers

CAPACITY

FITMENT/FURNITURE

73 Staff

Curtain

FUNCTION

Pin-up Board

1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m

Others

73 nos. Workstation (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Teaching staff office

LOCATION /PROXIMITY

Not higher than 2nd storey and preferably to be on one single storey Preferably Interconnected with Staff Lounge and Staff Resource Room Near General Office, H.O.Ds’ Office and Office Store

Whiteboard

Projection Screen

Blinds 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Nil

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Security System Others

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Burglar Alarm

Entrance Door to be with Jimmy-Proof Lock

with Door Closer

Roller Shutters to be provided at the Entrance

Staff workstation to be system furniture Whiteboard and Pin-up Boards to be wallmounted

SERVICES

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT

The power points and data points to be recessed into system furniture and located slightly above the worktable

Computer Ports

See Vol. 4 – 1.4 on requirements for workstation

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

OTHERS

For schools with 36 + 6 classrooms, 78 nos. of workstations to be provided, with space for future 16 nos. additional workstations Consultants are to consult the MOE Officer-inCharge on the possible increase in the number of teachers due to the conduct of special programmes, e.g. GEP, at selected schools School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff. Main entrance door to Staff Room be tempered glass

REV-00 / FEB 06

Power Points Fans

75 nos. (including 1 no. for printer)

76 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for printer) Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

2 nos. Telephone Points

1 no. Battery Operated Clock

DB Closet as required

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.11-2

STAFF ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 390 M2 STAFF ROOM

LEGEND 1. Workstations Area 2. Common Printer Area 3. Magnetic Whiteboard 4. Pin-up Board

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

STAFF LOUNGE

4.12-1

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 40 M2 STAFF LOUNGE NO. OF UNITS Min. 1

AREA

Min. 40 m2

CAPACITY

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

20 seats

FUNCTION

Relaxation area for staff

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Not higher than 2nd storey

Preferable interconnected with Staff Room Near General Office and H.O.Ds’ Office

FITMENT/FURNITURE

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Blinds Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Pin-up Board Cabinets Others

Solid surfacing material countertop to cabinet with sink

SERVICES --

OTHERS --

Nil

Low Cabinet with Sink (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) 20 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m Lounge Sofa

2 nos. 0.8m x 0.6m Coffee Table 1 no. 1.0m x 0.6m Journal Rack

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door

Closer

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Power Points Fans

Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

2 nos. Single Gang Nil

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

1 no. Hot and Cold Water Dispenser 1 no. Refrigerator

DB Closet as required

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

4.12-2

STAFF LOUNGE

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 40 M2 STAFF LOUNGE

LEGEND 1. Lounge Sofa Area 2. Journal Rack 3. Low Cabinet with Sink 4. Refrigerator

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

STAFF RESOURCE ROOM

4.13-1

Critical Information

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 STAFF RESOURCE ROOM NO. OF UNITS Min. 1

AREA

Min. 65 m2

CAPACITY

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

16 Staff

FUNCTION

Repository for shared teaching materials Preparation of teaching materials Secure place to prepare examination/ assessment questions

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Preferably interconnected with Staff Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Polypropylene and vitreous enamel sink Sink to have swan neck laboratory tap

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Pin-up Board

Projection Screen Teacher’s Table

Blinds 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and

Retractable

5 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m

Computer Table

4 nos. 0.8m x 0.7m

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Low Cabinet with Sink

Cabinets

Worktop with High Cabinet 8 nos. 0.9m x 0.5m Double-Sided Bookshelves 2 nos. 0.9m x 0.5m 2-doors Filing Cabinet

SERVICES --

OTHERS --

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Others

1 no. Fire Extinguisher

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

10 nos. Twin Gang

Lighting (Lux)

500

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

1 no. Single Gang for LCD Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3)

Water Supply

1 no. Hot/Cold

Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

5 nos.

Power Points

1 no. Telephone Point

5 nos. Other Electrical Equipment DB Closet as required

VOL.

3

ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF

4.13-2

STAFF RESOURCE ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 STAFF RESOURCE ROOM

LEGEND

REV-00 / FEB 06

1.

Teachers’ Tables Area

2.

Book Shelves Area

3.

Computer Tables Area

4.

2-door Filing Cabinet

5.

Worktop with High Cabinet

6.

Low Cabinet with Sink

7.

LCD Projector

8.

Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

SICKBAY

4.14-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 SICKBAY

Min. 1

AREA Min. 20

FINISHES m2

CAPACITY 2 Students

Floor

Homogeneous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles

Wall

Emulsion Paint

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

FUNCTION

Simple first aid treatment Resting

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Blinds

Preferably on 1st storey

Whiteboard

Nil

Accessible from General Office for close supervision

Pin-up Board

Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Preferably interconnected with General Office

Teacher’s Tables

2 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m

Cabinets

1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet

LOCATION /PROXIMITY

FITMENT /FURNITURE

Cater for future air-conditioning

Others

2 nos. 1.8m x 0.9m Folding Single Bed Towel Rail and Mirror

Backsplash to be provided for Sink

1 no. Soap Dispenser

SERVICES

Power point to be located at table area

OTHERS --

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Nil

Others

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock and Viewing Panel

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT

REV-00 / FEB 06

Computer Ports

Nil

Power Points

2 nos. Single Gang

Lighting (Lux)

300 (Bedhead lights to be provided)

Fans

2 nos. Ceiling Mounted

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

1 no.

Others

1 no. Sink

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

4.14-2

SICKBAY

SAMPLE LAYOUT 1

SAMPLE LAYOUT 2

SAMPLE LAYOUT 3

ABOVE : SAMPLE LAYOUTS OF 20 M2 SICK BAY

LEGEND 1. Table 2. Folding Single Bed 3. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 4. Sink 5. Dry Wall Partition 6. 2.1m High Curtains

REV-00 / FEB 06

5 Ancillary 5.1

5.9

Media Resource Library

Games Equipment Room

5.2

5.10

Multi-Purpose Hall

Co-Curricular Activities (CCA) Room

5.3

5.11

Multi-Purpose Hall (Control Room,

NCC/NPCC Room

5.4

5.12

Changing Room, Store)

Furniture Store

Rifle Range (Indoor)

5.5

5.13

Canteen

Rifle Range (Outdoor)

5.6

5.14

Bookshop

Armoury

5.7

5.15

Non-Teaching Staff (NTS) Room

Dental Clinic

5.8

Health & Fitness Room

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY

5.1-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 450 M2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY

1 no.

AREA

Min. 450 m2 comprising: 1.

Reading / Reference Area (RRA)

2.

Instructional Area (IA) (90 m2)

3. 4.

Librarian’s Workroom (LW) (30 m2) Circulation Counter (CC)

CAPACITY 120 users seated and standing 2 teacher librarians 10 student librarians 21000 volumes of books

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Vinyl Flooring Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Blinds (All Areas) 1 no. 1.8m x 1.2m Magnetic Whiteboard (IA)

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m (1 no. each at LW and IA)

Projection Screen

1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable (IA)

FUNCTION

Teacher’s Table

Can explore provision for multiple usage

Computer Table

1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m (IA) 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m (LW) 6 nos. 1.4m x 0.7m Double Seat (IA)

Reading and Referencing; Group learning

7 nos. 0.9m x 0.7m Single Seat (5 nos. at RRA and 2 nos. at LW)

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Away from noisy area

Access preferably on 1st or 2nd storey Do not locate in isolated part of school

Cabinets (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Interconnected with IA and LW Away from Music Room and Hall/Canteen Can consider other locations if for alternative usage

FITMENT/FURNITURE

All fitment shelves to be removable and adjustable

REV-00 / FEB 06

Others

1 no. 3.0m x 0.6m Non-Print Media Cabinet (CC) 1 no. 4.8m x 0.7m Circulation Counter (CC) 13 nos. 2.7m x 0.6m Double-Sided Bookshelves (RRA) 10 nos. 1.5m x 0.6m Single-Sided Bookshelves (RRA) 1 no. 0.7m x 0.6m TV/VCR Cabinet (IA) 1 no. 3.8m x 0.7m Open Shelf (LW) 1 no. 0.5m x 0.8m Filing Cabinet (LW) 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m Steel Cabinet (LW) 2 nos. 1.0m x 0.5m Book Trolley (CC) 1 no. 0.8m x 0.6m Book Chute (CC) 3 nos. 1.6m x 1.6m Media Island (1 no. at RRA and 2 nos. at IA) 20 nos. 1.6m x 0.9m Reading Tables (RRA) 4 nos. 0.6m x 0.4m x 0.9m Atlas Stand (RRA) 2 nos. 2.6m x 0.7m AV Equipment Worktop (RRA) 5 pcs Sofa Set (RRA) 1 no. 1.0m x 0.3m Newspaper Rack (RRA) 4 nos. 1.0m x 0.4m Periodicals Shelf (single or double sided) (RRA) 1 no. Overhead Projector Trolley (IA) 1 no. 1.2m x 0.7m Copy Machine (LW) 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m Worktables (LW)

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

5.1-2

SERVICES

TV point in Reading Reference Area to be located near AV Equipment Worktop

OTHERS

Connecting door to Librarian’s Workroom to be near the counter Min. 2 nos. direct access doorways from corridor to be provided Direct access and visual connection to be

MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 450 M2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Others

1 no. of Fire Extinguisher Roller Shutters to be provided at the entrance of MRL

provided from Media Resource Library (MRL) to Librarians’ Workroom and Instructional Area where necessary Book drop/chute to allow return of books from outside the MRL to be provided Reading tables and Periodicals display shelves to

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

2 nos. (LW)

openings

Book shelves to be arranged perpendicularly to

Power Points

Circulation Counter for easy supervision tempered and sandblasted

provided to Instructional Area and Librarian’s Workroom

All windows to have locks

6 nos. Single Gang, 8 nos. Twin Gang, 3 nos. Twin Gang at Counter Area (RRA) 16 nos. Twin Gang, 1 no. Single Gang for LCD (IA)

Glass doors and screens (if provided) to be Half height glass partition for visual access to be

8 nos. + 3 nos. at Counter Area (RRA) 13 nos. (IA)

be arranged perpendicularly to window

4 nos. Twin Gang (LW) Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

Nil

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Communications

PA System at Counter (RRA) 1 no. Telephone Point at Counter (RRA) 1 no. Telephone Point (LW)

Water Supply Others

Nil 2 nos. TV (1 no. each at RRA and IA) 1 no. LCD (LW) DB Closet as required

REV-01 / MAY 06

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

5.1-3

MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY

SAMPLE LAYOUT FOR A 450 M2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY LEGEND 1.

Open Shelves

13. Single-sided Bookshelves

2.

Single Seat Computer Table Area

14. Newspaper Rack

3.

Worktable Area

15. AV Equipment Worktop

4.

Teacher’s Table

16. 5 piece Sofa set

5.

Filing Cabinet, Steel Cabinet & Copy Machine

17. Media Island

6.

Pin-up Board

18. Atlas Stand & Periodical Shelves

7.

Circulation Counter

19. Double-sided Bookshelves

8.

Book Chute

20. Double seat Computer Table Area

9.

Non-print Media Cabinet

21. LCD Projector

10. Book Trolley

22. TV/VCR Cabinet

11. Double Carrel Drawing

23. Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Projection Screen

12. Reading Table Area

24. OHP Trolley

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

5.1-4

EXAMPLE OF LIBRARY BOOK SHELVES

EXAMPLE OF LIBRARY / REFERENCE AREAS

EXAMPLE OF READING / REFERENCE AREA

REV-00 / FEB 06

MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

NO. OF UNITS 1no.

AREA

MULTI-PURPOSE HALL

5.2-1

RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 1177 M2 MULTI-PURPOSE HALL (1070 M2 TO INCLUDE STAGE, CONTROL ROOM AND CHANGING ROOM)

FINISHES – SEATING AREA AND STAGE m2

Min. 990 ( for Seating Area including 3 badminton courts) Min. 30 m2 (for Stage Area) A full performance Stage must be provided in the school. If this is not provided in the Hall, a minimum basic stage (30 m2) shall be provided.

CAPACITY

To provide for maximum student enrolment and teaching staff

FUNCTION

For school assembly, talks, concert, school examination and sports like badminton, gymnastics, aerobics, etc.

Floor Wall

T&G Timber Strips Emulsion Paint (Seating Area) / Acoustic wall

Ceiling

Suspended Acoustic Ceiling

treatment (Rear of Hall)

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Fire Retardant Motorized Stage Curtain (Stage) Nil

Projection Screen

1 no. 4.88m x 4.88m Wall Mounted Motorized

Pin-up Board Others

Nil

Manually Operated Flybar on Stage

2 nos. Wall Climbing Rack

Can explore provision for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY On ground or 2nd storey

Directly accessible from the main entrance of the school Should be adjacent to the Playfield and Outdoor Courts

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

2 nos. minimum Hosereels 5 nos. Fire Extinguisher

Preferably interconnected with Furniture Store

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Projection screen should be positioned so that it is highly visible to all students in the Seating Area

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

SERVICES

Lighting (Lux)

Microphone point position should be at same line as curtain line (if full performance stage is provided)

Fans

OTHERS

Air-Conditioning Communications

Steps to be provided at front of the stage

All openings should be adjustable to cater for varying ventilation and lighting requirements

Area)

300/500 (Seating Area) 300 (Stage)

Wall Mounted at 3-4.5m C/C

4 nos. Ceiling Mounted (Stage) Nil

Sound Reinforcement System (Seating Area)

Intercom System (connecting Stage and Control Room)

Door into Hall to be min. 1.5m wide The number and location of access doors should ensure efficient circulation and discharge of students

1 no. for every Column (Seating Area)

4 nos. (Stage)

4 nos. 13A Twin Gang Power Points (Seating

School crest to be provided above the stage

Row switching control for high bay lighting

1 no. (Stage)

Water Supply Others

2 nos. Telephone Points (Stage)

Nil

Exit Light at every Exit

Isolator for Stage Lighting Stage Lighting System

These openings should be operable from a service platform or corridor

2 nos. Battery Operated Clock

Badminton Area to have a min. clear height of 7.6m

3 nos. Microphone Points (Front part of Stage)

Control Room is to be linked at upper rear of the Hall

DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06

4 nos. Microphone Points (Seating Area)

3 nos. Microphone Points (Behind Stage Area)

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

5.2-2

Plan

MULTI-PURPOSE HALL

Section A-A

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF FULL PERFORMANCE STAGE (IF PROVIDED WITHIN HALL)

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF BADMINTON COURTS

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

5.2-3

MULTI-PURPOSE HALL

Section

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS FOR EXAMINATIONS

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS FOR ASSEMBLY

WALL CLIMBING RACK FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS

REV-00 / FEB 06

MULTI-PURPOSE HALL

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

5.3-1

NO. OF UNITS

1. CONTROL ROOM 2. STAGE 3. CHANGING ROOM & STORE

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS

1. Control Room (1 no.) 2. Stage (Min. 1 no. basic) 3. Changing Room + Store (Min. 1)

AREA

1. Control Room (8 m2 exclusive of Hall area)

FINISHES Floor Wall

Glazing (Control Room) Ceiling

3. Changing Room + Store (Min. 1 person)

Non-Acoustic Ceiling (Control Room) Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab (Changing Room, Store)

CAPACITY 1. Control Room (3 persons maximum) 2. Stage (To provide appropriate capacity for either basic stage or full performance stage)

Emulsion Paint (Control Room, Store) Glazed Ceramic Tile to minimum 2.2m Height (Changing Room)

2. Stage (Min. 30 m2 included within Hall area) 3. Changing Room + Store (As required within Hall area)

Concrete Topping (Control Room, Store) Non-Slip Tiles (Changing Room)

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

To provide (Dressing Area)

Whiteboard

Nil

Control Room: To control the sound and lighting systems

Pin-up Board

1 no. 1.4m x 1.2m (Control Room)

2.

Changing Room: To provide toilet & dressing facilities for performers & stage crew only;

Cabinet

2 nos. Dressing Tables with Wall Mirrors

Others

1 no. Stage Light Control Desk (Control Room)

3.

Store: For storage of badminton posts, vaulting horses (2 nos.), landing mats (20 nos.), crash mats and trampoline

FUNCTION 1.

LOCATION/PROXIMITY 1.

Control Room: At the rear of the hall and at least 3.6m above the Seating Area with unobstructed view of the Stage

2.

Changing Room: Easily accessible from the stage but ensure that noise in the Changing Room is not transmitted to the Stage and Seating Area

3.

Store: Directly accessible from Seating Area

FITMENT/FURNITURE

1 no. Sound Reinforcement System Housing Rack (Control Room)

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Burglar Alarm (Control Room)

Others

Nil

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Power Points

4 nos. Single Gang (Control Room) 4 nos. Twin Gang (Changing Room)

--

1 no. Single Gang (Store) Lighting (Lux)

300

SERVICES

Fans

1 no. Wall Mounted (Control Room, Store)

Nil

OTHERS

AirConditioning

To allow table/ cabinet for equipment in Control Room

Communicatio ns

Intercom System (1 no. connecting Stage and Control Room)

To provide door at back of stage for performers to enter and exit

Water Supply

No. of taps to comply with latest statutory requirement

Changing Room to include min. 1 wash basin and 1 changing area

Others

2 nos. Exhaust Fans (1 no. per Changing Room)

--

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. Ceiling Mounted (Changing Room) per room

MULTI-PURPOSE HALL

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

5.3-2

1. CONTROL ROOM 2. STAGE 3. CHANGING ROOM & STORE

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 8 M2 CONTROL ROOM LEGEND

1. Stage Layout Control Desk 2. Sound Reinforcement System Equipment Housing Rack

PHOTO OF HALL AND FULL PERFORMANCE STAGE

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

5.4-1

NO. OF UNITS Min. 1

AREA 72 m2 Area to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

FURNITURE STORE RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 72 M2 STORE FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

--

FUNCTION

Storing of furniture Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Near Multi-Purpose Hall

Preferably interconnected with Multi-Purpose Hall

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Nil Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Pin-up Board

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Security System

SERVICES

Nil

Others

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 –1.2)

Nil Nil

--

OTHERS

Door to be min. 1.5m wide

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. Single Gang 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

CANTEEN

5.5-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 700 M2 TYPE FACILITY

Min. 1

AREA

Total Canteen areas to be minimum 700 m2 Each Canteen area to comprise of: 1.

Refreshment / Seating Area

2.

Food Stalls

3.

Central Wash Area

4.

Stores and toilets

FINISHES Floor

Homogenous Non-Slip Tiles Concrete Topping (Store)

Wall

Glazed Ceramic Tile to minimum 2.2m height Emulsion Paint (Store)

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

CAPACITY

Total Canteen Areas to provide for maximum student enrolment over a maximum of 2 recess periods

FUNCTION

For preparation, serving, consumption of meals

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

FITMENT/FURNITURE Foodstalls

8 nos. including 2 nos. drinks stall

Tables

52 nos. 1.8m x 0.6m

Seating Benches

104 nos. 1.8m x 0.3m

Worktop

1 no. Food Preparation top per stall (total of 8 Foodstalls) 2.1m wide serving counter per stall (total of 8 Foodstalls)

First storey accessible by vehicle for goods delivery Away from General Office and Teaching areas

2 nos. Wash Troughs for Toothbrushing drills (with 5 tap points each)

FITMENT/FURNITURE

3 nos. Dishwashing Trough

Near Field and Playcourts

Soap dispenser at students’ wash trough to be provided

SERVICES --

OTHERS

Sufficient clearance outside of the Refreshment /seating area to be provided for queuing at food stalls Finishes for serving counter, stall worktop & fixtures to be stainless steel Kitchen exhaust duct material shall be aluminium Separate meters for gas, water and electrical for each stall

Wash Troughs

1 no. Wash Sink per stall Others

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Lockable taps connected to separate meters to be provided at wash areas

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

See Vol. 4 – 2.3

Others

2 nos. minimum of Hosereels (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) 4 nos. of Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

As required

Power Points

8 nos. (Refreshment Area) 24 nos. (3 nos. per stall) 1 no. (Store)

Bottle Store to be minimum 2.4m wide Central Wash area to provide separate washing trough for Muslim and non-Muslim stalls

16 nos. Lockers (2 nos. per Foodstall)

Lighting (Lux)

300

Fans

18 nos. Ceiling Mounted (Refreshment Area) 1 no. Wall Mounted per stall 1 no. Wall Mounted (Store)

Communications

PA System (Refreshment Area)(See Vol. 4 – 2.3) 1 Microphone Point 2 nos. Telephone Points (Public Phones)

Water Supply

10 nos. (Wash Trough) 2 nos. (Water Cooler) 8 nos. (Foodstall) 8 nos. (Central Wash Area)

Others

Minimum 8 nos. Gas points (Foodstall) Hood & Flue over cooking range at food stalls Isolator for Mechanical Ventilation Exhaust Fans 2 nos. Water Coolers Minimum 2 nos. Vending Machines

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

5.5-2

CANTEEN

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 700 M2 CANTEEN LEGEND

REV-00 / FEB 06

1.

Long Table & Bench

2.

Food Stalls

3.

Canteen Store/ Toilets/ Central Wash Area/ Bottle Store

4.

Wash Trough for Tooth-brushing

5.

Water Cooler

6.

Vending Machines

7.

Public Telephones

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

CANTEEN

5.5-3

RECOMMENDED CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF FOOD STALL / DRINK STALL

TYPICAL ELEVATION OF FOODSTALL FITMENT

RECOMMENDED CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF STAINLESS STEEL WASH TROUGH

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

BOOKSHOP

5.6-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 24 M2 ROOM

Min. 1

AREA

Min. 12 m

2

CAPACITY 1 – 2 Staff

FINISHES Floor

Homogeneous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles

Wall

Emulsion Paint

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

FUNCTION

For sale of books and stationery Can explore provisions for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY Must be on 1st Storey Near Canteen Away from Classrooms and Staff Area

FITMENT/FURNITURE

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Nil

Whiteboard

Nil

Pin-up Board

Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Cabinets

Counter cabinet should not be higher than 750mm high

SERVICES --

OTHERS

Grilles (if any) for the counter should be fixed on the external side of the roller shutter

Counter Cabinet High Open Shelves

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Nil

Others

Grilles to all Windows, Vents & Counters Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

Roller shutter to be minimum 1.8m wide

1 no. of Fire Extinguisher

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

REV-00 / FEB 06

Nil

Power Points

2 nos. Single Gang

Lighting (Lux)

500

Fans

1 no. Ceiling Mounted

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Communications

1 no. of Telephone Point

Water Supply

Nil

Others

DB Closet as required

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

5.6-2

BOOKSHOP

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 BOOKSHOP LEGEND 1. Counter Cabinet 2. High Open Shelves Area

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

NON-TEACHING STAFF ANCILLARY

(NTS) ROOM

5.7-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 10 M2 ROOM

1 no.

AREA 10 m2

CAPACITY 4 persons

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

FUNCTION

Resting room for executive & administrative staff, including all Division 1-4 officers Can explore provisions for multiple usages

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Near Principal’s Office and General Office

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Pin-up Board

Projection Screen Cabinets

DB Closet

Nil Nil Nil

Nil

High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m

--

OTHERS --

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil Nil

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. Twin Gang 1 no. of Ceiling Mounted Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

VOL.

3

NON-TEACHING STAFF ANCILLARY

5.7-2

(NTS) ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 10 M2 NON-TEACHING STAFF ROOM

LEGEND 1. Dining Table & Chairs Area 2. High Cabinet

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM

5.8-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 72 M2 HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM

1 no.

AREA 72

m2

Area is School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY 1 Staff

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Sports Flooring or Homogeneous Vinyl Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

20 Students

FUNCTION

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Activities include mainly weight training exercises, aerobic type exercises & TV/video presentations

Curtain

Can be converted into other facilities

Pin-up Board

2 nos. 2.4m x 1.2m

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m

LOCATION /PROXIMITY

Accessible after school hours without having to pass through other controlled areas Away from quiet areas

Whiteboard

Projection Screen Cabinets Others

Preferably on 1st storey

Nil 1 no. 4.0 m x 1.2m Magnetic Nil

Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

1 no. full length mirror with timber bar 3 nos. Exercise Ergometer Bicycle 2 nos. Exercise Bench

Near Field, Games Equipment Store and CCA Room

1 no. Multi-Station Exercise Machine 1 no. Weights’ Rack

1 no. Assisted Pull-Up

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Full length mirror to be mounted 1.5 m high x 6 mm thick on plywood backing with aluminium trimming & mounted 300 mm above floor level

SERVICES

Fans to be wall mounted at min. 2.5m above floor level

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

OTHERS

Min. clear distance between any equipment or between equipment and wall is 0.5m

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

1 no.

Lighting (Lux)

300

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning

4 nos. Wall Mounted at 2.5m min. from floor level Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

REV-01 / MAY 06

3 nos. Twin Gang

1 no. Telephone Point

DB Closet as required

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

5.8-2

HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 72 M2 HEALTH FITNESS ROOM

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board 3. Weights’ Rack 4. Exercise Bench Area 5. Multi-Station Exercise Machine 6. Assisted Pull-up 7. Exercise Ergometer Bicycle 8. Low Cabinet 9. Mirror

REV-01 / MAY 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE

5.9-1

NO. OF UNITS 1 no.

AREA 72 m2

Area is School White Area (SWA)

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 72 M2 STORE FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

CAPACITY --

FUNCTION

Storage of equipment for physical education/games Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION /PROXIMITY 1st storey

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Nil Nil

Pin-up Board

1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m

Cabinets

High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

Teacher’s Table

Near Playcourts, Field, Canteen and Changing Room

1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m High Open Shelves

3 nos. Aluminium Cages for balls

FITMENT/FURNITURE

High Cabinets to store : knee guards, ankle guards, stopwatches, measuring tapes, tape recorder, megaphone, shuttlecocks, table tennis balls, football boots, stockings and jerseys High Open Shelves to store : hoops, skipping ropes, starter blocks, shot puts, discuses, swimming floats, hockey sticks, abdominal guards and goalkeeper’s pads, softballs, gloves and masks, softball bases, pitcher and plates, body protectors, table tennis bats, sepak takraw balls, athletes batons

SERVICES

Power point to be located near Teacher’s Table

OTHERS

Door to be min. 1.2m wide

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Others

1 no. Fire Extinguisher

Security System

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Power Points

1 no. Single Gang

Lighting (Lux)

300

Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

Burglar Alarm

1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil

Nil

Nil

DB Closet as required

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

5.9-2

GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 72 M2 GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE

LEGEND 1. Teacher’s Table 2. High Cabinet 3. High Open Shelves 4. Aluminium Cages 5. Pin-up Board

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

CCA ROOM

5.10-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 24 M2 ROOM

4 nos.

FINISHES

AREA 24 m2 per unit Total of 96

m2

to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

Floor

Homogeneous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles

Wall

Emulsion Paint

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

--

FUNCTION

For uniformed groups, indoor games, CCA clubs & activities Can be converted into other facilities

LOCATION /PROXIMITY

Accessible after school hours without the necessity to pass other areas Away from quiet areas Preferably on 1st storey Preferably grouped together Near Field and Games Equipment Store

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Nil

Whiteboard

1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic

Pin-up Board

1 no. at back to cover minimum 30% of rear wall length

Projection Screen

Nil

Teacher’s Table

1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m

Student’s Table

16 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m

2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m in front

Cabinets

2 nos. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinets

FITMENT/FURNITURE

2 nos. of pin-up board to flank Whiteboard

SERVICES --

OTHERS

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Nil

Others

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Vision Panel if on 1st storey

--

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

1 no.

Power Points

1 no. Single Gang 2 nos. Twin Gang

Lighting (Lux)

300

Fans

2 nos. Ceiling Mounted

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

DB Closet as required

1 no. of Telephone Point

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

5.10-2

CCA ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 CCA ROOM

LEGEND

REV-00 / FEB 06

1.

Teacher’s Table

2.

Students’ Table Area

3.

Filing Cabinet

4.

Pin-up Board

5.

Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

NCC/NPCC ROOM

5.11-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 24 M2 ROOM

2 Nos.

AREA

24 m2 per unit

Total of 48 m2 to be School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

Maximum 16 persons (Staff and Students)

FUNCTION

CCA activities for NCC/NPCC Can be converted to other facilities

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Preferably at the lower storeys and not in the basement Near Rifle Range, Armoury and CCA Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES --

OTHERS

FINISHES Floor Wall

Ceiling

Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Nil 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Magnetic

Pin-up Board

1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m

Others

Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Security System Others

Ceiling height to be similar to that of Classroom

Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Nil

Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock and Vision

Panel

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Power Points

Lighting (Lux) Fans

Air-Conditioning

500

2 nos. of Ceiling Mounted Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no.

5 nos. Single Gang

1 no. Telephone Point

Nil

5 Ancillary 5.1

5.9

Media Resource Library

Games Equipment Room

5.2

5.10

Multi-Purpose Hall

Co-Curricular Activities (CCA) Room

5.3

5.11

Multi-Purpose Hall (Control Room,

NCC/NPCC Room

5.4

5.12

Changing Room, Store)

Furniture Store

Rifle Range (Indoor)

5.5

5.13

Canteen

Rifle Range (Outdoor)

5.6

5.14

Bookshop

Armoury

5.7

5.15

Non-Teaching Staff (NTS) Room

Dental Clinic

5.8

Health & Fitness Room

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

RIFLE RANGE (INDOOR)

5.12-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 208 M2 RIFLE RANGE

1 no.

AREA

208 m2

Area is School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

2 Supervisors (Staff) 40 Students

FINISHES Floor Wall

Concrete Topping Min. 12.5mm Vermiculite Textured or Spray

Ceiling

Vermiculite Textured Spray Finish

Finish

10 nos. targets

FUNCTION

Rifle shooting practice

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Preferably sheltered above Design & Technology Block Direct access from corridor

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Nil Nil

Others

Flag Holders

Pin-up Board

Nil

Interconnected with Armoury Near NCC/NPCC Room Can be converted into other facilities

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Table support for target carriage conveyor should be bolted to the ground

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Others

2 nos. Fire Extinguishers

Security System

Heavy Duty Magnetic Door Contacts

Solid Door/ Outward opening Panic Bolt Lockset (Emergency Exit)

Table support should be made of wood or metal Table top to be a min. thickness of 38mm thick, tongue and groove wood edging Motorised type target conveyor system to be used 1 no. Flag holder to be placed outside each entrance

SERVICES

Unless otherwise specified, services (including ventilation duct work) should not be located within the firer’s zone, range and armoury

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Lighting (Lux)

300 (Working Zone)

Power Points

1 no. (each conveyor belt) 4 nos. (General usage) 300 (Firer’s Zone) 500 (Range)

Any electrical cabling within the range to be contained within galvanized iron conduit and run behind the firer’s zone

Fans

Spacing between targets indicated are absolute min. values

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Targets zone to be evenly illuminated The range must be sufficiently bright for shooting (to match International Shooting Sport Federation (ISSF) requirements of min. 300 lux).

OTHERS

Openings are only allowed on back wall of the working zone Back wall to be min. 200mm Solid Concrete Wall with Concrete Vent Block Door location and operation to comply with FSSD and ISD requirements Rifle Range to be column free

REV-01 / MAY 06

Air-Conditioning

Others

1500 (Targets zone)

4 nos. Wall Mounted

Nil

1 no. Telephone Point

1 no. “Firing in Progress” Lighting Sign Box to each entrance/ exit to range

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

5.12-2

RIFLE RANGE (INDOOR)

SAMPLE OF A 208 M2 RIFLE RANGE (INDOOR)

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF RIFLE RANGE (INDOOR) LEGEND A

– Min. 1500 Lux at Target area

B1 & B2 – Min. 300 Lux P1 P2 P3

– Approved Masterboard Baffle Board to protect light – Approved Masterboard Baffle Board to prevent shooting into ceiling and

to protect lighting

– Approved Treated Hardwood Timber Board. Board (600 x 600 x 40mm thick) to be wall mounted behind the target and centered on the target

Note: All screws fixing to be sunken stainless steel with appropriate plug cover REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

RIFLE RANGE (OUTDOOR)

5.13-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 208 M2 RIFLE RANGE

1 no.

AREA

208 m2

Area is School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY

2 Supervisors (Staff) 40 Students

FINISHES Floor Wall

Concrete Topping Minimum 200mm Solid Concrete Wall, no finish

Ceiling

Masterboard

required. Concrete Vent Block to back wall only

10 nos. targets

FUNCTION

Rifle shooting Practice

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Can be converted into other facilities

Curtain

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Pin-up Board

Outdoor Open range on ground

Whiteboard

Nil Nil

Others

1 no. Flag Holder outside each entrance

Nil

Interconnected with Armoury Near NCC/NPCC Room

FITMENT/FURNITURE

SAFETY/SECURITY

Table support for target carriage conveyor should be bolted to the ground

Master Key

Table support should be made of concrete or masonry

Others

Security System

Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Heavy Duty Magnetic Door Contacts

Solid Door/ Outward opening Panic Bolt Lockset (Emergency Exit)

2 nos. Fire Extinguishers

Table top to be a min. thickness of 50mm concrete, sealed to protect the surface and finished with a rounded edge. Cranked type target conveyor system to be used

SERVICES

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT

Unless otherwise specified, services should not be located within the firer’s zone, range and armoury

Computer Ports

Nil

Any electrical cabling within the range to be contained within galvanized iron conduit and run behind the firer’s zone

Lighting (Lux) Fans

300 (Working Zone and Firer’s Zone)

Spacing between targets indicated are absolute minimum values

OTHERS

Openings only allowed on back wall Door location and operation to comply with FSSD and ISD requirements Rifle Range to be column free All roof structure to be above the ceiling

REV-00 / FEB 06

Power Points

Air-Conditioning

4 nos. Single Gang (General usage) 4 nos. of Wall Mounted Nil

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 to 2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

1 no. Telephone Point

1 no. “Firing in Progress” Lighting Sign Box to each entrance/ exit to range

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

ARMOURY

5.14-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 ARMOURY

1 no.

AREA 20 m2

Area is School White Area (SWA)

CAPACITY 1 Staff

160 Rifles for Practices (Open Rack)

FINISHES Floor Wall

Concrete Topping At least one block thick wall or concrete wall

Ceiling

Separate concrete ceiling by itself with

48 Rifles for Competition (Closed Rack)

FUNCTION

Storage of air rifles and pellets

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Preferably interconnected with Rifle Range Near NPCC/NCC Room

with emulsion paint finish emulsion paint

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Whiteboard

Nil Nil

Cabinets

Rifle Rack

Pin-up Board

FITMENT/FURNITURE

Nil

Open Rifle Rack

--

SERVICES

Strobe light cum siren box should be mounted outside the Armoury wall visible from main road or access road No overhead pipes/ other services should cross inside the Armoury room

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Masterkey Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Control Panel/Infra Red Sensor Detector/ Heavy

Others

1 no. Fire Extinguisher

OTHERS

Duty Magnetic Door Contact

6mm thick MS Door/ Chubbs Battleship 1K11 Close Shackled padlocks

Door to meet ISD requirements Door to swing inwards and fitted with padlock bar Hercules Chubb Ventilation grilles for openings in walls to be 25mm diameter thick

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT

Mild Steel bars spaced at 50mm centre to centre

Computer Ports

Nil

Ventilation opening should not exceed 200mm in height

Lighting (Lux)

300

For Armoury within Rifle Range, the door should be protected with separate timber framed door with acoustic panel

Power Points Fans

Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 no. Single Gang 1 no. Wall Mounted Nil

Nil

Nil

Security light to be provided at entrance

1 no. Dehumidifier

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

5.14-2

ARMOURY

Alternative 1

Alternative 2 SAMPLE LAYOUTS OF ARMOURY REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

ARMOURY

5.14-3

PHOTO OF ARMOURY ROOM

PHOTO OF ARMOURY ROOM

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

ANCILLARY

DENTAL CLINIC

5.15-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 42 M2 DENTAL CLINIC

As required

AREA 42 m2

CAPACITY

FINISHES Floor

2 Dental Therapists and 1 Dentist 2 Students

Wall

Ceiling

On

Suspended Ceiling (Dental Clinic) Emulsion Paint (Compressor Compartment)

LOCATION/PROXIMITY 1st

Glazed Wall Tiles to Full Height (Dental Clinic) 100mm thick Brickwall with Glazed Wall Tiles Internally (Compressor Compartment)

FUNCTION

For carrying out dental health services

Non-Slip Tiles (Dental Clinic) 100mm thk Concrete Plinth (Compressor Compartment)

storey

Away from Classrooms

FITMENT/FURNITURE

All drawers and cupboards of cabinets and writing tables shall have locksets and handles

FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain

Blinds (Dental Clinic)

Whiteboard

1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Magnetic

Pin-up Board

Nil

Projection Screen

Nil

Sinks to be stainless steel of size 0.4m (L) x 0.4m(W) x 0.2m(D)

Cabinets

Long Cabinet with Sinks

(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)

High Cabinet

Each sink to have individual water stop cock, swivel swan neck tap with lever elbow handle

Others

Long cabinets with sinks shall have solid surfacing worktop

Wash hand basin to have elbow tap, water stop cock, paper towel dispenser, soap dispenser Wall hung cabinet shall not have glass panel but to have 1 adjustable shelf within

SERVICES

Compressor Compartment: a. b. c.

d.

e.

shall have a clear height of 2200mm light switch shall be located outside the compartment for easy reach control switch to the compressor shall be located outside the compressor compartment but within the clinic Door to compartment to be 1.15m x 2.2m high solid timber double-leaf door, louvered at lower half and with lockset shall have 1 light fitting

Dental Unit: a. b. c. d.

The 7 nos. of utility pipes must be within 160mm diameter Provide filter at incoming water pipes to the 2 dental chairs Isolated electrical wall switch & water stop cock for each unit Control switch for dental unit shall be located on wall of surgery and shall have a red light indicator

Clinic to have 6 sets of light fittings with 2 fluorescent tubes each. 3 sets of these lights to be connected to one switch. DB with Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker to be provided in the Clinic.

OTHERS

Windows shall be sliding type with top hung. No fixed glass windows are allowed

REV-00 / FEB 06

Waiting Bench Worktable

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Others

Grilles to all Windows and Vents Security Grille Gate at entrance to be lockable from both inside and outside Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock, Vision Panel and Door Closer

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

5 nos. (including 3 nos. at Worktable and 1 no.

Power Points

6 nos. Twin Gang and 1 no. Single Gang (Dental

Lighting (Lux)

See critical information for details

Air-Conditioning

A/C to be provided with Isolator

Fans

Communications Water Supply Others

for each Dental chair)

Clinic)

1 no. Twin Gang (Compressor Compartment) Nil

2 nos. Telephone Points at Worktable PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) 3 nos. Cold (Dental Clinic)

Nil

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

DENTAL CLINIC

5.15-2

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 42 M2 DENTAL CLINIC

LEGEND 1. Dental Units 2. Long Cabinet with Sinks 3. Worktable 4. Space for Autosonic Cleanser 5. Space for Autoclave 6. Waiting Area 7. High Cabinet 8. Waiting Bench 9. LAN points, Telephone Points & Magnetic Whiteboard

REV-00 / FEB 06

WSC

Water Stop Cock

PTD

Paper Towel Dispenser

SD

Soap Dispenser

VOL.

3

ANCILLARY

5.15-3

DENTAL CLINIC

LEGEND 1.

Drain Connection 40mm (internal diameter) PVC pipe Drainage connection is 30mm above floor gradient at least 1:100

2.

Electrical Core 20mm diameter Electrical conduit with 3 core wire (3 x 1.5 sq mm) Electric Cord free & 1000mm above floor 230V, 50Hz, 13A Automatic Circuit Breaker C16 Control switch to be mounted on the wall of the surgery for turning on the main power supply

3.

Vacuum Connection 40mm (internal diameter) PVC pipe Vacuum connection is 30mm above floor The Suction pipe will lead to the suction machine (located in the compressor compartment)

4.

Suction Control Cable

20mm diameter Electrical conduit with 3 core wire (3 x 1.5 sq mm) Electric Control Cable free & 1000mm above floor

5.

Compressed Air Connection 15mm (outer diameter) copper pipe finish with BSPF 1/2 Connector Connection is 50mm above floor Pressure Between 5.2 - 7.5 Bar Free from oil & Contamination

6.

Water connection 15mm (outer diameter) copper pipe finish with BSPF 1/2 Connector Water Connection is 50mm above floor Pressure between 2.5 – 6 bar

5 Microns water filtration (if possible) 7.

Cable Connection 20 mm diameter with minimum 3m length LANs cable/terminated with faceplate at the end of 3m for future connection to chair side computer

REV-00 / FEB 06

TEMPLATE OF JUNCTION BOX FOR DENTAL UNIT

6 Services & Circulation 6.1

Toilets 6.2

LAN Room 6.3

Central Server Room 6.4

FAVE Area

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SERVICES &

CIRCULATION

TOILETS

6.1-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TOILET UNIT

As required

AREA As required

CAPACITY For every 40 students (male), to provide: 1 WC, 2 urinals (including 1 floor urinal) & 1 washbasin For every 40 students (female), to provide: 3 WCs & 2 washbasins If the actual ratio of male to female students in the school is not available, and if school has no preference, consultants can assume 50% male and 50% female. The provisions prescribed above represent the minimum only. For schools with layouts resulting in longer distances between blocks, consultants shall ensure a good distribution of toilets and provide the appropriate no. of WCs across the school. A total of 12 centralized shower cubicles (6 male and 6 female) and adequate changing space to be provided for students. A total of 2 shower cubicles (1 male, 1 female) to be provided for staff.

FUNCTION Showering, changing, toilets needs

LOCATION /PROXIMITY Toilets shall not be located at remote areas within the school, especially female toilets. Staff toilets to be near Staff and Administration as well as Teaching areas. Centralized showers for students should be near the school field, preferably at the Canteen area. Shower cubicles to be housed separately from WCs in toilet. Basic facilities for the disabled to be provided in all

FINISHES Floor

Non-Slip Tiles

Wall

Wall Tiles up to 2.2m high only

Ceiling

Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab

FITMENT/FURNITURE Soap Dispenser

1 no. for every two basins

Cleansing Tap

1 no. to be provided to at least one toilet cubicle

SAFETY/SECURITY Master key

Key Alike to all Toilets (where main doors are provided) (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Nil

Others

Nil

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT

Computer Ports Power Points

Nil

1 no. 15 A for Hand Dryer Isolator for mechanical ventilation 1 no. for Fan

Lighting (Lux)

300

Fans

1 no. Wall Mounted

Air-Conditioning

Nil

Communications

Nil

Water Supply

1 no. Bib Tap in each Squatting Pan Cubicle

Others

13A Power Points for Handicapped Toilets Ducted Mechanical Ventilation System for Toilet Stack Extractor Fan for individual toilet.

schools to include: one handicapped toilet for the

1 no. Electric Hand Dryer

Canteen, Administration areas and in at least one

Sensor Flush Valves to be provided in all Handicapped Toilet Cubicles

wheelchair-bound at the 1st storey each at the

Classroom block; one WC for the ambulant disabled at every level above the 1st storey at the Administrative area and in at least one Classroom block.

4 nos. water coolers to be distributed outside toilet

clusters at every level of the Classroom blocks, 2 nos. at the Canteen and 1 no. outside the Administrative /General Office area.

FITMENT /FURNITURE The sanitary appliances and fittings installed shall be of heavy-duty classification and quality. All fitment including pedestal WC and wash hand basin to be installed at heights that cater to average height students as well as smaller lower primary students. At least 1 squat pan WC with a bib tap shall be provided per toilet.

REV-00 / FEB 06

7 nos. Water Coolers

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SERVICES &

CIRCULATION

6.1-2

FITMENT /FURNITURE (CON’T) Urinal flush/sensor should be 950mm above finished floor level (F.F.L).Wash hand basin to be under-counter type, designed to minimize water spilling over from basin onto the counter.

TOILETS RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS OF TOILET FTTINGS

Vanity tops to be solid-surfacing finish or cultured marble. All wash basin taps shall have their water pressure and flow rate adjusted to minimize splashing. Self-closing delayed action taps to be provided, with large surface area for easy palm-pressing. Soap dispenser to have a transparent window to show the remaining level of liquid soap clearly. Proprietary system partitions to be provided for toilet cubicles. Drum type of tissue holder to be provided in each toilet cubicle.

PEDESTAL TYPE

Hand dryer to be appropriately mounted to prevent hot air from blowing on the face of shorter students.

SERVICES

Toilet stack served by ducted mechanical ventilation system should have central exhaust fans located at roof level. Individual toilets should be served by wall mounted exhaust fans. Ensure that extracted air from toilet is not directed at other habitable or main circulation areas. Foul air extraction to be at low level close to source. Low capacity flushing cisterns to be provided for all water closets.

SQUAT PAN TYPE

Individual control valves to be provided for urinal flush valves and low capacity flushing cisterns.

OTHERS Main entrance to the toilets shall be positioned to ensure sufficient visual privacy for the users inside the toilet. Toilet walls to be finished with smooth wall tiles or other impervious materials. Storage closet of minimum 1.0m x 0.6m to be provided for every cluster of toilets on all floors to store cleaning equipment and mop sink at low height. Handicapped toilet provisions to comply with the latest statutory Code on Barrier-Free Accessibility in Buildings.

URINAL

Squat pan WC cubicle to be kerbed to prevent water from flowing outside the cubicle and its floor to be graded towards gully trap within cubicle. Gully/Floor trap covers to be made of stainless steel.

WASH BASIN

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SERVICES &

CIRCULATION

LAN ROOM

6.2-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 7.5 M2 LAN ROOM

As required

AREA 7.5 m2

CAPACITY --

FUNCTION

FINISHES Floor

Thick Heavy Duty Anti-Static Vinyl

Wall

Calcium Silicate or Cement Board with Insulation on Inner Wall

Ceiling

Thermally Insulated Ceiling Membrane/ Board

--

LOCATION/PROXIMITY

Located at central block and must not be more than 90m from the furthest data outlet that it is serving

FITMENT/FURNITURE Racks (by others)

3 nos. (maximum) 0.8m x 0.8m x 2.2m high

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SAFETY/SECURITY

SERVICES

Master Key

FCU = 2

Security System

Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Burglar Alarm

Heatload = 3.9KW

Others

1 no. of Fire Extinguisher Air Tight Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

Cooling capacity of each FCU = 5.8KW Indoor temperature = 23 + 1oC R.H. = 60% + 5%

OTHERS

LAN Riser shall be located outside the LAN Room facing internal and on all floors Room height to be min. 2.7m

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Power Points

4 nos. Twin Gang (Computer) 2 nos. Single Gang (FCU)

Max. weight allowed: 1,500kg No windows allowed

1 no. Single Gang (PLC)

No viewing panel on door

Lighting (Lux)

500

No toilet, planter box or gas pipes shall be allowed to run above or inside the LAN Room

Fans

Nil

Air-Conditioning

24 hr Air-Conditioning to be provided

All openings to be sealed or airtight

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3)

To provide 100mm high concrete kerb at the door opening

Water Supply

Nil

Others

Heat and Smoke detectors

Grounding strip to be located at the same level and near to the power point For schools under upgrading, no riser access and no high tension electrical switchboard in the LAN Room

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

SERVICES &

CIRCULATION

6.2-2

LAN ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 7.5 M2 LAN ROOM LEGEND 1. Rack 2. Air-conditioning Fan Coil Units (2.2m from finished floor level) 3. Wall mounted Lights (1.8m from finished floor level) 4. Wall mounted DB (1.8m from finished floor level)

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SERVICES &

CIRCULATION

CENTRAL SERVER ROOM

6.3-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 12.6 M2 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM

1 No.

AREA

Min. 12.6 m2

CAPACITY --

FUNCTION

FINISHES Floor

Thick Heavy Duty Anti-Static Vinyl

Wall

Calcium Silicate or Cement Insulation on Inner Wall

Ceiling

Thermally Insulated Ceiling Membrane/ Board

Board

with

--

LOCATION /PROXIMITY

Located at 1st storey and preferably nearby to the General Office Must be nearby telephone equipment room and coaxial distribution room

FITMENT/FURNITURE --

SERVICES FCU = 4

FITMENT/FURNITURE Rack

5 nos. (maximum) 0.8m x 0.6m x 2.2m high

SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key

Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)

Security System

Burglar Alarm

Others

1 no. Fire Extinguisher Air Tight Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock

Heat Load = 9KW Cooling capacity of each FCU = 5.8KW Indoor temperature = 23 + 1oC R.H. = 60% + 5%

OTHERS

The size of the central server room is 4.2m x 3.0m (min. internal clearance)

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports

Nil

Power Points

5 nos. Twin Gang (Computer) 4 nos. Single Gang (FCU)

Room height to be min. 2.7m Max. weight allowed: 1,800kg No window allowed

1 no. Single Gang (PLC) Lighting (Lux)

500

No viewing panel allowed on door

Fans

Nil

No toilet, planter box or gas pipes shall be allowed to run above or inside the Server Room

Air-Conditioning

24 hr Air-Conditioning to be provided

Communications

PA System (See Vol. 4 –2.3)

Water Supply

Nil

Others

Heat and Smoke Detector

2 nos. of Telephone Points

All openings to be sealed or airtight To provide 100mm high concrete kerb at the door opening Grounding strip to be located at the same level and near to the power point For schools under upgrading, no riser access and no high tension electrical switchboard in the Server Room

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

SERVICES &

CIRCULATION

6.3-2

CENTRAL SERVER ROOM

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 12.6 M2 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM

LEGEND 1. Rack 2. Air-con Fan Coils (2.2m from finished floor level) 3. Wall mounted lights (1.8m from finished floor level) 4. Wall mounted DB (1.8m from finished floor level)

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

SERVICES &

CIRCULATION

FAVE AREA

6.4-1

AREA 10% of school’s circulation area (approximately 1110 m2 to be made available for FAVE space.

Before expansion

LOCATION

Corridor

Preferably sited near Administration areas like General Office, Staff Room or Canteen and other areas that support teaching and learning.

FUNCTION

Staircase

Study Corner “FAVE”

To provide space for school’s future expansion or modification of existing facilities.

Room Space

space

Circulation area can be used as Study Area before it is carved out to form the expanded space or the modified area of an existing facility.

OTHERS If Classrooms need to be reconverted into 38

After expansion

nos. 90 m2 modules, FAVE area can be used.

Corridor

Staircase

Study

Corner

“optimized”

REV-00 / FEB 06

Room Space

Room Space

7 External Works 7.1 Carpark, Driveway & Porch 7.2

Field, Fence & Footbath 7.3

Play Courts & Parade Square 7.4

Outdoor Fitness Area 7.5

Gates & Signwall 7.6

Guard Post

VOL

Critical Information

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

CARPARK, DRIVEWAY & PORCH

7.1-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL PRIMARY SCHOOL

As required. To provide 1 no. carpark lot for the handicapped from the total no. of required lots.

DIMENSIONS Porch shelter shall be min. 9.6m wide Min. 3.8m high for bus clearance Min. 4.5m high for fire engine clearance

USAGE For staff and visitors vehicle parking.

REV-00 / FEB 06

FINISHES Road Marking

100mm wide LTA Approved Road Marking Paint

Entrance Porch

Interlocking Pavers

Bus Lots

Interlocking Perforated Slab

Carpark

Interlocking Perforated Slab

Motorcycle Lots

Interlocking Pavers

Driveway

Interlocking Pavers

PARKING LOTS Bus Lots

4 nos. 13.2m x 3.6m

Carpark Lots

40 nos. 4.8m x 2.4m

Motorcycle Lots

6 nos. 2.4m x 1.0m

VOL.

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

7.1-2

CARPARK, DRIVEWAY & PORCH

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF CARPARK / DRIVEWAY

SAMPLE SECTION OF ENTRANCE PORCH

REV-00 / FEB 06

FIELD, FENCE &

VOL.

Critical Information

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

FOOTBATH

7.2-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL SECONDARY SCHOOL

1 no.

FIELD SIZE

Size of Field for Non-Competition: 90.0m x 60.0m or 0.54 ha Buffer: 5.0m at the end of field and 3.0m at the sides Overall size with buffers: 100.0m x 66.0m or 0.66 ha

FINISHES Fence

Chain-link fence with Galvanized Mild Steel Post & Painted

Sub-Soil Drain

To be Designed by Geo-Technical Engineer

Size of Field for Competition: 100.0m x 60.0m or 0.66 ha Buffer: 5.0m all round the field Overall size with buffers:

110.0m x 70.0m or 0.77 ha

FIELD ORIENTATION Ideally North-South

Maximum deviation: 45° to North-South axis

GATES Field Gates

2 nos. 2.4m wide gates between school and field

Side Gates

1 no. 1.2m wide side gate for community use of the field

Exit Gates

2 nos. 1.2m wide exit gates with a signboard “Emergency Exit Only” at both sides along the fence and to be located near to HDB void decks or open space. The location could be relocated upon principal’s request.

HIGH FENCE

A high fence is to be provided for the field with the following site conditions: Refer plan showing critical dimensions D1, D2, D3& D4 At the ends of the field where the goal posts are located Located next to the school, carpark/public carpark or pavement of public road If the buffer is on a slope of more than 15° or 1:3.73, the high fence is to be at the top of the slope A 1.0m wide gate is to be centrally located along this fence, however, a low fence is still required at the bottom of the slope when the distance between play courts and the field is less than 3.0m

DRAINAGE

Optimize drains to take run off from field, courts and building Open galvanized steel gratings drain cover should be provided in new schools to replace concrete slab cover to meet statutory requirement To facilitate the cleaning of the drains by power jets, gratings should be placed parallel instead of perpendicular to the edges of surface drains

OTHERS

Goal posts to be provided by school Footbath near field to be provided, consist of 2 tap points, flooring to be of anti-slip material and necessary grating for proper drainage. Field to be designed so that it can be fenced up for use as a community field Refer to MOE Officer in Charge for the

Guidelines on Assessment of Landscaping works for the field.

REV-00 / FEB 06

SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Others

2 Horn Speakers & 1 no. microphone point to be provided

FIELD, FENCE &

VOL.

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

7.2-2

FOOTBATH

SAMPLE LAYOUT OF SECONDARY SCHOOL FIELD *Size of School Field for Competitions

REV-00 / FEB 06

FIELD, FENCE &

VOL.

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

FOOTBATH

7.2-3

SECTION A-A

PLAN OF FOOTBATH

ELEVATION 1

PLAN OF G.S GRATING

SECTION B-B

SAMPLE OF FOOTBATH DETAIL

REV-00 / FEB 06

FIELD, FENCE &

VOL.

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

7.2-4

FOOTBATH

CRITICAL DIMENSION OF HIGH FENCE

Front Elevation

Side Elevation CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF GOAL POST REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE

7.3-1

NO. OF UNITS

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL SECONDARY SCHOOL

Play Courts – 2 nos. Parade Square – 1 no.

LOCATION

To be located away from roads, carparks and pedestrian linkways Consultants to propose appropriate means of protection for MOE approval when courts have to be located near such places due to site constraint

NETBALL COURT

FINISHES & PROVISIONS Basketball

Provide pavings/footpath of 3.0m minimum between two courts Provide drains with grating at least on one side of court Avoid planting tall trees near courts Court finish level at least 25mm above surrounding turf level All lines to be 50mm wide Regular cement screed flooring to all sports courts

PARADE SQUARE

Parade square 30.0m x 40.0m Planting space for trees and shrubs are recommended at the perimeter of the parade square A rostrum and 2 flag posts shall be provided at the parade square Drains surrounding the parade square and any internal drain courtyard shall be covered with grating running parallel to the drain

REV-00 / FEB 06

Support

of

Galvanized

Steel

&

Painted 50mm Wide Lines in approved Pack Solvent with Volleyball/Sepak Takraw

Volley court lines to be provided with provision of galvanized steel sleeves for posts

ALL COURTS

Backboard

‘Fast Borundico’ Galvanized Steel Post & Painted

Suitable Galvanized Steel Sleeves for net post Sleeve Cover of Solid Brass

50mm Wide Lines in approved Pack Solvent with ‘Fast Borundico’

Netball Court

Cement Screed (if Netball Court is integrated

Parade Square

Interlocking Pavers

with the Parade Square)

VOL.

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

7.3-2

PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE

NETBALL COURT

(TO BE DRAWN ONTO PARADE SQUARE, WHEREVER POSSIBLE)

Goal Ring

Elevation NETBALL GOAL POST

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE

7.3-3

See Detail A

BASKETBALL COURT

Front Elevation

Side Elevation BASKETBALL POST

DETAIL A

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

7.3-4

PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE

SEPAK TAKRAW COURT

(TO BE DRAWN ON NETBALL COURT IF REQUESTED BY USER)

LONG-JUMP / TRIPLE JUMP PIT

REV-01 / 1606 APR 04 REV-00 / FEB

VOL.

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE

7.3-5

See Detail A

See Detail B

VOLLEYBALL COURT

(COULD BE DRAWN ON BASKETBALL COURT )

DETAIL A

REV-00 / 28 JAN 04

VOLLEYBALL POST

REV-00 / FEB 06

DETAIL B

VOL.

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

7.3-6

PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE

ELEVATION OF FLAG POLES FRONTING ASSEMBLY GROUND

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

7.3-7

PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE

PLAN OF RAISED PLATFORM

SECTION THROUGH PLATFORM

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

Critical Information

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

7.4-1

OUTDOOR FITNESS AREA

AREA

200 m2. or 40m X 5m

LOCATION

Area to be located free from underground services

OTHERS

School principal to select 10 out of 12 fitness equipment

Horizontal Ladder

Window

Step Up Blocks (5 Steps)

Press-up Logs

Inclined Flexed Arm Hang

Pull-up Bars

Sit-up Bench (4 pieces)

Parallel Bars REV-00 / FEB 06

Climbing Ropes

Wall with Sand Pit

Leg Raise

Swing Bridge

VOL.

Critical Information

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

7.5-1

GATES & SIGNWALL

MAIN ENTRANCE & SIDE GATE Open inwards

Security over gate (e.g. provide spikes) 1 no. of drop bolt for each leaf with metal sleeves Provide ball-bearing hinges if gate is too large and heavy Gates should not be designed with horizontal bars which can be easily climbed. Distance between bars should not exceed 150mm

SIGNWALL

School name to be written in 4 languages in the following order:

Plan

Malay Chinese Tamil English School crest to be provided School name in English (Box Lettering) to be mounted on the school building located above 1st storey

OTHERS

To provide directional signs at strategic locations of new schools to be built to guide visitors to the school This requirement is to be evaluated by consultants on a case by case basis

Plan

Consultants should review the location of the school and advise on the need and locations of the signs

Elevation GATE FOR MAIN ENTRANCE & SUBSTATION

REV-00 / FEB 06

Elevation SIDE GATE

VOL.

3

EXTERNAL WORKS

7.5-2

GATES & SIGNWALL

SAMPLE PLAN OF SIGNWALL

SAMPLE ELEVATION OF SIGN WALL

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

FACILITIES

Critical Information

3

OTHER

7.6-1

GUARD POST

AREA

Max. 4sqm

CAPACITY

2 security officers

FUNCTION

To monitor human and vehicular traffic at school gates; To log in visitor’s particulars and issue entry passes; To monitor activities on CCTV screen

LOCATION / PROXIMITY

To be near main entrance gates of school with clear unobstructed view of the entrances for vehicles and visitors

FITMENT / FURNITURE Minimal provision

Window counter to be designed to facilitate exchange of passes and visitors’ enquiry

SERVICES

Lighting and power points as required to be provided

Exterior view GUARD POST

Electric fan to be provided and positioned as appropriate

Connection to school’s CCTV network to be provided

OTHERS

Guard post design should not be opulent. Doors and windows to be lockable to prevent theft Signage to be provided to enable visitors to identify Guard Post as a point of security Lightning Protection System shall be provided as required

Interior of GUARD POST

REV-00 / FEB 06

Master Revision List Index

Master Revision List

Design Handbook Vol. 3 – Secondary School S/

Page No.

No. 1.

1.1-1

Revision

Circular No. /

No.

Circular Date

01

Amendment

03/2006

Critical Info>Others

(May 06)

– Amended page reference - Proper distribution of M&E services Recommended Provisions>Finishes – Amended type of Floor Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security: - Renamed and amend type of “Security Key System” - Renamed “Alarm System”

2.

1.2-1

01

03/2006(May

Critical Info>Others

06)

– Amended page reference Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Projection Screen:

- Omitted “ * ” >Fitment/Furniture>Students’ Table - Omitted text 3.

2.1-1 to 2.1-

01

2

03/2006(May 06)

Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Projection Screen: - Omitted “ * ” Fitment/Furniture>DB Closet – Omitted DB Closet dimensions 2.1-2>Drawing title - Amended drawing title

4.

2.4-1

01

03/2006

Critical Info>Area

(May 06)

- Amended SWA details, Critical Info>Function - Amended text

Critical Info>Fitment/Furniture - Insert Sliding folding acoustic partition details Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Floor - Insert “Ceramic tiles” Finishes>Wall - Omitted “Acoustic” Fitment/Furniture>Pin-up board - Omitted “Sliding”

Fitment/Furniture>Projection Screen - Omitted “ * ” 5.

2.10-1

01

03/2006 (May 06)

Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Projection Screen: - Omitted “ * ” Fitment/Furniture> Cabinets – Amended page reference

6.

2.13-1

01

03/2006 (May 06)

Critical Info>Services - update generic term Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Projection Screen: - Omitted “ * ” Fitment/Furniture>Computer Table & Cabinet - Amended page ref.

7. 8.

2.14-2 2.15-1

01 01

03/2006

2.14-2>Drawing

(May 06)

- Amended title

03/2006

Critical Info>Services

(May 06)

– Amended text Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture>Projection screen

– Omitted “*”

S/

No.

Page No.

Revision No.

Circular No. /

Amendment

Circular Date

Services/Eqt>Computer ports - Amended texts 9. 10.

3.1-2 3.2-2

01 01

03/2006

3.1-2>Drawing>Legend

(May 06)

– Amended item 1 & inserted items 11 to 20

03/2006

3.2-2>Drawing>Legend

(May 06)

– Amended item 1& inserted items 7 to 11 - Amended Drawing title

11. 12.

3.3-1 3.4-1

01 01

03/2006

Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security>Others

(May 06)

– Omitted “roller shutter”

03/2006

Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture>Projection

(May 06)

screen

– Omitted “*” Fitment/Furniture>Tearcher’s Table - Omitted “Ceiling” Fitment/Furniture>Cabinets – Amended page ref. 13. 14.

3.5-1 3.8-1

01 01

03/2006

Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Cabinets

(May 06)

– Amended page reference

03/2006

Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture>Teacher’s

(May 06)

Table – Insert dimensions Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security>Others – Insert “DB Closet”

15.

4.8-1

01

03/2006

Critical Info>Location/Proximity

(May 06)

– Replaced “Pastoral Care Room” to “Career Guidance Room”

16.

4.9-1

01

03/2006

Recommended Provisions>Title

(May 06)

- Amended text Recommended Provisions>Services/Eqt>Others – Insert “DB closet”

17. 18.

4.10-1 5.1-2

01 01

03/2006

Recommended Provisions>Services/Eqt>Others

(May 06)

– Insert “DB closet”

03/2006

Recommended Provisions>Services/Eqt>Computer ports,

(May 06)

Power Points, Lighting, Fans, Air-Con, Communications, Water Supply & Others - Omitted repetition

19. 5.8-1 to 5.8-

01

2

03/2006

Critical Info>fitment/furniture

(May 06)

– Added “mirror” details Critical Info>Services - Added “fan” details

Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture>Others - Amended “equipment” details Services/Eqt>Fans - Amended “fans” details 5.8-2>Drawing & legend - Amended layout & Legends 20.

5.12-1

01

03/2006

Critical info>Location/Proximity

(May 06)

– Amended “Technical” Critical info>Fitment/Furniture - Insert “flag holder” details Critical info>Others

- Insert “back wall” details Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Wall - Relocated detail of back wall to Critical Info column Fitment/Furniture>Others - Relocated detail of flag holder to Critical Info column

SCHOOL DESIGN HANDBOOK EDITION 2006

Vol. 4

Produced by

Research, Innovation & Specifications Unit | Research & Procurement Branch| MOE

Copyright of Ministry of Education 2006

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any other information storage and retrieval systems, without prior permission in writing from the copyright holder. Applications for use of the information within should be addressed to Research & Procurement Branch, Infrastructure & Facility Services Group, Ministry of Education.

FOREWORD The Ministry of Education has invested a great deal of resources into

developing its school buildings. Many existing schools have seen their

facilities enlarged, renovated or rebuilt to purposefully fulfil the varying needs and expectations of school educators and students alike.

Today, the design direction for schools is towards innovative, adaptable

and flexible learning environments. Being centres of teaching and learning, it is an inarguable fact that the schools serve as important

models of inspiration for our young. Schools’ physical environments, at the same time, serve as the platforms which facilitate their intellectual and physical growth. Thus, it is of concern that our schools be built to be conducive, efficient and easily maintainable.

The collaborative efforts of educators and designers will continue to be helpful in creating desirable spaces to nurture our young. Improvements

that are responsive to the changing pedagogical styles will continue to be expected of our school buildings. To assist schools and designers in their tasks, Research & Procurement Branch (RPM) conducted a review of the School Design Handbook and put together existing good practices as well as fresh ideas on school design into this new 2006 edition.

As we resume our journey forward in school design and in garnering

even more learning points, it is hoped that the information herein would help facility planners to design learning environments that will be meaningful and enriching to both educators and students.

School Design Handbook

Vol. 4

> TECHNICAL <

CONTENTS Introduction

1

Architectural 1.1

Zoning & Layout

1.3

Building Finishes

1.2 1.4

2

2.1 2.3

2.4

Civil & Structural

Mechanical

Electrical

Plumbing

Other Provisions 3.1

Design Exclusions

3.3

Upgrading Works

3.2

3.4

3.5 4

Fitment & Furniture

Engineering 2.2

3

Building Design

External Works

Project Signboard Hoarding Design

Appendices 4.1

Specifications for CCTV System

Master Revision List Index

REV 00 - FEB 06

Introduction

VOL.

4

INTRODUCTION

Introduction

1.1

This Volume consolidates information on architectural, engineering and other technical requirements that apply to school design and building. The information is provided according to what are deemed current and best

practices in the school building industry and what are considered relevant to MOE schools. 1.2

This Volume is to be read in conjunction with Volumes 1, 2 and 3 of the School Design Handbook. The context of each provision herein is related to

the general information and facilities requirements laid in Volumes 1, 2 and 3. 1.3

All technical information in this Volume serve only as a guide to Consultants and highlight the more crucial aspects of the architectural, civil & structural, mechanical and electrical provisions and other building practices.

1.4

Consultants are encouraged to comply with them and make necessary modifications as they deem fit if the stipulations do not apply to a particular school. Consultants shall seek the approval of MOE and the school for their

intended proposals when deviations or modifications are made to the requirements.

REV-00 / FEB 06

1 Architectural

1.1

Zoning & Layout 1.2

Building Design 1.3

Building Finishes 1.4

Fitment & Furniture

VOL.

4

ZONING & LAYOUT

ARCHITECTURAL 1.1-1

Zoning and Layout 1.1

Classroom blocks are to be located in quieter areas of the site.

Noisy activity areas such as canteen, parade square, courts and field must be placed away from classrooms.

1.2

Non-air-conditioned

teaching

spaces,

especially

classrooms,

should not be physically enclosed or obstructed by other blocks like stair cores, toilets, etc to ensure good cross ventilation.

1.3

Site factors to be considered

Non-airconditioned facilities

Non-air-conditioned teaching blocks facing each other shall have spacing distance of at least 18m between them. Blocks with corridors facing each other shall have spacing distance of minimum 16m between them, as shown in Diagram 1-A.

1.4

Rooms with equipment or materials requiring security are to be easily cordoned off at controlled points by roller shutters.

1.5

High Security Areas

The Staff Room and Media Resource Library (MRL) should not be on more than one level, where possible.

1.6

CCA Rooms and Health & Fitness Rooms are to be directly accessible from outside the cordoned or secured areas. This is to enable better security management after school hours.

1.7

Bin Center shall be located away from the school’s main entrance.

Importantly, it should not be located next to pedestrian walkway

Services Areas

or residential houses. It should be in close proximity to the

Canteen, preferably behind the Canteen. It should have a proper pathway leading to it. 1.8

Substation location shall be accessible from public roads, but must not cause the school frontage to be reduced. It should preferably be located where it is not likely to be affected by future extensions.

1.9

Toilets with showers for students shall be located near the School Field or Canteen.

1.10

In designing for vehicular circulation, pedestrian safety must be given utmost consideration. Movement of school buses must especially be controlled.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Vehicular Circulation

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.1-2

1.11

ZONING & LAYOUT

Separate entry and exit points for vehicles (i.e. 2 gates) are to be

External Works

provided if site condition permits. 1.12

External facilities like School Field and Games Courts are to be located away from the main driveway for safety reasons. If this is

not possible, a physical barrier (such as planting, fencing etc) shall be provided.

Diagram 1-A

SPACING BETWEEN NON-AIR-CONDITIONED TEACHING BLOCKS

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.1-3

ZONING & LAYOUT

Setback & Spacing Requirements 1.13

When planning the layout of the various blocks of the school, certain minimum setback distances have to be observed.

1.14

1.15

From Teaching block to site boundary where : HDB flat abuts (See Diagram 1-B)

Setback = 6m

Minor Road abuts (See Diagram 1-B)

Setback = 15m

School blocks to site boundary

From Non-Teaching and air-conditioned block to site boundary where : HDB flat abuts (See Diagram 1-C)

Setback = 6m

Minor Road abuts (See Diagram 1-C)

Setback = 10m

1.16

Major road (Arterial A & Expressway) abutting school sites are

1.17

From Field to Fence (See Diagram 1-D)

Setback = 3m

1.18

From Field to Games Courts (See Diagram 1-D)

Setback = 3m

1.19

From Field / Games Courts to building (See

Setback = 10m

acceptable if the school field can be used as a buffer.

Diagram 1-D) 1.20

When 2 school sites are adjacent to one another, place each school’s parade square away from each other to avoid interference during morning assembly.

1.21

To group noisy areas such as Canteen, Field and Games Courts together.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Field setbacks

VOL.

4

SITE PLANNING

ARCHITECTURAL 1.1-4

Diagram 1-B

SETBACKS FROM TEACHING BLOCK TO SITE BOUNDARY

WHERE MINOR ROAD AND HDB BLOCK ABUTS

Diagram 1-C

SETBACKS FROM NON-TEACHING & AIR-CON BLOCK TO SITE BOUNDARY

WHERE MINOR ROAD AND HDB BLOCK ABUTS

Diagram 1-D

SETBACKS BETWEEN SCHOOL BUILDING, FIELD AND COURTS

REV-01 / MAY 06

VOL.

4

ZONING & LAYOUT

ARCHITECTURAL 1.1-5

REQUIREMENTS ON SAFETY & SECURITY 1.22

Spaces in the school building must be designed without hidden corners or corridors. facilitate visual supervision at all times.

1.23

Toilets,

especially

female

toilets,

This is to

shall

not

be

remotely located and must be easily accessible from teaching facilities.

1.24

corners

No remote locations

The upper levels of the school building shall be made

Controlled

secure after school hours by providing controlled

access at

access points at the ground level.

REV-00 / FEB 06

No hidden

ground level

VOL.

4

BUILDING DESIGN

ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-1

Roof, Walls, Floors and Other Elements 2.1

Roof Profiles shall be simple.

2.2

All roofs are to be accessible for maintenance.

2.3

The roof shall have low reflectivity and luminance so the neighbouring buildings’ occupants will not be subject to glare or

Roof

blinding reflection. 2.4

The roof shall have appropriate noise-damping provision and proper insulation to ensure that the noise of rain tapping on the roof is not deflected onto neighbouring buildings’ occupants.

2.5

The ground beneath all roof eaves shall be provided with a 1.2m wide pavement, to minimize the physical impact caused by splashing rainwater from the roofs.

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.9

All corridors and stairs must be sufficiently protected from rain with weather protection devices.

Corridors / Stairs

All corridors and staircases shall be adequately ventilated and well-lit. Double-loaded corridors are not allowed.

Corridor railings are to be 50% pre-cast concrete and/or 50%

perforated aluminium or steel railings.

Weather protection devices are to be lightweight and prefabricated. Their parts must be vandal-proof and not easily

tampered with. It shall be sturdy such that it would not shake or

Weather Protection Device

wobble. 2.10

The weather protection device should be vertically installed or

2.11

The weather protection device shall be designed to provide

inclined to prevent students from climbing onto them.

continuous protection, i.e., without gaps at intervals that would enable rainwater or sunlight entry.

The material and design

shall generate minimum noise when the rain falls on the devices. 2.12

Hollow core slabs shall not be used in wet floor areas.

2.13

Falls and scupper drains are to be provided where necessary, e.g. along corridors.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Floors

VOL.

4

BUILDING DESIGN

ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-2

2.14

Drywall partitions shall not be provided in rooms which have wet areas or with critical security considerations. Dry wall partition

Drywall Partitions

or box-ups shall not be installed along high human traffic areas e.g. corridors. 2.15

All drywall partitions shall be impact-resistant.

2.16

Sliding

folding

operable.

The

acoustic

surface

wall

shall

partitions

be

shall

completely

be

flat,

manually with

no

protrusion or recess. Both sides of the partition panels shall

Sliding Folding Partitions

serve as pin up boards. 2.17

Sound level transmitted through the partition, when completely

closed, shall be equal or lower than sound level transmitted through a normal dry wall partition.

2.18

Windows shall be anodised aluminium finish.

2.19

Sliding windows are recommended for air-conditioned rooms.

Louvred windows are preferred for non-air-conditioned rooms,

Windows

especially for windows opening into circulation areas. 2.20

Windows should not protrude into common circulation areas.

2.21

Vents or windows shall be provided on two opposite-facing

walls of the classrooms. The amount of opening shall be sufficient to enable maximum cross ventilation within the classroom.

2.22

The vents and windows shall be easy to maintain and their

2.23

The use of architectural glass should be minimized.

2.24

Full height windows are not allowed.

2.25

Doors that are likely to come in contact with water shall be

handles shall be easily accessed by the users.

constructed in marine plywood or anodized aluminum. 2.26

REV-00 / FEB 06

Door trims should be hardy to receive the required locksets and withstand the occasional accidental slamming.

Doors

VOL.

4

BUILDING DESIGN

ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-3

2.27

Types of door handles, stoppers/ catchers shall be chosen

carefully and their locations appropriately considered so as not to pose a hazard to passersby.

2.28

A covered linkway connecting the school building to the boundary gate nearest the public bus-stop is to be provided.

Covered Linkway

The following are guidelines on how to address Vision Care in facility design:

2.29

Non-air-conditioned

rooms

shall

be

orientated

windows facing the North-South direction.

with

their

This is to ensure

that the whiteboard receives minimum glare from the incoming sunlight. 2.30

Sunshades shall be provided along the windows facing the

2.31

The first 2m of the wall perpendicular to the whiteboard shall

exterior.

not have windows or openings that would allow light to infiltrate. This is to minimize glare on the whiteboard surface. 2.32

Whiteboard shall be tilted forward by 1 to 2 degrees.

2.33

Whiteboard surface shall be of a non-glossy, matt finish.

2.34

Proper lighting for vision care shall comply with specifications under Vol. 4, Chapter 2.3.

2.35

2.36

Maximum viewing angle for the projection screen in rooms with

LCD projector is 60 degrees, as shown in Diagram 2-A.

The maximum viewing distance from the whiteboard to the last row of students’ seats shall be 12.5m.

2.37

REV-01 / MAY 06

Layout of room to address vision care is to be complied with as

shown in Diagram 2-B.

Designing for Vision Care

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-4

BUILDING DESIGN

Diagram 2-A.

RECOMMENDED VIEWING ANGLES FROM STUDENTS’ SEATING AREA

Diagram 2-B.

VISION CARE LAYOUT IN A TYPICAL CLASSROOM

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-5

BUILDING DESIGN

State Flag and Signage 2.38

The State Flag shall be placed on the front wall of the classroom, high above a standing person’s head and above all other decoration. No emblem of any kind shall be above the flag.

2.39

2.40

State Flag to all classrooms shall comply with the specification as follows:

Design

- Use artwork provided by MICA

Material

- Transparent Acrylic

Printing

- Silkscreen Printing (Reverse)

Size

- 460mm x 690mm x 3mm with bevelled edges

Finishing

- Glossy, backing with approved protection

Colour

- Pantone Red (032) or Sunflower Red

Signage provision shall comprise room numbering and naming system to all rooms and facilities, including Canteen Stalls,

State Flag

Signage locations

Toilets and Services Rooms and compartments. 2.41

Information and directional signs shall be provided to staircases and lift lobbies at all levels.

2.42

Floor loading plan (6 colours per sign) shall be provided at every storey.

2.43

Acrylic holder to hold card of 100mm height shall be provided to every classroom.

2.44

Signage to rooms and facilities shall be in Acrylic block cutouts.

2.45

Signage on glass panels and doors shall be vinyl self-adhesive type.

2.46

Signage to external areas like building block, entrance sign-wall shall be in aluminium box lettering.

2.47

Road traffic signs (1 no. each) bearing "NO ENTRY" and "STOP" including galvanized post and concrete foundation are to be

provided.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Traffic Signs

VOL.

4

BUILDING DESIGN

ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-6

2.48

Traffic directional signs (2 nos.) bearing school name informing

road users of direction to school are to be provided, as shown in Diagram 2-C.

2.49

All approvals from appropriate authorities are to be obtained for

2.50

Entrance

2.51

Signage lettering shall be anodised aluminium box letterings of

design and installation of traffic directional signs. sign

wall

is

to

be

designed

requirements stated in Vol. 2 - 6.5.

incorporating

the

Entrance Sign Wall

School Name in four official languages. Height of lettering should not be more than 200mm.

2.52

School Crest shall be installed at the school’s entrance wall and at the front of the stage in the Hall.

2.53

School Crest

School Crest is to be of coloured fluorocarbon aluminium sheet, with different layers of aluminium sheet to denote different

colours. Crest size shall not exceed 1m for entrance wall and 1.2m for Hall stage. Diagram 2-C

SAMPLE OF TRAFFIC DIRECTIONAL SIGN Note: Text height and arrow size to be provided in accordance to LTA Specification and approval. Text and signage to be double sided.

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

BUILDING DESIGN

ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-7

REQUIREMENTS ON SAFETY & SECURITY 2.54

Handrails to both sides of staircases shall be at a

height between 580mm to 700mm for primary schools.

Railings

The handrails must have returns. 2.55

Railings

/

Parapets

along

corridors

and

staircase

landings are to be provided at 1100mm above FFL. 2.56

Railing design must discourage students from climbing

2.57

Staircases shall have a width of 1.5m for safe mass

onto them.

movement of students. For staircases wider than 1.5m, additional handrail shall be provided in the middle of

Staircases

the stair width. 2.58

Staircases shall have uniform risers of 150mm (max) and treads of 300mm (min), and fitted with non-slip nosing in permanent contrasting colours.

2.59

Roof access shall be secure and vandal proof.

2.60

Corridors

shall

have

minimum

width

of

2.1m

to

accommodate mass movement of students. 2.61

Ramps, instead of steps, are to be provided for

2.62

Corridors shall be laid to fall towards scuppers or floor

Corridors

changes in levels at corridors and high traffic areas.

traps to facilitate proper rainwater drainage and to prevent accidental falls.

2.63

Obstruction and protrusions such as fire extinguishers, water coolers, window and door swings into corridors must be avoided completely.

2.64

Doors that swing out into circulation areas shall preferably be recessed and door leaves shall not

protrude into the corridor when opened so as not to pose danger and injury to passersby. 2.65

Doors to air-conditioned rooms are to be provided with door closers and vision panels.

2.66

REV-00 / FEB 06

Door handles shall be free of sharp edges.

Doors

VOL.

4

BUILDING DESIGN

ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-8

Requirements on Safety & Security (con’t) 2.67

Timber doors at 1 st storey shall be in solid timber for

2.68

The key and locking systems to doors shall follow the

2.69

Glass doors shall have warning bands to prevent

greater security.

Masterkey groupings as recommended in Table 2-D.

accidental crashes. 2.70

Security grilles shall be provided to all windows and vents

at

1 st storey

except

for

Counselling

room,

Pastoral Care Room, Canteen’s Foodstalls and Stores

Security Grilles

and Non-Teaching Staff room. 2.71

Security grilles shall be provided to sliding, casement, or top hung windows that face the external at the upper stories, except in air-conditioned rooms where the windows are normally closed.

2.72

Security grilles shall be provided to service areas and

2.73

Window

2.74

Roller shutters are to be provided at the entrances to

flat roofs to prevent unauthorized access.

150mm.

grille

members

spacing

shall

not

exceed

the General Office, Media Resource Library, Staff Room

Roller Shutters

and H.O.D’s Room. 2.75

Roller shutters are to be provided at the 1 st storey to

2.76

The use of cantilever structure for linkways, bus

2.77

For

every staircase.

shelters and entrance porches is discouraged. all

games

courts

except

Netball

Court,

goalposts are to be fixed to the ground. reasons,

schools are

not

allowed

to

this

provision to portable type even if the schools funded it. 2.78

If the games courts must double up as a fire engine access, the goalposts shall not be in the path of the fire engine access.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Design

the

For safety

change

Cantilever

Goalposts

VOL.

4

BUILDING DESIGN

ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-9

Requirements on Safety & Security (con’t) 2.79

The Science Room shall preferably be located on the ground floor to enable quick evacuation in time of emergency.

2.80

Science Room

The Canteen and Field may be used for assembly during an emergency. Public Address System is needed at the Canteen and Field for the school’s management to give directions

guiding the students to move to safety. Horn speakers are

Emergency Planning

also required for the Field. 2.81

Sufficient

gates

are

to

be

provided

along

the

fence

surrounding the Field for discharging the students during an emergency. They are to be located near the HDB void decks or safe open space. The location could be relocated upon the Principal’s request. 2.82

The following shall be provided: Canteen

-

1 microphone point and intercom system

Field

-

1 microphone point and 2 horn speakers

-

2 internal gate (2.4m) between the Field and school compound

-

1 side gate (1.2m) for community use

-

2 exit gates (1.2m) each with ‘Emergency Exit Only’ sign on both sides along the fence

2.83

The types and quantities of fire safety equipment shown in Volumes 2 and 3 are to be provided to serve as provisions on top of the standard statutory requirements.

2.84

During an emergency, all students may be required to remain indoors in rooms that have been designated by the school for in-place protection, e.g. Classrooms. All windows, doors and

In-place

vents to the rooms are to be closed and sealed with plastic

protection

sheets against the migration of harmful vapours. The designated rooms shall comply with the following criteria: ƒ

Have flat-surfaced frames to windows, doors and vents to facilitate easy sealing with masking tapes.

ƒ

Gaps around M&E services penetrations shall be sealed with appropriate materials to prevent gas seepage.

ƒ

Large enough to provide a comfortable stay and an acceptable air quality for its occupants.

ƒ

Should be easily accessible with doors that are lockable from both inside and outside.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Safety Equipment

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-10

BUILDING DESIGN

Table 2-D : Masterkey Groupings The following are the recommended key groupings for the facilities found in both primary and secondary schools. Facility Type

Masterkey Grouping

General Teaching 1

Classroom

-

-

C

2

Learning Support Co-ordinator’s Room

-

-

C

3

Mother Tongue Language Room

-

B

-

-

B

-

D

-

-

A

-

-

-

B

-

A

-

-

Special Teaching Rooms 4

All Design & Technology Rooms

5

All

Administrative and Staff Areas 6

All

7

Counselling Room

8

Prefect’s Room

9

Career Guidance Room

Ancillary 10

Media Resource Library

11

Multi-Purpose Hall a. Seating Area & Stage b. Control Room

c. Changing Room d. Store 12

Furniture Store

A

-

-

13

Canteen

A

-

-

14

Non-Teaching Staff Room

A

-

-

15

Health & Fitness Room

-

B

-

16

Games Equipment Store

A

-

-

17

CCA Room

-

B

-

18

Bookshop

Individual key

19

Sickbay

A

-

-

20

Dental Clinic

A

-

-

21

Pastoral Care Room

A

-

-

22

NCC/NPCC Room

-

B

-

23

Rifle Range (Indoor)

24

Rifle Range (Outdoor)

25

Armoury

Individual Key Individual Key -

B

-

Services Areas

REV-00 / FEB 06

26

Toilets & Showers

Key Alike to all Toilets

27

LAN Room

Individual key

28

Central Server Room

Individual key

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.3-1

BUILDING FINISHES

3.0

Building Finishes

3.1

The colour, density, water absorption and abrasion resistance of all wall finishes shall be carefully chosen especially when

Wall Finishes

they are to be applied to wet facilities or areas that are

exposed to water. This is to slow down the onset of mould and to ease cleaning. 3.2

The type of paint selected for the lower half of corridor walls shall be easy to maintain, as these wall areas are prone to stains and marks.

3.3

Backsplash panels must be provided to wall areas that are prone to dampness due to the presence of washing facilities, water coolers or any other water dispensers.

3.4

Ground level floor finishes that are adhesive bonded shall take into account the rising dampness that may de-bond the

Floor Finishes

finishing. 3.5

Vinyl sport flooring shall be heavy duty to withstand equipment load and accidental weights dropped on the floor.

3.6

Vinyl flooring in computer rooms shall be heavy-duty antistatic type.

3.7

Warranty shall be provided for vinyl flooring.

3.8

Where applicable, concrete topping shall be used in place of

3.9

Suspended ceilings are to be provided to all areas at the upper

cement sand screed.

most storeys (with exception to areas with flat roofs) and all special rooms with ceiling requirements.

3.10

All rooms specified with ceiling shall be provided with nonacoustic ceiling boards of regular material (e.g mineral fibre or gypsum) except facilities such as Hall.

3.11

Access openings shall be provided in ceilings to facilitate periodic inspections. Installation requirements for the ceiling system are to be adequately provided for.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Suspended Ceiling

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.3-2

3.12

BUILDING FINISHES

Rooms with false ceiling, which are equipped with projector screen and/or ceiling fans, shall have minimum floor to ceiling clear height of 2.8m.

Requirements on Safety & Security 3.13

Floor materials selected for wet areas shall be slipresistant to prevent accidental falls.

3.14

All design and fixing detail drawings of proposed ceiling systems by the Contractor’s relevant qualified

persons shall, before installation, be cleared by the Consultant. 3.15

Mock-ups of 2800mm by 2400mm ceiling grid with fixings and accessories shall be inspected and its

design submitted for the Superintendent Officer’s (S.O.) approval. 3.16

Prior to installation of the ceiling, the Consultant shall brief the site supervisor on the inspections

required for the system and make checks on other system components like M&E fixtures to ascertain that these are independent of the suspended ceiling system.

3.17

A checklist shall be prepared by the S.O. to ascertain

that the various fixings and accessories have been inspected for safety during supervision.

3.18

The

range

of

tests

conducted before

and after

installation shall also be recorded in the checklist. This checklist is to be filed on site and made available for verification and inspection when necessary.

3.19

The checklist shall be duly signed by the Clerk-OfWorks

(COW)

and

submitted

to

the

S.O.’s

representatives to acknowledge that 100% check has been conducted.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Floor finish

Suspended Ceiling

System

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-1

4.0

FITMENT / FURNITURE

Fitment Design The following section recommends the types of fitment that can be provided for schools according to the teaching and

learning needs within the facility as well as the storage requirements. Samples of fitment prototypes are illustrated for indicative purposes only. Consultants are to consult the school and MOE on the actual design and quantity of fitment required for each particular facility. Consultants shall also comply with the criteria on fitment design as laid down below: 4.1

Where electrical and IT provisions are to be incorporated into

the fitment design, easy access to these points shall be provided. They shall also be visible and not hidden from view.

4.2

Electrical & IT points within easy access

Workbenches that serve as computer or writing stations shall be provided with sufficient knee clearance.

4.3

Worktops that are meant to carry machinery shall be made of heavy duty material. Those with sink incorporated in them

shall be made of non-porous, solid surfacing material. 4.4

All fitment located in areas with wet facilities shall be provided

4.5

The whiteboard shall be inclusive of a pen tray, rounded-off at

with a concrete base with tile finish.

its edges, and installed with its bottom edge at 700mm (for

Heavy duty worktops for machinery

Tiled concrete base for fitment in wet areas

Whiteboard

PS) or 850mm (for SS) above the floor level. 4.6

Vision care needs for whiteboards as outlined under Vol. 1 & 4 shall be addressed.

4.7

Cabinets and its components (swing doors, drawers, sliding doors, glass sliding doors, etc.) are to be provided with locks.

Cabinet Locks

Locks with removable key type when locked or unlocked are to be provided. 4.8

All fitment shall be designed and installed to cater for students of an average height. For installation of particular

fitments e.g. wash basin, urinals, pedestal toilet, canteen stall

counters, canteen wash troughs etc, the height of lower primary or shorter than average students must be taken into account. REV-00 / FEB 06

Height of fitments

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-2

FITMENT PROTOTYPES (COMMON TO PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SCHOOLS)

TYPE 4-1 : HIGH CABINET WITH WHITEBOARD

Locations:

& PIN-UP BOARD

Mother Tongue Language Room

- Whiteboards are sliding and tilted forward 1 to 2 degrees from vertical plane.

Mathematics Room Art and Crafts Room

- Shelves are adjustable

Audio Visual Room

- LAN points/power points are integrated,

Science Room

with at least one each at both ends of the cabinet.

Computer Room IT Learning Resource Room Humanities Room Commerce Room Music Room

Type 4-1

B

A

B

A

Elevation

Pen Tray Detail

Section A

Section B

Sample Elevation and Sections of High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board

REV-01 / MAY 06

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-3

Locations:

TYPE 4-2 : WORKTOP WITH HIGH CABINETS - This fitment has 4 variations that can be combined.

Learning Support Coordinator’s Room Art & Crafts Room Science Room Staff Resource Room Preparation Room/Store

Type 4-2

4-2A (High Cabinet with Cupboard)

4-2C (High Cabinet with Knee Space)

Typical Section

REV-00 / FEB 06

4-2B (High Cabinet with Drawers)

4-2D (High Cabinet with Sink)

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

TYPE 4-3 : LOW CABINET

Locations:

- This fitment has 4 variations that can be

Learning Support Coordinator’s Room

combined.

Science Room Meeting Room Counselling Room Staff Lounge Staff Resource Room Pastoral Care Room Health & Fitness Room Art & Crafts Room Kitchen Preparation Room

Type 4-3

4-3A (Low Cabinet with Cupboard)

4-3B (Low Cabinet with Drawers)

REV-00 / FEB 06

Typical Section

Typical Section

4-3C (Low Cabinet with Sink)

Typical Section

4-3D (Low Cabinet with Open Shelves)

Typical Section

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-5

FITMENT / FURNITURE

TYPE 4-4 : TRAPEZOIDAL TABLE - The table comes in different sizes. Type 4-4

Location: Mathematics Room Art and Crafts Room Science Room IT Learning Resource Room (with port holes)

Media Resource Library Pastoral Care Room.

Location:

TYPE 4-5 : HIGH CABINET Type 4-5

General Office Games Equipment Room Dental Clinic Kitchen Preparation Room Non-Teaching Staff Room

Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-6

FITMENT / FURNITURE Location:

TYPE 4-6 : STAFF WORKSTATION - Each workstation shall be provided with 1 no. service

H.O.Ds’ Office

outlet box each with 1 no. twin gang 13A power

General Office

point and 1 no. computer point.

Staffroom

Type 4-6

4-6A (HOD, AM, OM) (8m 2 )

4-6B (Staff Room) (4m 2 )

Legend 1. 1 set of Modular Partition 2. Main Table 3. Side Table 4. 1 set of Overhead Storage Units 5. 1 set Pedestal Drawers 6. Metal Cabinet 7. Chairs

REV-01 / MAY 06

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-7

Location:

TYPE 4-7 : DISPLAY CABINET

Kitchen

- Glass doors on upper for display

Kitchen Preparation Room

- Low cabinet / worktop

Needlework Room

Type 4-7

Elevation

Section

Location:

TYPE 4-8 : OPEN SHELVES

Kitchen Needlework Room Office Store Audio Visual Store Type 4-8

Sample Elevation and Section of Open Shelves

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-8

FITMENT / FURNITURE

TYPE 4-9 : SUPPLY CABINET & FOLIO CABINET

Location: Art & Crafts Room

Type 4-9

Sample Elevation and Section of Folio Cabinet

Type 4-10

Sample Elevation and Section of Supply Cabinet

TYPE 4-11 : MUSIC RACK AND CABINETS FOR BAND INSTRUMENTS

Location: Music Room and Music Store

Type 4-11

Sample Of Music Rack And Cabinets For Band Instruments

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-9

TYPE 4-12 : TEACHER’S TABLE

Location: Science Room Type 4-12

Sample Elevation and Section of Teacher’s Table

TYPE 4-13 : HIGH CABINET WITH BUILT-IN SAFE

Location: Principal’s Office

Type 4-13

Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet With Built-In Safe

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-10

TYPE 4-14 : SINGLE & DOUBLE SEAT COMPUTER TABLE

Location: Media Resource Library

Type 4-14A

Type 4-14B

Sample Of Single Seat Computer Table

Sample Of Double Seat Computer Table

TYPE 4-15 : TIMBER OPEN SHELVES

Location: Media Resource Library Type 4-15

Sample Of Timber Open Shelves

TYPE 4-16 : MEDIA ISLAND FOR 3 TERMINALS

Location: Media Resource Library

Type 4-16A

Type 4-16B

Sample Plan and Section of Media Island For 3 Terminals

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-11

TYPE 4-17 : AV EQUIPMENT WORKTOP

Location: Media Resource Library Type 4-17

Sample Elevation of AV Equipment Worktop TYPE 4-18 : NON-PRINT MEDIA CABINET

Location: Media Resource Library

Type 4-18

Sample Elevation and Section of Non-Print Media Cabinet Location:

TYPE 4-19 : BOOK CHUTE

Media Resource Library Type 4-19

Sample Internal Elevation and Section of Book Chute REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-12

TYPE 4-20 : DRESSING TABLE

Location: Multi-Purpose Hall Changing Room Type 4-20

Sample Elevation of Dressing Table Location:

TYPE 4-21 : HIGH OPEN SHELVES

Games Equipment Store Type 4-21

Sample Of High Open Shelves TYPE 4-22 : COUNTER CABINET

Location: Bookshop Type 4-22

Sample Elevation and Section of Counter Cabinet

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-13

Location:

TYPE 4-23 : HIGH OPEN SHELVES

Bookshop Type 4-23

Sample Elevation and Section of High Open Shelves

Location:

TYPE 4-24 : LONG CABINET WITH SINK

Dental Clinic Type 4-24

Sample Elevation and Section of Long Cabinet With Sink

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-14

FITMENT / FURNITURE

Location:

TYPE 4-25 : WORKTABLE

Dental Clinic Type 4-25

Sample Elevation and Section of Dental Officers’ Worktable

Location:

TYPE 4-26 : WAITING BENCH - For students to sit and await consultation Type 4-26

Sample Of Waiting Bench

REV-00 / FEB 06

Dental Clinic

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-15

FITMENT PROTOTYPES (COMMON TO FACILITIES IN A SECONDARY SCHOOL) TYPE 4-27 : HIGH CABINET FOR HUMANITIES SUBJECTS -

Storage for resource materials, charts and models.

-

Transparent glass doors for display as required.

Location: Humanities Workroom

Type 4-27

Sample Elevation of Cabinet for Humanities Workroom TYPE 4-28 : HIGH CABINETS FOR MUSIC - Storage for Curriculum Music and Band Instruments.

Location: Music Store

Type 4-28A

Sample Elevation and Section of Cabinet for Curriculum Music Type 4-28B

Sample Elevation and Section of Cabinet for Band Instruments REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-16

FITMENT / FURNITURE

TYPE 4-29 : WORK BENCHES FOR LABS - Storage for laboratory instruments and teaching resources.

Location: Chemistry Laboratory

Type 4-29A

Sample Elevation and Section of Teacher’s Work Bench

Type 4-29B

Sample Elevation and Section of Students’ Work Bench

Type 4-29C

Sample Elevation and Section of Side Workbench With Sink

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-17

Location:

TYPE 4-31 : MICROSCOPE CUPBOARD - Storage of Scientific Equipment e.g. Microscopes -

Dehumidifier system as required

Biology Laboratory Physics Laboratory

Type 4-30

Sample Elevation and Section of Microscope Cupboard

TYPE 4-31: WORKBENCH CUM OVERHEAD STORAGE - Storage for scientific supplies, equipment, articles and instruments for mass usage - Includes min. 1 workstation for laboratory assistant - Worktop for preparation of experiments - Glass doors for easy identification and retrieval of instruments Type 4-31

Sample Of Workbench Cum Overhead Storage

REV-00 / FEB 06

Location: Science Lab Preparation Room / Store.

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-18

TYPE 4-32 : MOVABLE HIGH CABINET WITH GLASS DOORS - Storage for scientific supplies, equipment, articles and instruments for mass usage

Location: Science Lab Preparation Room / Store.

- Glass doors for easy identification and retrieval of instruments

Type 4-32

Sample Elevation and Section of Movable High Cabinet With Glass Doors

TYPE 4-33 : WORK BENCHES FOR KITCHEN

Location: Kitchen

Type 4-33A

Sample Of Teacher’s Demonstration Table Type 4-33B

Sample Of Student’s Workbench REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-19

TYPE 4-34 : LOW CABINETS FOR KITCHEN

Location: Kitchen

Type 4-34A

Sample of Low Cabinet with Louvred Door Type 4-34B

Sample Of Resource Corner Cabinet (For 1 Kitchen Only)

Location: Kitchen Preparation

TYPE 4-35: TEACHER’S WORKSTATION - For preparation of lessons and teaching materials Type 4-35

Sample Of Teacher’s Workstation

REV-00 / FEB 06

Room/Store.

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-20

FITMENT / FURNITURE

TYPE 4-36: CHARTS CABINET

Location:

-

Kitchen Preparation Room

Storage for subject materials like food charts etc. Type 4-36

Sample Elevation and Section of Charts Cabinet

TYPE 4-37: HIGH CABINET FOR KITCHEN -

Storage for kitchen equipment and utensils.

Location: Kitchen Preparation Room

Type 4-37

Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet for Kitchen

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-21

TYPE 4-38: HIGH CABINET WITH RACK

Location: Needlework Room

Type 4-38

Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet With Rack

TYPE 4-39: GARMENT CABINET

Location: Needlework Room Type 4-39

Sample Elevation and Section of Garment Cabinet

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-22

FITMENT / FURNITURE

TYPE 4-40: WING MIRROR

Location: Needlework Room Type 4-40

Sample Elevation and Section of Wing Mirror

TYPE 4-41 : CONCRETE COUNTER WITH CABINETS & DRAWERS - The provision of drawers to be on one side only if the length of wall is insufficient.

Location: D & T Studio 1 & 2 Design Room D & T Studio (LS).

Type 4-41

Sample Elevation and Section of Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-23

TYPE 4-42 : CONCRETE COUNTER WITH CABINETS & SINK - The position of sink to be near doorway so that students

can wash their hands on their way out of the Studio.

Location: D & T Studio 1 & 2 D & T Studio (LS)

Sufficient standing room to be considered. Other sinks in the Studio to be centrally located to provide better access to students from various work zones. Type 4-42

Sample Elevation and Section of Concrete Counter with Cabinet and Sink

TYPE 4-43 : CONCRETE COUNTER FOR SOLDERING

Location: D & T Studio 2 D & T Studio (LS) .

Type 4-43

Sample Elevation and Section of Counter for Soldering

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-24

FITMENT / FURNITURE

TYPE 4-44 : OPEN SHELVES WITH DRAWERS

Location: D & T Design Room Store.

Type 4-44

Sample Elevation and Section of Open Shelves With Drawers

TYPE 4-45 : HIGH CABINET WITH DRAWERS

Location: D & T Design Room Store.

Type 4-45

Sample Of High Cabinet With Drawers

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-25

Location:

TYPE 4-46 : HIGH SHELVES

D & T Studio Stores (Tools Stores) Type 4-46

Sample Elevation and Section of High Shelves

TYPE 4-47 : LOW CABINET WITH OPEN SHELVES

Location: D & T Studio Stores (Main Stores)

Type 4-47

Sample Elevation and Section of Low Cabinet With Open Shelves

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-26

FITMENT / FURNITURE

TYPE 4-48 : HIGH CABINET WITH DRAWERS

Location: D & T Studio (LS)

Type 4-48

Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet With Drawers

TYPE 4-49 : OPEN SHELVES WITH DRAWERS

Location: D & T Studio (LS)

Type 4-49

Sample Elevation and Section of Open Shelves With Drawers

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

FITMENT / FURNITURE

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-27

TYPE 4-50 : HIGH CABINET WITH WHITEBOARD AND PIN-UP BOARD

Location: D & T Studio (LS)

Type 4-50

Sample Elevation of High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board

Section A-A

Section B-B

Sample Section of High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-Up Board

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-28

FITMENT / FURNITURE

TYPE 4-51: RIFLE RACKS

Location: Armoury Type 4-51A

Sample Elevation and Section of Enclosed Type Rifle Rack Type 4-51B

Sample Elevation and Section of Two-Tier Open Type Rifle Rack

REV-00 / FEB 06

2 Engineering 2.1

Civil & Structural 2.2

Mechanical 2.3

Electrical 2.4

Plumbing

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

2.1-1

CIVIL & STRUCTURAL

1.0

Civil & Structural Works

1.1

Design of the Structural System shall comply with Building Codes as well as

1.2

Instructional areas shall be column free.

1.3

Intermediate columns which protrude from the walls or limit future extension

Buildability Requirements.

Instructional areas must be column-free

works shall be avoided. 1.4

School Fields shall be turfed with Cow Grass (Axonopus Compressus) and grown to produce a continuous cover over the whole field. The school field shall be rolled even and properly compacted with adequate drainage system.

REV-00 / FEB 06

School Field

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

2.0

MECHANICAL

2.2-1

Mechanical Systems The following requirements for mechanical works shall be fully complied with. Consultants are required to submit justifications and

obtain MOE’s approval for non-compliance cases. The requirements

are in addition to the usual standard design specifications and are not exhaustive. Consultants are advised to check with the MOE officer-incharge if they require further clarifications. 2.1

The operating indoor conditions shall be 240C ± 10C & 65% RH ± 5% unless otherwise noted. The operating conditions for Computer Rooms, LAN and Central Server Room shall be

230C

±

10C

& 60% RH ±

Air-Conditioning System

5%. 2.2

Noise level: NR 40 in Library, Computer Rooms, Offices, Music Rooms, AV Rooms and other air-conditioned rooms.

2.3

Consultants shall propose the most energy-efficient air-conditioning system.

2.4

Variable Refrigerant Volume (VRV) air-cooled split units (with 100% standby and automatic changeover) shall be used to serve the LAN and Central Server Rooms only.

2.5

Fresh air supply duct shall be concealed in the ceiling and connected to the fan coil unit where connection port is available in the FCU. For

wall mounted FCUs, the fresh air supply duct shall be terminated adjacent to the FCU with a suitable grille. 2.6

Condenser units shall be suitably located on the ground with

protection around it and away from vehicular and human traffic

Location of CU

and/or on roof level with proper access for maintenance. No condenser units are allowed to be installed on the façade of buildings. 2.7

In all air-conditioned rooms with fan coil units, each unit shall be

hard-wired to a central controller located at a suitable location within the room, preferably near the lighting switches.

2.8

A Professional Engineer shall endorse all hangers and anchoring bolts to slabs and roof structure/trusses.

2.9

Toilets shall be provided with central ducted exhaust system with low-level extraction points installed in all WC compartments. Exhaust

grilles used for these low level extracts shall have blades with either V or Y profiles. 2.10

Exhaust fans shall be located on the roof. All discharge points of the toilet and kitchen exhaust systems shall be located above the roof level and shall not face any residential blocks.

2.11

The noise level shall not exceed 65dBA when measured at 1m away from the toilet or kitchen exhaust fans.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Mechanical Ventilation

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

2.12 2.13

2.2-2

MECHANICAL

Kitchen exhaust duct material shall be aluminium. The exhaust hood and grease filters shall be stainless steel.

If school blocks are 5 storeys and higher, two 20-person electric

traction lifts shall be provided. Lifts shall be provided with automatic rescue devices (ARD) to bring the lifts to the nearest floor and open

doors during power failures. 2.14

If a low-rise school is designated as a handicapped school, one 13person electric traction lift shall be provided. This lift shall comply with the handicap-access requirement.

2.15

Double-leaf doors with sufficiently large glass vision panels shall be provided for all lifts.

2.16

1 no. alarm bell shall be located at the 1st storey lift lobby. Bell should be labeled “Lift Alarm – Inform office or Call for lift service if bell is activated”.

2.17

The intercom in the lift car shall be linked to the General Office and

2.18

A lift supervisory repeater panel shall be located in the General Office.

the lift motor room.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Lift Installation

VOL.

4

3.0

ELECTRICAL

2.3-1

ENGINEERING

Electrical Systems The following requirements for electrical works shall be fully complied with. Consultants are required to submit justifications

and obtain MOE’s approval for non-compliance cases. The requirements are in addition to the usual standard design specifications and are not exhaustive. Consultants are advised to

check with the MOE officer-in-charge if they require further clarifications. 3.1

Electricity supply (applied load) for a typical primary and secondary school shall be 1000kVA each. The ultimate load for

primary school shall be 1250kVA while for secondary school it shall be 1500kVA.

3.2

Main consumer sub-switchboard, distribution boards serving

sensitive equipment such as computer equipment, fire alarm, security alarm, etc shall be equipped with lightning surge arrestor.

3.3

Canteen stalls shall be provided with a Centralised Consumer Metering Panel to house the stalls’ electrical meters. This shall be provided in a closet within the canteen.

3.4

Cabling

standards

requirements: -

must

meet

the

following

minimum

Main Distribution

- PVC/SWA/PVC cables in trench/HD

Distribution

- PVC/PVC

UPVC Pipes

cables

in

metal

ladders/trays or PVC cables in metal trunking

Final Sub-Circuits

- PVC

cables

in

concealed

GI

conduits for all areas All Specialist System

- Approved cables in concealed GI conduits

3.5

All single-phase final distribution board shall be metal-clad complete with outgoing single pole MCBs, incoming D/P MCB and RCCB.

3.6

All three-phase final distribution board shall be metal clad complete with single pole MCBs and triple pole MCBs with appropriate rupturing capacities ratings.

REV-00 / FEB 06

LT Works

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

3.7

ELECTRICAL

2.3-2

All circuits serving computer loads shall be dedicated. Every outgoing circuit shall be equipped with RCCB and designed to connect to a maximum of 3 twin-gang IT power outlet.

3.8

Computer rooms and IT Resource rooms shall be equipped with a

master on-off switch to control all the power points. Such a master switch shall be located next to the lighting switches.

Master switches shall be appropriately identified to prevent accidental operation. 3.9

The electrical points shall be properly located in co-ordination

with equipment and furniture layouts. This is to ensure easy

Electrical Points

access to the points during use and maintenance of equipment. 3.10

Lighting level in all rooms meant for teaching, working and reading purposes shall be designed to an average illuminance of 500 lux with a uniformity factor (min/ave) of 0.7.

The colour

Lighting / Vision Care

temperature shall be 4000k with colour index of 85. 3.11

Lighting controls shall be in rows and parallel to the whiteboard. A light switch shall be provided for each row of light fittings.

Lighting / Vision Care -Whiteboard

3.12

Light fitting at whiteboard shall be an asymmetrical type with correct orientation to direct light beam onto the whiteboard. The

average vertical illuminance shall be 300 lux. Site measurements shall be carried out at night based on 3 x 3 grids. 3.13

Non-dimmable high–frequency electronic ballast shall be used in all fluorescent light fittings within teaching areas/facilities and

offices. 3.14

Reflectors to be matt type.

The louvers attachment shall give

3.15

Ensure ceiling fans do not interfere with the lightings and no

100% iridescence –free reflection.

flickering shadows of the rotating fans are cast on the working plane.

3.16

Unless otherwise specified, lighting in rooms/areas for general usage shall be designed to 300 lux.

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

3.17

ELECTRICAL

2.3-3

Lux level for corridor shall be 50 Lux while that for main school lobby/main foyer/entrance shall be 100 Lux.

3.18

The switch control in the Multi Purpose Hall shall be designed to

Lighting / Vision

purposes and 300 lux for badminton games (recommended) using

-Multi-Purpose

flexibly control the lighting levels i.e. 500 lux for examination row switching.

3.19

Care Hall

The high bay lightings shall be controlled row by row where each

row is arranged parallel with the badminton court layout. During a

badminton game, lights directly above the court shall be switched ‘off’ to avoid glare. 3.20

3.21

There shall be two-way switches for high bay lightings.

switches shall be at the control room and the stage area.

The

Parade square shall be provided with 4 nos. of 400W floodlight. Switches controlling the floodlights shall be located at a safe and convenient location.

3.22

Timers shall be used for perimeter lights, security lights and first storey corridor lights.

3.23

The Stage Lighting system shall comprise (but not limited to) a dimmer rack, 24-channel manual and memory control desk,

lighting bars and beam arms, 8 units of 1000W beam light, 6

Stage Lighting System

units of 650W variable Fresnel spotlight, 4 units of 650W variable prism

convex

spotlight,

4

units

of

500W-4

compartment

cyclorama floodlight, 6 units of 500W-1 compartment cyclorama floodlight and safety chains for the luminaries (certified by PE). 3.24

Consultants shall note that besides the stage lighting system,

general lightings and ceiling fans shall be provided at the stage area.

3.25

Ceiling fan shall come complete with proprietary-made stainless aircraft cables. The ceiling fan rods shall have batch-tested labels from locally approved authorities.

3.26

All wall and ceiling fans shall be certified by locally approved

authorities. In addition, a durable sticker indicating the month and year of installation shall be provided on each fan.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Electrical Fan

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

3.27

Ceiling

fans

ELECTRICAL

2.3- 4

shall

have

1.5m

sweep

controlled

with

speed

regulators. 3.28

Heavy-duty (min. 500mm diameter) wall fan with low noise level (max 60dBA when measured 1m away from fan) shall be provided for the Multi-Purpose Hall. The cage and blades shall not rust easily.

3.29

The Structured Cabling System shall be designed to MOE IT Branch’s latest version of ‘MOE Infrastructure Requirements for School’.

3.30

Structured Cabling System

All cables within rooms/facilities shall run in Heavy-Duty PVC skirting-trunkings.

3.31

All trunking and conduits passing through/terminating in the LAN and Central Server Rooms shall be properly sealed internally and externally to protect from condensation in these rooms.

3.32

Trunking & Conduit

Two-compartment underfloor GI trunking shall be provided for computer rooms and IT Learning Resource Room.

3.33

A clean earth shall be provided for computer network.

3.34

‘Computer Point’ label shall be engraved on the IT socket outlets.

3.35

Where applicable, one LAN point with a twin-gang power point shall be provided on either side of a whiteboard. (One point for teacher

LAN Points

and one point for printer.) 3.36

Consultant shall ensure ceiling fans do not interfere with the projection of the image of the LCD projector. Refer to Diagram 3-A. Refer to diagrams 3-B, 3-C and 3-D for LCD support bracket details

Display –LCD Projector

and setback distances.

Cable Ready

3.37

Cable ready MATV system shall be provided. It shall be designed

3.38

Certificate of Cable Readiness shall be obtained from IDA’s

and installed so as to facilitate future cable TV connection.

Master Antenna Television (MATV) System

approved cable operator. 3.39

The internal telephone distribution network complete with wirings shall be in concealed GI conduits.

REV-01 / MAY 06

Telephones

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

3.40

ELECTRICAL

2.3-5

Public Address System (PA) shall be a stand alone system. The design shall take into consideration the clarity of speech, ease of maintenance as well as future expansion.

3.41

3.42

Public Address System (PA)

PA system provision shall be at the following places: •

Canteen

•

Multi-Purpose Hall

•

Parade Square

•

School Field

•

Each level of each building block (grouped as one zone)

The system shall comprise (but not be limited to) a power

amplifier, PA call station console, ceiling recessed speakers, box speakers,

horn

speakers,

column

speakers,

condenser

microphones, cardiod microphones, microphone stands (table

stand type and floor stand type c/w boom arm), microphones receptacles, DVD player, master station, video display unit, PA intercom set, battery backup, equipment rack and cabinets. 3.43

The system shall be supplied with the following equipment: •

4 units dynamic cardiod microphones

•

2 units table microphones stands

•

2 units telescopic floor microphone stand c/w boom arm

•

1 unit gooseneck microphone stand c/w clip on adapter and table flange for mounting onto lectern.

• 3.44

1 unit wireless clip-on microphone system.

The Professional Sound Reinforcement System for each Audio

Visual Room shall comprise (but not limited to) an 8-channel integrated mixers, microphones, cassette decks, DVD player, speakers and other accessories housed in a console rack.

3.45

The Professional Sound System within the Multi Purpose Hall (MPH) shall comprise (but not limited to) a 16-channel mixing console, equaliser, microphones, cassette decks, DVD player,

speakers and other accessories housed in a console rack located at the control room.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Sound Reinforcement System

VOL.

4

2.3-6

ENGINEERING

3.46

ELECTRICAL

A lockable tabletop cabinet complete with drawers shall be provided. The tabletop space shall be sufficient to cater for the placement of stage lighting dimmer control desk and sound reinforcement system control desk.

3.47

The system shall be designed and commissioned by a sound specialist.

The design shall be capable of providing uniform

coverage throughout the entire area or room where it is installed. The system shall provide high quality sound reinforcement for specific programs such as speeches, talks, debates, dramas and concerts. 3.48

The Electronic Security Alarm System shall comprise dual-tech motion detectors, magnetic door contacts, siren & strobe lights, panic button (in Principal’s Room) and key holding service.

3.49

Electronic Security Alarm System

Each room under surveillance shall be designed/programmed as one zone.

3.50

For the Armoury (in SS only), consultants shall liase with relevant authorities to inspect and approve the security alarm system.

3.51

A dedicated lease line shall be provided and connected to an alarm monitoring company for the key holding services.

3.52

Fire Alarm System shall be a stand-alone manual system. All areas along escape route shall be provided with manual alarm call

points and sounders. Additional sounders shall be provided in all

acoustic-treated rooms such as the Audio Visual Rooms and the Music Rooms. 3.53

Smoke detectors shall be installed in LAN and Central Server rooms.

3.54

The tone of the school bell shall be distinct from the fire alarm bell to allow for immediate recognition by occupants.

3.55

One unit of clock and bell timer shall be installed in the General Office. The clock chime system shall be capable of interfacing with the PA System.

3.56

REV-00 / FEB 06

Terminal devices that allow high-speed signal transmission shall be used when link-ups from equipment to the PLC exceed 10m.

Fire Alarm System

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

2.3- 7

ELECTRICAL

3.57

The central monitoring shall be in the form of LED mimic display panel

3.58

The following points shall be monitored/controlled by alarms:

located in the General Office.

Equipment

Run/

Run/

Fault Trip

Supply

Control

Status

Alarm

Status

Booster Pump

X

X

X

X

Hosereel Pump

X

X

X

X

Start

Start

Power

Water Tank Exhaust Fan Kitchen

Exhaust Fan

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

VRV air Conditioner Air-Cooled Package Unit

3.59

X

Low

High

High

Water

Water

Temp.

Level

Alarm

Status

X

X

Alarm

Level

X

Equipotential netting shall be provided at the parade square and outdoor courts.

3.60

The internal dimensions of the Co-axial Distribution Room (CDR) shall be 1.0m x 1.5m. The height of the room door shall be 2.1m. 2 Nos. of diameter 110mm lead-in pipe shall be provided for the room.

3.61

The internal dimensions of the Telecom Equipment Room (TER) shall be 2.0m x 2.0m. 4 Nos. of diameter 110mm lead-in pipe shall be provided for TER.

3.62

A Design & Technology (D & T) Switch Room is required to cater for the 3-phase electrical supply to Design & Technology areas. Its room area shall be 16 m2. The clear height of the room shall be min. 3.6m.

3.63

The D & T Switch Room shall be located near the D & T Studios 1 & 2, Wood Machineshop and Design Room. The door of the room shall open into a corridor.

REV-01 / MAY 06

Lightning Protection System

Services & Switch Rooms

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

3.64

ELECTRICAL

2.3-8

Maximum width shall be given for the door opening and proper drainage shall be provided for the service trench in the D & T Switch Room. A fire extinguisher and a single gang power point shall also be provided. The lighting level in the room shall be 300 lux.

3.65

The lead-in pipes provision is as shown in Diagram 3-E.

3.66

CCTV Surveillance and Recording System (CSRS) shall be provided at all

schools. The requirements for the above system shall be fully complied with. For cases of non-compliance, consultants are required to submit justifications for MOE (SEMPO) ’s approval.

3.67

The provision of CSRS includes the supply, delivery, installation, testing and commissioning of a set of cameras, CCTV surveillance, recording system, hardware and software. The Specifications for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System is at Appendix 1 of Vol. 4.

Diagram 3-A

SAMPLE OF CEILING DIAGRAM

REV-01 / MAY 06

CCTV Surveillance & Recording System

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

ELECTRICAL

2.3-9

Diagram 3-B

SETBACK DISTANCE AND POSITION OF PROJECTOR

Diagram 3-C

ENLARGED DRAWING OF SECURITY BOLT

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

ELECTRICAL

2.3-10

Diagram 3-D

LCD SUPPORT BRACKET

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

2.3- 11

ELECTRICAL Diagram 3-E

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF SERVICE TRENCH LAYOUT

SECTION OF LEAD-IN PIPE TRENCH FOR D&T SWITCH ROOM

REV-01 / MAY 06

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

2.3-12

ELECTRICAL

REQUIREMENTS ON SAFETY AND SECURITY 3.68

All air-conditioning condenser units or other services

3.69

Light fittings are to be independently supported by

shall be enclosed to prevent unauthorized tampering.

approved means and structural PE’s certification for multi-purpose hall light fitting installation must be

Air-Conditioning

Light Fitting Installation

obtained. 3.70

The following fan installation requirements are to be followed: Fan spacing is recommended to be at 3m apart. • The fan blade must be a minimum of 2.5m above

FFL with 250mm minimum clearance between ceiling and fan blades. • Fan rods are to withstand 10 times the deadweight of the fan.

Fans Installation

• Stainless steel wire with safety factor of at least 20 times the static load of the fan to serve as backup support for the fan in the event that the support fails due to wear and tear. • Fan bolts, nuts, washer must be tightened with torque wrench. • Consultant must ensure 100% inspection of all fans. 3.71

All M & E panels and provisions (such as rising, fire panels, dry riser) are not to protrude into the corridor

or other work spaces as they could pose as safety hazards. Such provisions shall be recessed.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Services to be

well-contained

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

2.4-1

4.0

Plumbing

4.1

The water supply system shall be an indirect feed system with a

single tank, dual pump-set and a main distribution header

PLUMBING

Water Supply

serving two (2) droppers (potable & flush water) for every toilet

shaft. A plinth provision for future toilet flushing water storage tank shall be provided nearby. 4.2

The material of the water tank shall be Glass-Reinforced Plastic (GRP).

4.3

Isolation valve shall be provided at every main and branch distribution pipes. Mini isolation valve shall be provided for each appliance / fixture.

4.4

Sub-meter shall be provided at each canteen stall. From each meter, a separate pipe shall be drawn to the central wash area trough and terminated with a lockable tap.

4.5

Electric Hot Water Storage System shall be used for the Kitchen (Home Economics).

4.6

The hot water supply temperature shall not be less than 500C.

4.7

Grease trap shall be positioned close to the driveway for ease of

maintenance and connection to disposal vehicle/truck.

4.8

Floor trap gratings shall be made of stainless steel.

4.9

Tank room is not required to house the hosereel tank if it is located on the roof. Trellis or otherwise shall be provided to

Hot Water System

Waste and Sanitary System

Hosereel System

shield the hosereel tank from view. 4.10

No pipe work of any kind shall pass through LAN and Central

4.11

Underground concrete storage water tank shall be provided if a

Server Rooms.

fire hydrant pumping system is required for the school development.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Fire Hydrant System & Dry Riser System

VOL.

4

ENGINEERING

2.4-2

PLUMBING

4.12

Diesel driven pumps shall not be used for the pumping system.

4.13

Pillar hydrant shall not be installed in the vicinity of the parade square, outdoor courts and fitness area. If unavoidable, underground hydrant with proper drainage shall be installed.

4.14

Breeching inlets, landing valves, hosereel, pipe or fitting shall

not protrude into the clear pathway of corridors, staircase or other space that will obstruct the smooth passageway of occupants.

4.15

Town gas shall be used.

4.16

Water mains, sanitary drain-lines and hydrant pipes shall not be laid under parade square, school field, outdoor courts and fitness area.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Gas System

3 Other Provisions 3.1

Design Exclusions 3.2

External Work 3.3

Upgrading Works 3.4

Project Signboard 3.5

Hoarding Design

VOL.

4

OTHERS

1.0

DESIGN EXCLUSIONS

3.1-1

PROVISIONS

Design Exclusions The following items are some standard statutory requirements that may not be applicable or relevant to MOE schools.

Consultants shall evaluate the applicability and relevance of each item in the list and apply for necessary waivers from the respective statutory authorities. 1.1

BCA

regulation

states

that

provision

for

the

physically

handicapped are required for every area accessible to students.

This applies only to MOE schools that are within the 10% stock

Handicap Provisions

of schools designated with full-handicap facilities.

For all other schools, only basic-handicap provisions are to be catered for, i.e, barrier-free accessibility is required only at 1 st storey at the Administration area, Canteen and at least one of

the classrooms blocks. In addition, one ambulant-disabled toilet is to be provided at one toilet cluster at every level only. 1.2

BCA regulation states that no part of the room (other than a room in a warehouse) served by windows or openings shall be

more than 12m away horizontally from the windows and

Hall and Canteen widths

openings. MOE schools’ Canteen and Hall block are granted waiver to exceed the stipulated width. Generous openings are provided at two sides of the Canteen and Hall. The Canteen and Hall are also installed

with

ceiling

fans

to

improve

air

circulation.

Furthermore, the Canteen is only used for about half an hour by students during recess time. 1.3

BCA regulation states that the windows and openings for natural ventilation shall be so located that they face and open upon (i) the sky (ii) a street, service road or other public space

(iii) an open-yard or open space located on the building lot (iv) an air-well. MOE schools have rooms at the Canteen block e.g. CCA rooms, Bookshop that do not open directly to the external, but are provided with louvred windows and doors. The doors and windows have to be located within a distance limit acceptable to BCA, to the nearest external space.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Location of Windows and Openings for Material

VOL.

4

OTHERS PROVISIONS

1.4

3.1-2

DESIGN EXCLUSIONS

BCA regulation states that every room in any building shall be provided with natural light and ventilation by means of one or

more windows or openings having an aggregate area of not less than 10% of the floor space of the room and if the aggregate

area is more than 10% of the floor space, at least 10% of the

Area of Window Openings for Natural

Ventilation

floor space shall be openable. The BCA regulation cannot be complied with as stores in the school need to be compartmentalized due to Fire Code. These rooms are non-habitable. 1.5

URA regulation states that walls or fences which are constructed of chain-link fencing, railings, grilles, or any like material which allows the passage of light and air may be constructed up to a

Height of Walls and Fences

maximum height of 3000mm.

MOE schools are allowed to provide a 4600mm high fencing

along the edge of the football field to prevent high balls from flying out of the school compounds for safety reasons. 1.6

FSSD states that where a kitchen is required for the preparation of food, and, where ‘open flame’ cooking appliances are used,

the kitchen shall be separated from other parts of the same building by compartment wall and floor having fire resistance of

Separation

requirement for kitchen

at least one hour.

Separation requirement for kitchen could be exempted in MOE

schools where there would be at least 25% of the perimeter walls of the canteen opening directly onto the external and the floor space is within 9 meter from the nearest opening. 1.7

FSSD requires fireman access panels (FAP) to be provided to every floor.

Fireman access

MOE schools will have unobstructed circulation corridors instead of FAP. 1.8

FSSD regulation requires the dry rising main to be installed in

buildings under purpose group III where habitable height is more than 10m, but does not exceed 60m. MOE projects consist of mainly upgrading of existing blocks. Addition of dry riser and breeching inlets to the existing blocks will require major changes to the structure design. Some projects are exempted from the requirements.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Dry Rising Main

VOL.

4

OTHERS

1.9

DESIGN EXCLUSIONS

3.1-3

PROVISIONS

FSSD regulation requires that the number and distribution of rising mains to all parts of any floor more than 10m and not

exceeding 24m above the ground level is within 38m from a landing valve.

MOE schools are allowed to go beyond 38m, provided there are 2 nos. standby hose within the coverage. 1.10

FSSD regulation requires that decking of the raised floor shall be

constructed of non-combustible material or where combustible material is used as core material, if allowed in the case of sprinkler protected buildings, the top, bottom, all sides and cut

Combustible Material Application

edges shall be covered with material with surface properly complying with Class O (excluding materials for floor finishes)

Timber flooring is allowed in the school hall as part of MOE’s

requirement. The height of the concealed space measured between top of the structural floor and underside of the raised

timber floor decking is usually not more than 55mm high. The school hall also has 2 hose reels and 6 fire extinguishers provided to address this regulation. 1.11

National

Parks

Board

(NPB)

requires

that

the

fire

engine

accessway and access road shall not encroach into green buffers, peripheral plantings verges and planting verges within car parking areas. In

schools

undergoing

upgrading,

due

to

tight

Green Buffers not to be encroached upon

site

configuration, some building blocks cannot be shifted to achieve

the required width of planting verge. Hence, encroachment by

the fire engine access into the green areas is allowed but the green area must be compensated by grass-cell pavers to provide greenery. 1.12

NPB requires provision of a 2m wide planting verge on at least one side of the proposed internal driveway.

Planting Verge

In schools where there is space constraint, a minimum 0.5m wide planting box is provided on one side of the internal driveway. 1.13

NPB requires provision of a minimum 2m soil depth for tree planting. Where the fire engine access is built beneath a building structure which is near to the tree planting strip, only a 1.5m soil depth for tree planting is provided so that headroom of

4.5m can be achieved for the passing of fire engine and school buses.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Soil Depth

VOL.

4

OTHERS PROVISIONS

1.14

3.1-4

DESIGN EXCLUSIONS

IDA requires that the Co-axial Distribution Room (CDR) size to be 2.2m x 2m (internal dimensions). IDA now agreed that the

CDR

CDR size to be reduced to 1m x 0.5m (internal dimensions) but the door height shall be 2.1m 1.15

IDA requires that the Telecom Equipment Room (TER) size to be

3.0m x 2.5m (internal dimensions). IDA now agreed that the TER size be reduced to 2.0m x 2.0m (internal dimensions)

REV-00 / FEB 06

TER

VOL.

4

OTHERS PROVISIONS

3.2-1

EXTERNAL WORKS

2.0

Landscaping

2.1

Basic turfing, trees and shrubs are to be provided to green plots and perimeters around the school.

2.2

Turfing

The selection of plants is to be conducted in consultation with National Parks Board to ensure appropriate provisions for the

plants are planned for. Landscaping features and structures are to be designed in consultation with the school and MOE. 2.3

The following are some pointers which need to be addressed in providing for landscaping in schools: ƒ

Design considerations

Careful attention to spatial design, roof form, building coverage and shadow line to ensure the green areas can thrive without mechanical support (sprinklers etc).

ƒ

Careful selection of building material to support plant life.

ƒ

Ensure safety in the design of softscaping and hardscaping to minimise risks to users and persons involved in

maintaining them (especially of hanging planters, trellises and eco ponds (if any). ƒ

Proper waterproofing, drainage, down pipes or sub-soil

layers for landscaping above ground to be provided for. ƒ

Ensure rainwater down pipes or drains are not choked by fallen leaves due to the location of trees or plants.

ƒ

Minimise any event of soil spillage along corridors especially during wet weather.

2.4

Ensure planting does not cause nuisance or hazards by the type of plant proposed. The characteristics of trees and shrubs that are

preferred but not limited to, are as listed below:

REV-00 / FEB 06

•

fast growing and shady.

•

shed very few leaves and are green all year round.

Flora selection considerations

VOL.

4

OTHERS PROVISIONS

•

3.2-2

EXTERNAL WORKS

have ground roots that are less extensive so as to avoid damage to ground features and underground services.

•

bear little or no fruits as these may attract insects and birds, and spoils may present a hygiene and maintenance problem.

•

flowering shrubs that do not attract insects which may pose harm to students.

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

OTHERS PROVISIONS

UPGRADING WORKS

3.3-1

EXCLUSIONS

3.0

Scope of Upgrading Works for schools undergoing PRIME

3.1

The objective of upgrading is to ensure that school facilities provision meets the latest standards and specifications of MOE in terms of curricular, co-curricular and operational needs. The upgrading works may involve the following:

3.2

ƒ

Increase in general Nett Floor Area (NFA)

ƒ

Increase in no. of classrooms

ƒ

Increase in classroom size

ƒ

Addition of new building facilities

ƒ

Enlargement of facilities

ƒ

Addition or extension of new support facilities

ƒ

Refurbishment to the latest standard of finishes

ƒ

Improvement works to external facilities

The upgrading works have also to meet the latest planning requirements stipulated by MOE and the statutory authorities. Some of the works involved include: Orientation of classrooms

ƒ

Provision of fire engine access

ƒ

Planning setbacks

ƒ

Use of water-saving cisterns in toilets/ sensor-operated flush valves for urinals and water closets in toilet cubicle for ambulant disabled and wheelchair users. Upgrading

of M&E services, e.g new substation and

switchroom,

cabling

and

electrical

fixtures,

air-

conditioning, water reticulation system and gas piping installation. ƒ

Upgrading of civil works e.g underground services and retaining walls.

REV-00 / FEB 06

fulfil latest MOE specifications

Upgrading works to meet latest statutory requirements

ƒ

ƒ

Scope of Upgrading to

VOL.

4

OTHER PROVISIONS

UPGRADING WORKS

3.3-2

EXCLUSIONS

3.3

The design approaches for each school may vary. Consultants are required to carry out analysis of the needs and requirements

Design approach

of the school and recommend suitable solutions for the school. Consultants shall identify and keep MOE informed of any shortcomings of the proposals or solutions.

3.4

The alternatives to upgrading on site include: ƒ

To move the existing school out to a holding school and rebuild a new school on site

ƒ

To move the existing school out to a holding school while upgrading the existing premises

3.5

In the case of upgrading a school with the occupants still operating on site, the two salient criteria are:

Important Criteria for upgrading a school on site

ƒ

To ensure safety of the students

ƒ

To minimise disruption to the operations and normal functioning of the school

3.6

In order to ensure safety of students during the upgrading process, the site planning has to take into consideration the following requirements: ƒ

A separate access to the site for construction vehicles is available

ƒ

A

clear

separation

of

construction

area

from

the

operational side of the school (for schools with no alternative

access

for

construction

vehicles,

it

is

recommended that the school moves out to holding premises) ƒ

Ensure that school’s security, safety and public relations strategies and measures are understood and complied with

REV-01 / MAY 06

Safety Criteria

VOL.

4

OTHERS PROVISIONS

UPGRADING WORKS

3.3-3

EXCLUSIONS

3.6

In order to minimise disruption to normal class activities, the main approach is to minimise structural changes to the existing blocks. ƒ

Minimizing Disruption

The works to existing teaching blocks should be limited to internal A & A works, which can be carried out during the school holidays.

If there are major shortfalls in area, a

new block could be constructed on a vacant area of the site. ƒ

Whenever extensions to existing structures are required,

e.g. extension to the hall and canteen, new load-bearing structures are to be proposed independent of the existing structures. ƒ

Where space permits, a temporary hall/canteen structure is to be provided as a sheltered assembly area during the upgrading/ extension of the old hall/canteen.

ƒ

The construction system to be used would need to be considered very carefully.

Bore piling is to be proposed

for the foundation of the new blocks, as opposed to driven piles. In addition, micro-piling system is to be proposed

for any extension to existing blocks in view of the limited

access and working area near the existing structures. There should be temporary facilities provided in place of the affected facilities.

3.7

Consultants are advised to carry out their own detailed study and analyses of the site and building works and recommend

suitable solutions for the school and MOE for approval prior to commencement of works.

The Consultants shall highlight and

keep MOE informed of the shortcomings of their proposed solutions.

REV-00 / FEB 06

Proposed plans for upgrading

VOL.

4

OTHERS PROVISIONS

4.0

3.4-1

PROJECT SIGNBOARD

The following are samples of project signboard design for MOE’s school development projects. Diagram 4-A

SAMPLE ELEVATION Diagram 4-B

SIGNBOARD PART DETAIL

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

OTHERS PROVISIONS

3.4-2

PROJECT SIGNBOARD Diagram 4-C

SAMPLE FRAME DETAIL Diagram 4-D

SAMPLE SECTION A-A

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

OTHERS PROVISIONS

HOARDING DESIGN

3.5-1

5.0

Hoarding Design for Schools undergoing PRIME

5.0

The hoarding and project signboards to be used for the upgrading works are as shown in Diagrams 5-A to 5-I.

Diagram 5-A

DETAIL •

Signboard to be used (as internal facing) only where construction works are taking place adjacent to existing operating school premises

•

To be aluminum silkscreen / painted

SAFETY SIGNAGE FOR CONSTRUCTION WORKS Diagram 5-B

HOARDING FOR PRIME PROJECTS

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

OTHERS PROVISIONS

3.5-2

HOARDING DESIGN

Diagram 5-C

O-Orange (BS 06E51) G-Grey (BS 00A05) R-Red (BS 04E53)

NOTES •

The colours will be to SO’s approval

•

For project rebuilding works, replace “Upgrading Works” to

B-Blue (BS 020D45) W-White (BS 00E55) BK-Black

“Rebuilding Works” •

Contractor to verify all dimensions on site before fabrication

EXPLANATION FOR GRAPHICS: The design is represented by a pair of hands holding a book with a page about to be turned over revealing a new chapter.

The composition symbolizes the delivery of the education for a new millennium where there will be an

extensive use of its technology. The swirl is the symbol for the new millennium and the circuitry denotes technology. The colours of the MOE’s crest are adopted for the graphics.

REV-00 / FEB 06

VOL.

4

OTHERS PROVISIONS

HOARDING DESIGN

3.5-3

Diagram 5-D

LEGEND O-Orange (BS 08E51) G-Grey (BS 00A05) R-Red (BS 04E53) B-Blue (BS 020D45) W-White (BS 00E55)

* The colours shall be to SO’s Approval

COLOUR DIAGRAM

Diagram 5-E

HOARDING DESIGN FOR NEW WORKS

REV-00 / FEB 06

4 Appendices 4.1

Specifications for CCTV System

Appendix 1

SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUPPLY, DELIVERY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF A CCTV SURVEILLANCE AND RECORDING SYSTEM INCLUDING CAMERAS TO THE SCHOOLS This compliance checklist sets forth the detailed specifications. The explanation to the Code is as follows: Code

Explanation

M

Mandatory The vendor is to meet the necessary mandatory. Primary Requirement The primary requirements refer to the most important specifications. The vendor is to meet the primary requirements or propose substitutes to the primary requirements. Optional Requirement The optional requirements refer to what is preferable and desirable to have. Information

P

O I

REV-00/FEB 06

Page 1 of 11

Appendix 1

1. INTRODUCTION

Description 1.1 Background 1.1.1 Ministry of Education (MOE) is sourcing for a CCTV Surveillance and Recording System including cameras for educational institutes with the option to connect to the school local network. 1.1.2 A newly setup of CCTV System comprises 12 cameras for Primary & Secondary and 16 cameras for Junior College. 1.2 Scope 1.2.1 The vendor must supply, deliver, install, test and commission the CCTV surveillance and recording system with the necessary hardware, software, training and documentation as specified in this document. The vendor is responsible for ensuring that a complete working system is provided. 1.2.2 The work scope must include a professional site survey and advise to the school on the suitability of camera locations and any additional technical requirements. The professional site survey with recommendation on the operation siting of camera location, the type of lens to be used and any technical requirements are to be documented. One copy is to be forwarded to the school for verification and endorsement before any work is carried out. 1.2.3 The work scope must also include the cabling job, like proper termination of DC/AC and Coaxial Cable connections and supply of any other equipment for the complete system as stated in this specification. 1.2.4 The work scope must include follow-up on fine tuning of the camera positions, focusing, reviewing images and recording settings; and any technical adjustment to the hardware and software within 30 days of installation. 1.2.5 The vendor must be responsible for the rectification of all defects within a twelve (12)-month Warranty Period of the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System including Cameras installed at no extra cost to the contract. During the warranty period, the vendor should be responsible for all cost incurred in repairing and replacement of the faulty equipment. The response and turnaround time for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System including Cameras installed during the Warranty Period is shown in Appendix 1, Page 11 of 11. 1.2.6 The vendor is to quote, as an option, for schools to enter into 2 years comprehensive maintenance agreement upon expiry of the warranty period with the option to renew for another 2 years up to a total of 6 years. Vendor should provide the work scope of a maintenance agreement in the submission of the quotation. The scope of the warranty and maintenance agreement should include but not limited to the following:- Repairs and replacement of faulty components - Quarterly servicing, specialised cleaning on sensitive components and testing REV-00/FEB 06

Code

I

Remarks School has the option to decide.

I

M

M

M

M

M

Vendor to submit the quotation as optional item.

O

Page 2 of 11

Appendix 1 Description Attendance to breakdown, power failure and other contingencies when the system is not fully functioning. This includes inspections and investigation on causes of system mal-function and prompt rectification. - Provides quarterly updates with the latest Anti-virus Signature files and Operating System patches. - If the system is connected to the school LAN, the system must be updated with the latest Anti-virus Signature files (on a daily basis) and Operating System patches (as and when available) - Vendor is to provide the renewal of security software license installed in the system. - The response and turnaround time for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System including Cameras for the maintenance contract is shown in Appendix 1, Page 11 of 11. 1.2.7 The specification is given as a performance related specification for the system and equipment. It is the responsibility of the vendors tendering to select the most appropriate equipment to fulfil the objectives and requirements of the system. Part of the tender evaluation process will to access the quality, reliability, and suitability of the equipment proposed. 1.3 General Requirements

Code

Remarks

-

M

Description

Code

The proposed system is to be easily scale for future expansion and needs of the education institutes. 1.3.2 All proposed hardware and software must include features to integrate fully with existing computing resources, namely the school Local Area Network. 1.3.3 All hardware and software being proposed is to be fully compatible and interoperable. With the option to connect to the school local network. The system must be compatible to the school computer which is installed with Microsoft Operating System. 1.3.4 The proposed system should be compliant with all MOE policies, including but not limited to the MOE security standards. 1.3.5 The proposed system is to be compatible and interchangeable with any types or brands of industry standard cameras. 1.3.6 The proposed system is to operate on a 230-volt, single phase, 50 Hz input electric power supply. 1.3.7 The proposed system should include features of lightning protection for components exposed to such risks. 1.3.8 The vendor is to submit as part of the proposal, the detailed technical specifications of all equipment and schematic diagrams of the equipment showing their interfaces with each other, if any. Includes all product brochures, catalogues, detail and updated documentation. 1.3.9 The vendor is to provide up two centralised training sessions for up to 30 participants per session. 1.3.10 The connection from the video cameras to the CCTV

M

1.3.1

REV-00/FEB 06

Remarks

M

M

M

M

M M M

M

Page 3 of 11

Appendix 1 Description network should be made by secured means/medium so to prevent eavesdrop and hacking to the system. The vendor should include detailed technical specifications of the secured means/medium as part of the proposal. 1.3.11 The vendor should include an option to provide 15 minutes Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) to the system. In the event of prolong power failure, the UPS should send shut down signal to the critical system (that cannot withstand power shutdown) for a graceful shutdown sequence.

REV-00/FEB 06

Code

Remarks

M

P

Page 4 of 11

Appendix 1

2. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CCTV SURVEILLANCE AND RECORDING SYSTEM INCLUDING CAMERAS Description 2.1 General 2.1.1 The CCTV Surveillance and Recording System shall be likely to install in the school’s General Office (the actual location shall be determined by the school). 2.2 Operating Environment 2.2.1 The proposed system must include features to integrate with the existing school network infrastructure. 2.2.2 All software for the management of the proposed system must include features to support remote management from a client workstation locally. 2.2.3 The operating system must be embedded Microsoft or Linux. If the proposed system uses any other proprietary OS, vendor is to specify the detail including the country of origin. The vendor should provide all software licences that are deployed for the system to operate. 2.3 Physical Housing 2.3.1 The proposed system is to have all vital recording components and features condensed into a single box unit for ease of use and administration. 2.3.2 The proposed housing must be of industrial grade that can operate under local non-air conditioned environment, 24 hours, 7 days week. Stable temperature under non-air conditioned environment with high performance ventilation system. Vendor is to provide the detail reports of QA Test including: - Thermal Profile Test - Reliability Prediction Test (MTBF) 2.3.3 The proposed system is to have option for non rack mountable or rack mountable to conserve space and easily integrate into existing server rack. 2.3.4 The proposed system is to have at least 2 types of hardware locks, like keyboard lock, security key.

Code

Remarks

I

M M

M

M

M

P P

2.4 CCTV Surveillance and Recording System (Hardware and Software) 2.4.1 The vendor is to state the type of system proposed for CCTV Surveillance and Recording System including the detail of M the hardware and software. 2.4.2 The proposed system is designed such that minimum knowledge on the use of personal computer system is M required for daily operation. 2.4.3 The proposed system is installed with at least an Intel Pentium 4, 2.6 GHz, HT Technology, 1024 MB RAM or M equivalent. 2.4.4 The vendor is to recommend the video compression technique basing on the frame per second stated in M paragraph 2.4.7 and must be open IEEE standard. 2.4.5 The proposed system support PAL/NTSC signal. M 2.4.6 The proposed system is able to support up to 16 cameras. M

REV-00/FEB 06

Page 5 of 11

Appendix 1 Description 2.4.7

2.4.8 2.4.9 2.4.10 2.4.11

2.4.12 2.4.13 2.4.14 2.4.15 2.4.16 2.4.17

2.4.18

2.4.19 2.4.20

2.4.21 2.4.22

2.4.23

2.4.24

2.4.25

2.4.26 2.4.27

The proposed system is able to store up to 3 weeks of recording at least 8 fps and at resolution of 640 x 480 for all 16 cameras in a continuous recording mode. The HDD must be hot swappable and with a 20% buffer capacity. The proposed system is allow Video Triplex Multiplexing (Record, Playback and Archive) simultaneously The proposed system is to have Watermarking feature for video authentication. The proposed system is able to support Watch Dog function. The proposed system is to have motion detection or event recording with zone masking and sensitivity configuration features for individual camera. The proposed system is able to support Time & Date Stamping on Video recording. The proposed system is to have image enhancement feature for individual camera for display and recorded images. The proposed system is to have image digital zoom capability. The proposed system is able to support scheduling for individual camera recording profile. The proposed system is to allow digital search of all videorecordings of cameras based on times and dates stamp. The proposed system allows playbacks and be able to be exported out into both picture and video format (AVI, JPEG or Bitmap). The proposed system must include features to allow user to access with web browser or any client software up to 3 LAN user computer systems within the school. The proposed system must include features to provide network support (100 BaseT). The proposed system must include features for alarm, MMS, SMS or telephone call notification alert upon event triggering. The proposed system is able to output images to TV. The proposed system is to have the option for backup of the recording if the primary HDD failed. Vendor is to provide detail on the types of backup system. The storage device must be hot swappable. The proposed system is to include 1 x 17” LCD monitor or equivalent, keyboard and mouse and/or remote control that allow user to select the viewing of the camera image, configuration / setting of the DVR, exporting images, etc. The proposed system is to consist at least have full screen, 2-split, 4-split, 8-split, 10-split, and 16-split screen displays of video from the cameras. State otherwise if it is different. The proposed system is able to support 4 video outputs (1 x S-Video, 1xVGA, 1xBNC Monitor and 1xTV Monitor). State otherwise if it is different. The proposed system is to have the rotation (Auto-Selector) screen feature. The proposed systems is able to supports a minimum display resolution of 640 X 480 for up to 16 cameras

REV-00/FEB 06

Code

Remarks

M

M M M M M M M M M M

M

M M

M M

p

P

P P P

Page 6 of 11

Appendix 1 Description 2.4.28 The proposed system is able to support different setting in recording rate/speed for different cameras. 2.4.29 The proposed system is able to support output video or images in AVI, JPEG or Bitmap. 2.4.30 The proposed system is to have at least 6 multi-users access levels with password access, security rights for different class of users, etc. Vendor is to provide detail on the multi-users setting. 2.4.31 The proposed system provides video editing facility to allow exporting of certain desired portion of the video-recordings onto DVD/RW (to be provided with the system) or external storage device using USB. The man machine interface of the video editing software shall be user friendly for the user to operate on. 2.4.32 The proposed system is able to support retrieving playback concurrently during recording locally within the designated displays for monitoring. 2.4.33 The proposed system is to have the advanced object feature that allows user to search the movement of object in the particular area selected on the date/time selected. 2.4.34 The proposed system is able to support control and interface with up to 2 x Pan/Tilt/Zoom cameras. 2.4.35 The components for the proposed system must comply with industrial standard that can operate under local non-air conditioned environment, 24 hours recording, 7-days week. Vendor is to provide the detail reports of QA Test including: - Thermal Profile Test - Reliability Prediction Test (MTBF)

2.5 Optional Installation 2.5.1 The vendor is to provide quotation as optional items stated in paragraph 2.5.2 and 2.5.3 for the school to install the additional features. The quotation for the optional items valid for 2 years upon contract awarding. 2.5.2 Connection to School LAN – The vendor provide the option for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System to be connected to the school LAN. The option to connect to the school LAN includes the provision of any additional infrastructure (e.g. cabling) and hardware/software necessary. All personal computers or servers connected to the School LAN have to be installed with Anti-virus software and the latest Operating system patches. When connected to the School LAN, the system will have to comply with all existing MOE security policies e.g. the system must be updated with the latest Anti-virus Signature files (on a daily basis) and Operating System patches (as and when available). If the system should be connected to the school LAN and wireless is proposed, the vendor must comply with all existing MOE security policies including providing a firewall, VPN and any other hardware/software necessary to secure the system from security breaches.

REV-00/FEB 06

Code

Remarks

P P

P

P

P

P

P M

I

O

Page 7 of 11

Appendix 1 Description 2.5.3 Notification Alert Upon Event Triggering – The vendor provides the option for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System to be connected for the notification alert upon event triggering. The option to connection includes the provision of any additional infrastructure (e.g. cabling) and hardware/software necessary for the following: a. SMS (MMS) alert notification. b. External device alarm (siren, burglar alarm or strobe light). c. Telephone call alert. 2.6 CCTV Colour Dome Camera (Indoor Camera) 2.6.1. Day and night colour camera. 2.6.2. A minimum horizontal resolution of at least 420 TV lines. 2.6.3. Image pick-up device of 1/3” Super HAD CCD. Sony CCD or equivalent.

Code O

M M

M

2.6.4. Lens is to have Electronic Iris. Fixed lens and lens must be of glass material. Vendor is to recommend the best focal lens to be used in order to suit the site environment.

2.6.5. White Balance: Auto with manual overwrites 2.6.6. Auto Back Light Compensation (ABLC): Auto with manual overwrites 2.6.7. Minimum Illumination: 0.5 Lux colour (F1.2) and 0.03 Lux black and white (F1.2) 10-Bit. 2.6.8. Electronic Shutter of PAL: 1/50 ~ 1/100,000 Sec 2.6.9. Compatible with various lens types. 2.6.10. Camera assembly is to be easily installed and removable. 2.6.11. Camera is to be able to accept a wide range of input voltage including DC12V /AC24V power supply. 2.6.12. The proposed system is to have camera intelligence light sensing mode control to prevent colour and black and white hunting. 2.6.13. Maximum Aperture Ratio 1:1.3 ~ 2.0 2.6.14. Angle of View H: 74.2 Deg ~ 30 Deg, V:54 Deg ~ 22.4 Deg, D: 96.8 Deg ~ 37.4 Deg 2.6.15. Scanning System 2:1 Interlaced (PAL) 625 Lines / 50 Fields / 25 Frames 2.6.16. Video Output 1.0V[p-p] PAL Composite, 75 ohm / BNC Connector 2.6.17. S/N Ratio: Not less than 50 db (AGC Off) 2.6.18. Operating Temperature: -10 Deg C ~ +50 Deg C 2.6.19. Operating Humidity: 30% ~ 90% RH 2.6.20. Camera must be tempered proof with alarm triggering upon the termination of video transmission to the Surveillance and Recording System.

REV-00/FEB 06

Remarks

M

Vendor is to provide the brand and country of manufactured for the CCD Vendor is to provide the brand and country of manufactured for the Lens.

M M M M M M M M

P P P P P P P M

Page 8 of 11

Appendix 1 Description 2.6.21. Camera and lens must comply with industrial standard that can operate under local environment, 24 hours, 7-days week. Vendor is to provide the detail reports of QA Test conducted on the camera and lens by the manufacturer including the reliability prediction test (MTBF). 2.7 CCTV Colour Fixed Camera (Outdoor Camera) 2.7.1 Day and night colour camera. 2.7.2 A minimum horizontal resolution of 480 TV lines. 2.7.3 Image pick-up device of 1/3” Super HAD CCD. Sony CCD or equivalent.

Code M

M M

M

2.7.4

Lens is to have Auto Iris and Vari-focal lens of 6 to 60mm. The lens must be of glass material. M

2.7.5 2.7.6 2.7.7 2.7.8 2.7.9 2.7.10 2.7.11 2.7.12 2.7.13 2.7.14

2.7.15 2.7.16 2.7.17 2.7.18 2.7.19 2.7.20

2.7.21

White Balance: Auto with manual overwrites. Auto Back Light Compensation (ABLC): Auto with manual overwrites. Minimum Illumination: 0.5 Lux Colour (F1.2) and 0.01 Lux Black and White (F1.2) Picture Elements: Minimum 542 (H) x 582 (V) / PAL Electronic Shutter of PAL: 1/50 ~ 1/100,000 Sec Compatible with various lens types. Camera assembly is easily installed and removable. Lens mount to be CS mount or C mount with the supplied adaptor. Camera is to be able to accept a wide range of input voltage including DC12V/AC24V power supply. The proposed system is to have camera intelligence light sensing mode control to prevent colour and black and white hunting. Scanning System 2:1 Interlaced (PAL) 625 Lines / 50 Fields / 25 Frames Video Output 1V (p-p) PAL Composite, 75 Ohm / BNC Connector S/N Ratio: Not less than 50 db (AGC Off) Operating Temperature: -10 Deg C ~ +50 Deg C Operating Humidity: Less than 90% RH (No condensation) Camera must be tempered proof with alarm triggering upon the termination of video transmission to the Surveillance and Recording System. Outdoor weather proof housing includes sunshield for all outdoor camera installation. The housing must meet IP66 standard.

REV-00/FEB 06

Remarks

Vendor is to provide the brand and country of manufactured for the CCD Vendor is to provide the brand and country of manufactured for the Lens.

M M M M M M M M M M P P P P P M

M

Page 9 of 11

Appendix 1 Description

Code

2.7.22 Camera and lens must comply with industrial standard that can operate under local environment, 24 hours, 7-days week. Vendor is to provide the detail reports of QA Test conducted on the camera and lens by the manufacturer including the reliability prediction test (MTBF). 2.8 Installation 2.8.1 All cabling work (video cable and electrical cables) for indoor is above false ceilings in PVC conduit pipes whenever possible, otherwise in PVC trunking. Detail of cabling work is to be determined during the site survey with the school’s representative after tender is awarded. 2.8.2 All cabling work (video cable and electrical cables) for outdoor is to conceal in water proof PVC conduit pipes. Detail of cabling work is to be determined during the site survey with the school’s representative after tender is awarded. 2.8.3 Coaxial Cable of RG59 up to 150m and RG6 > 150m to 400m. Comply to - UL1354 or equivalent (Must submit certificate) Length marking on cable – compulsory. Include BNC connectors on coaxial cable ends. 2.8.4 To provide all necessary 13 Amp power points for all cameras and DC adapter. 2.8.5 When the DC/AC termination is at the camera point, the DC/AC power supply point is to be enclosed in a metal housing to prevent vandalism and turning off the power supply to the camera. 2.8.6 To supply and install (including ceiling or wall mounting bracket and cabling) for a 21” Flat Screen CRT TV at the General Office. 2.8.7 To supply and install (including video and power supply cabling) for a 17” CCTV monitor at the Security Guard location (exact location is to be determined by the school).

M

2.8.8

The vendor is to provide professional advice to the school for the installation of surge protection device for the appropriate outdoor camera for protection of high voltage surges from nearby lightning strike.

M

2.8.9

The vendor is to provide professional advice to the school for the installation of video signal booster for the appropriate outdoor camera.

M

2.8.10 The vendor will be responsible for providing all access equipment necessary to enable safe installation of all high level equipment and cabling. 2.8.11 All installations must comply with all relevant statutory requirements, Code of Practices, other current regulations and industrial best practices.

REV-00/FEB 06

Remarks

M

M

M

M

M M

M Vendor to submit the quotation for 1 x Surge Protection Device as optional item. Vendor to submit the quotation for 1 x Video Signal Booster as optional item.

M M

Page 10 of 11

Appendix 1

RESPONSE AND TURNAROUND TIME 1.

2.

3.

System Breakdown Severity

S/N 1

SEVERITY Critical

2

Urgent

3

Normal

DEFINITION Critical defect shall be defined as defect, which affects the System critical functionalities or total system failure, and no work around solution exits. This includes the Surveillance and Recording System (hardware and/or software) and/or 50% and above of cameras installed not transmitting images or with blurred images. Urgent defect shall be defined as defect, which affects the System such that required operational objectives cannot be achieved and work-round solution exists. This includes the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System (hardware and/or software) and/or 25% to 49% of cameras installed not transmitting images or with blurred images. Normal defect shall be defined as defect, which affects the camera or other external peripherals. This includes 25% of cameras installed not transmitting images or with blurred images, and external peripherals like keyboard, mouse, remote control, monitors, etc.

Response and Turnaround Time S/N 1

SEVERITY Critical

2

Urgent

3

Normal

RESPONSE TIME Less than Four (4) working hours after receiving service call Less than Eight (8) working hours after receiving service call Next working day

TURNAROUND TIME System must be up within 1 working day System must be up within 2 working days System must be up within 3 working days.

Definition a.

Definition of Working Hours

The “Working Hours” shall be from Monday to Friday (9.00 am to 6.00 pm) excluding Saturday, Sunday and Public Holiday. b.

Definition of Response Time

The “Response Time” shall be the time between notification of the problem to contractor and the response by the contractor to the site. c.

Definition of Turnaround Time

The “Turnaround Time” shall be defined as the period of time between the arrival of the contractor’s maintenance staff after notification by the Authority of the defect and the acceptance by the Authority of the restoration of the system operation availability.

REV-00/FEB 06

Page 11 of 11

Master Revision List Index

Master Revision List Design Handbook Vol. 4 – Technical S/

Page No.

No.

Revision

Circular No. /

No.

Circular Date

1.

1.1-4

01

03/2006 (May 06)

2.

1.2-3

01

03/2006 (May 06)

3.

1.4-2

01

03/2006 (May 06)

Amendment 1.1-4>Drawing - Inserted setbacks from site boundary 1.2-3>Item 2.34 - Amended page reference 1.4-2>Type 4-1>Location – Insert Music Room

4.

1.4-6

01

03/2006 (May 06)

5.

2.3-4

01

03/2006 (May 06)

1.4-6>Type 4-6>Location – Amended “Staff Room” 2.3-4>item 3.3-1 - Inserted “Trunking & Conduit” Index

6.

2.3-7

01

03/2006 (May 06)

2.3-7>item 3.58

7.

2.3-8

01

03/2006 (May 06)

2.3-8>item 3.67

8.

2.3-11

01

03/2006 (May 06)

2.3-11>Drawing title

9.

3.3-2

01

03/2006 (May 06)

3.3-2>Header title

- Inserted table gridline - Omitted “2.3” - Amended title - Amended title